Instrument Family LMG600 User Manual

Instrument Family LMG600

1 to 7 phase precision power analyzer

User Manual

Status: August 28, 2014 V1.009 R23264

 User Manual Instrument Family LMG600

©Copyright 2014

ZES ZIMMER Electronic Systems GmbH ZES ZIMMER Inc.

Tabaksmühlenweg 30
D-61440 Oberursel (Taunus), FRG
phone +49 (0)6171 628750 phone +1 760 550 9371
fax +49 (0)6171 52086
e-mail: sales@[Link] e-mail: usa@[Link]

Internet: [Link]

No part of this document may be reproduced, in any form or by any means, without the permission
in writing from ZES ZIMMER Electronic Systems GmbH.
Observe copyright notice according to DIN ISO 16016!
We reserve the right to implement technical changes at any time, particularly where these changes
will improve the performance of the product.

2/206 [Link]
 Manufacturer Declaration

ZES ZIMMER Electronic Systems GmbH certifies herewith that the device to which this declaration
belongs to is in compliance with all specifications contained in the delivered user manual. It has left
the factory in mechanically and electrically safe condition.

The measuring instrument, tools and standards used in production, adjustment and calibration are
calibrated according to ISO 9000 (traceable to national standards) and correspond to the standard of
precision required to maintain the specified uncertainties.

Tabaksmuehlenweg 30
D-61440 Oberursel
Germany
[Link]

[Link] 3/206
 Contents

Contents

List of Figures 11

1 Introduction 13
1.1 Typical usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
1.2 New features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
1.3 Organization of this manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14

2 Safety 17
2.1 Used symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
2.2 Safety recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
2.2.1 Connection to power supply and protective conductor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
2.2.2 Connection to measurement circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
2.3 Equipment ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
2.4 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
2.5 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
2.6 Technical assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

3 Technical data 25
3.1 Environmental conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
3.2 Basic instrument . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
3.3 Synchronization Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
3.4 VGA/DVI interface (option L6-OPT-DVI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
3.5 Power measurement channel L60-CH-A1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
3.5.1 Voltage channel L60-CH-A1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
3.5.2 Current channel L60-CH-A1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
3.6 Power measurement channel L60-CH-B1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
3.6.1 Voltage channel L60-CH-B1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
3.6.2 Current channel L60-CH-B1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
3.7 Power measurement channel L60-CH-C1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
3.7.1 Voltage channel L60-CH-C1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
3.7.2 Current channel L60-CH-C1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
3.8 Processing signal interface L6-OPT-PSI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
3.8.1 Fast analog inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
3.8.2 Slow analog inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
3.8.3 Analog Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
3.8.4 Switching Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
3.8.5 Switching Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
3.8.6 Speed/Torque/Frequency Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

4 Installation 45
4.1 Unpacking and installing the instrument . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
4.2 Front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
4.3 Rear panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
4.3.1 Base plug-in module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
4.3.2 Channel plug-in modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
4.4 Switching on/off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
4.5 Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
4.5.1 Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
4.5.2 Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
4.5.3 Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
4.5.4 Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
4.5.5 Air filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51

[Link] 5/206
 User Manual Instrument Family LMG600

4.5.6 Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
4.5.7 Touchscreen adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
4.5.8 Software update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
4.5.9 In case of trouble . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

5 Basic concepts 55
5.1 Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
5.2 Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
5.2.1 Wiring of single-channel groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
5.2.2 Wiring of dual channel groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
5.2.3 Wiring of triple channel groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
5.2.4 Wiring using external current sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
5.2.5 Wiring using external voltage sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
5.3 Star-delta conversion, option L6-OPT-SDC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
5.4 Sum channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
5.5 Functional block diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
5.6 Bandwidth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
5.6.1 Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
5.6.2 Anti-aliasing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
5.7 Parallel calculations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
5.8 Calculation of harmonics, option L6-OPT-HRM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
5.8.1 Interharmonics = 0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
5.8.2 Interharmonics = 9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
5.9 Synchronization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
5.10 Measurement without gaps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
5.11 Sample Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
5.12 Measurement uncertainty of measured and calculated values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72

6 Graphical user interface (GUI) 75

6.1 General GUI handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
6.2 Measurement menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
6.2.1 Standard menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
6.2.2 GRAPH menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
6.2.3 Scope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
6.2.4 Plot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
6.2.5 Harmonics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
6.2.6 Vector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
6.2.7 Misc. menu (measurement) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
6.3 Setup menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
6.3.1 INST. menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
6.3.2 Measurement tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
6.3.3 General tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
6.3.4 Interface tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
6.3.5 Options/Key tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
6.3.6 Touchscreen tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
6.3.7 GROUP menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
6.3.8 CHANNEL menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
6.3.9 ACTIONS menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
6.3.10 STORAGE menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
6.3.11 Log tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
6.3.12 Files tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
6.3.13 Status report tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94

7 PC software 95

8 Remote control 97
8.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
8.2 Interface Languages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
8.2.1 Asterisk Commands (IEEE488.1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97

6/206 [Link]
 Contents

8.2.2 Syntax overview with short commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98

8.2.3 SCPI-Command Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
8.2.4 Suffixes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
8.3 Input format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
8.3.1 List Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
8.4 Output Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
8.4.1 ASCII . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
8.4.2 Binary Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
8.5 Timing Behavior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
8.5.1 Parallel vs. sequential configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
8.6 INIM, :READ and :FETCh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
8.7 Cont On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
8.7.1 Timing Behavior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
8.8 Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
8.8.1 LAN Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
8.8.2 RS232 Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
8.9 Remote commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
8.9.1 *ACK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
8.9.2 *CLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
8.9.3 *ESE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
8.9.4 *ESR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
8.9.5 *IDN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
8.9.6 *IST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
8.9.7 *OPC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
8.9.8 *PRE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
8.9.9 *RST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
8.9.10 *SRE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
8.9.11 *STB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
8.9.12 *TRG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
8.9.13 *TST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
8.9.14 *WAI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
8.9.15 *ZLANG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
8.9.16 *ZSRST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
8.9.17 DISB, :BRIGhtness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
8.9.18 IAC, :AC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
8.9.19 ICF, :CFACtor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
8.9.20 IDC, :DC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
8.9.21 IFF, :FFACtor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
8.9.22 IINR, :INRush . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
8.9.23 IMAX, :MAXPk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
8.9.24 IMIN, :MINPk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
8.9.25 IPP, :PPEak . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
8.9.26 IREC, :RECTify . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
8.9.27 ITRMS, [:TRMS] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
8.9.28 FCYC, [:CYCLe] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
8.9.29 FHARM, :HARMonics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
8.9.30 BIAM, :AMPLitude . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
8.9.31 BIIM, :BIMaginary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
8.9.32 BIRE, :BREal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
8.9.33 BIPH, :PHASe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
8.9.34 IHRMS, :RMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
8.9.35 HIHD, :THDistort . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
8.9.36 BPAM, :ACTive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
8.9.37 BSAM, :APParent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
8.9.38 D, :DISTortion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
8.9.39 HPERLEN, :LENGth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
8.9.40 HNUM, :NUM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
8.9.41 HPERNUM, :PNUMber . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124

[Link] 7/206
 User Manual Instrument Family LMG600

8.9.42 BQAM, :REACtive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124

8.9.43 PHARM, :ACTive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
8.9.44 SHARM, :APParent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
8.9.45 QHARM, :REACtive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
8.9.46 QTOT, :TOTReactive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
8.9.47 BUAM, :AMPLitude . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
8.9.48 BUIM, :BIMaginary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
8.9.49 BURE, :BREal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
8.9.50 BUPH, :PHASe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
8.9.51 UHRMS, :RMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
8.9.52 HUHD, :THDistort . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
8.9.53 P, [:ACTive] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
8.9.54 S, :APParent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
8.9.55 PF, :FPACtor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
8.9.56 INCA, :ICAPacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
8.9.57 PHI, :PHASe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
8.9.58 Q, :REACtive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
8.9.59 RSER, :ASResist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
8.9.60 Z, :IMPedance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
8.9.61 XSER, :RSIMpedance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
8.9.62 SPCLEN, :CLENgth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
8.9.63 SPNTR, :NTRacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
8.9.64 SPPTRS, :SAMPles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
8.9.65 SPPTRT, [:TIMe] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
8.9.66 SPSR, :SRATe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
8.9.67 SPSTAT, :STATus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
8.9.68 SPTLEN, :TLENgth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
8.9.69 SPTPOS, :TPOSition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
8.9.70 SPVAL, :VALues . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
8.9.71 TSCFG, :TIMestamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
8.9.72 DURHARM, :DURation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
8.9.73 TSHARM, :TIMestamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
8.9.74 DURNORM, :DURation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
8.9.75 TSNORM, :TIMestamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
8.9.76 DURSP, :DURation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
8.9.77 TSSP, :TIMestamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
8.9.78 UAC, :AC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
8.9.79 UCF, :CFACtor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
8.9.80 UDC, :DC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
8.9.81 UFF, :FFACtor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
8.9.82 UMAX, :MAXPk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
8.9.83 UMIN, :MINPk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
8.9.84 UPP, :PPEak . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
8.9.85 UREC, :RECTify . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
8.9.86 UTRMS, [:TRMS] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
8.9.87 FRMT, :DATa . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
8.9.88 GTL, :GTL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
8.9.89 CONT, :CONTinuous . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
8.9.90 COPY, :COPY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
8.9.91 INIM, :IMMediate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
8.9.92 SCPL, :COUPling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
8.9.93 AVER, :COUNt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
8.9.94 IDLY, :DELay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
8.9.95 IDNI, :IDENtify . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
8.9.96 IJACK, :JACK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
8.9.97 IJLS, :LJACk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
8.9.98 IAUTO, :AUTo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
8.9.99 IRNLS, :LNOMinal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143

8/206 [Link]
 Contents

8.9.100 IRSLS, :LSCaled . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143

8.9.101 IRNULS, :LUNominal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
8.9.102 IRSULS, :LUSCaled . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
8.9.103 IRNG, [:UPPer] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
8.9.104 ISCA, :SCALe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
8.9.105 FAUTO, :AUTo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
8.9.106 HPCOF, [:COFRequency] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
8.9.107 HPFILT, :FSTate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
8.9.108 LPCOF, [:COFRequency] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
8.9.109 LPFILT, :FSTate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
8.9.110 LPTYP, :TYPe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
8.9.111 NFAUTO, :AUTo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
8.9.112 NHPCOF, [:COFRequency] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
8.9.113 NHPFILT, :FSTate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
8.9.114 NLPCOF, [:COFRequency] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
8.9.115 NLPFILT, :FSTate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
8.9.116 NLPTYP, :TYPe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
8.9.117 PROC, :PROCessing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
8.9.118 WFAUTO, :AUTo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
8.9.119 WLPFILT, :FSTate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
8.9.120 GROUP, [:LIST] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
8.9.121 HAAL, :AALiasing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
8.9.122 INTERHARM, :INTerharm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
8.9.123 PROCLS, :LPRocessing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
8.9.124 CTYP, :TYPe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
8.9.125 SCNTR, :NTRacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
8.9.126 SCPTRS, :SAMPles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
8.9.127 SCPTRT, [:TIMe] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
8.9.128 SCSR, :SRATe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
8.9.129 SCTRAC, :TRACk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
8.9.130 WIRE, :WIRing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
8.9.131 CYCLMOD, :MODe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
8.9.132 CYCL, :TIME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
8.9.133 UDLY, :DELay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
8.9.134 IDNU, :IDENtify . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
8.9.135 UJACK, :JACK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
8.9.136 UJLS, :LJACk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
8.9.137 UAUTO, :AUTo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
8.9.138 URNLS, :LNOMinal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
8.9.139 URSLS, :LSCaled . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
8.9.140 URNULS, :LUNominal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
8.9.141 URSULS, :LUSCaled . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
8.9.142 URNG, [:UPPer] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
8.9.143 USCA, :SCALe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
8.9.144 ZSUP, :ZPReject . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
8.9.145 INVMASK, :IMASk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
8.9.146 IST, :INDividual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
8.9.147 SOPT, :PTRansition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
8.9.148 SPPE, [:ENABle] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
8.9.149 PRES, :PRESet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
8.9.150 QUESTMASK, :QMASk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
8.9.151 SQNT, :NTRansition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
8.9.152 SQPT, :PTRansition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
8.9.153 STB, [:REGister] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
8.9.154 SRE, [:ENABle] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
8.9.155 SEQC, :EQCondition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
8.9.156 SEQD, :EQDefault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
8.9.157 SEQE, :EQENable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163

[Link] 9/206
 User Manual Instrument Family LMG600

8.9.158 SREH, :HENable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164

8.9.159 SYSDATE, :DATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
8.9.160 IDN, :DIDentify . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
8.9.161 ERRALL, :ALL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
8.9.162 ERRCNT, :COUNt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
8.9.163 ERR, [:NEXT] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
8.9.164 HEAD, :HEADers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
8.9.165 SHEAD, :SHEaders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
8.9.166 COMBD, :BAUD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
8.9.167 COMECHO, :ECHo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
8.9.168 COMHFC, :HFControl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
8.9.169 IPADDR, :ADDRess . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
8.9.170 IPBCAST, :BROadcast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
8.9.171 IPDHCP, :DHCProtocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
8.9.172 IPDNSA, :DNSA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
8.9.173 IPDNSB, :DNSB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
8.9.174 IPGATE, :GATeway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
8.9.175 IPMAC, :MACad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
8.9.176 IPMASK, :NETMask . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
8.9.177 LANG, :LANGuage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
8.9.178 TZONELS, :LTIMezone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
8.9.179 TZONE, :TIMezone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
8.9.180 ACTN, [:DEFine] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
8.9.181 IINC, :ICURrent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
8.9.182 TRANSIENTABORT, :TABORT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
8.9.183 TRANSIENTSTART, :TSTART . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
8.9.184 SYNCBW, :BANDwidth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
8.9.185 TDEM, :DEModulator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
8.9.186 THPCOF, [:COFRequency] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
8.9.187 THYS, :HYSTeresis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
8.9.188 TLEV, :LEVel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
8.9.189 TLPCOF, [:COFRequency] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
8.9.190 SYNCLS, :LSource . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
8.9.191 SYNC, :SOURce . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
8.10 SCPI error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
8.11 Further error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
8.12 Remote examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
8.12.1 Reading sample values of an event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192

Index 193

10/206 [Link]
 List of Figures

List of Figures

3.1 Synchronization connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26

3.2 Processing signal interface, analog input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
3.3 Processing signal interface, analog output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
3.4 Processing signal interface, digital inputs and outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
3.5 Processing signal interface, speed torque frequency input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

4.1 Elements of the front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45

4.2 Elements of the base plug-in module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
4.3 Elements of a single channel plug-in module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48

5.1 Single channel with wiring 1φ 2W . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56

5.2 2 channels with wiring 1φ 3W, split phase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
5.3 2 channels with wiring 3φ 3W, Aron circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
5.4 3 channels with wiring 3φ 4W, U⅄, I⅄ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
5.5 3 channels with wiring 3φ 3W, UΔ, I⅄ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
5.6 Comparing different current measurement techniques . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
5.7 Comparing different voltage measurement techniques . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
5.8 Functional block diagram of a power measurement channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

6.1 Elements of the user interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75

6.2 Soft key displaying a state. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
6.3 Soft key to change an entry from a list. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
6.4 Soft key to trigger an action. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
6.5 Soft key which is currently disabled . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
6.6 A disabled soft key which still displays a state. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
6.7 Status bar which is located at the bottom of the screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
6.8 A standard menu displaying a few values from the first group. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
6.9 Standard menu showing a scrollable list of sum values from each group. . . . . . . . . 82
6.10 A standard menu displaying many values. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
6.11 A standard menu displaying harmonic values. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
6.12 Menu to configure global measurement settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
6.13 Menu to configure a specific group. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
6.14 Menu to configure range-related parameters for each channel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91

[Link] 11/206
 1 Introduction

1 Introduction

1.1 Typical usage

The requirements of modern power measurement have changed a great deal in recent years. While
it was previously sufficient to measure a single three-phase supply system with a three-phase power
meter, this has become a rare task by now. When using a variable-frequency drive, the output power to
the motor must be measured as well as the DC link circuit and the mechanical power of the motor itself.
Modern lighting equipment as well as solar inverters, often requires the efficiency measurement of the
electrical ballast. The signals to be measured simultaneously are very different: DC, mixed signals,
high frequency AC signals, single-phase, three-phase, either with as much bandwidth as possible or
with a reduced bandwidth by filtering. Modern power measuring equipment is required to perform
tasks such as star-delta conversion, calculation of harmonic values, measurement of total losses and
of mechanical power simultaneously.
Also, the requirements of modern IT systems have changed. Nowadays, mobile USB storage devices
are used almost exclusively. Common RS232 and IEEE488.2 interfaces are still in use, but LAN
interfaces have become more attractive due to lower costs and higher transfer speed.
In the past, all these tasks were solved by using a variety of instruments. The user had then the painful
task of controlling and synchronizing the instruments in order to get consistent and meaningful data.
ZES ZIMMER has addressed all these challenges during the developing the LMG600. While this
instrument is pushing the limits of what is technically possible, the complex subject is presented to
the user in a novel attractive and easily accessible way.

1.2 New features

The measurement channels are the base of all measurements. Several of these channels can be
combined together into groups. The channels of a group have a common setup such as the same
synchronization and filter settings. In consequence, a group needs to be be made up of equal
channel types with matching properties. For channel types and their properties see Technical
data [3→25].
A group represents a logical measurement point (e.g. it can represent a three-phase system with
voltages in delta circuit and currents in star circuit, an Aron circuit, a single phase measurement,
etc.).
Novel group properties of the LMG600:

DualPath Processing: Parallel measurement of narrow and wide bandwidth values

In previous generations of instruments, a voltage or current channel contained an analog signal
conditioner, whose output was digitized by an analog-digital converter (ADC) and then passed on to
further digital signal processing. Afterwards, the signal could either be measured with full bandwidth,
or after filtering with an anti-aliasing filter (to meet the Nyquist–Shannon sampling theorem) to
perform analyses like fast Fourier transform (FFT) or digital filtering. The common practice to
measure the signal with full bandwidth and to analyze it without using any anti-aliasing filter bears
a very big risk of producing incorrect values. An error of 50 % caused by aliasing could be recognized
quickly, but a 0.5 % error would be much harder to detect. While this is considered a practicable way,
it is not satisfying at all in many cases.
In the LMG600, the complete signal conditioning has been improved. The analog signal conditioning
stays unchanged, but the following processing has been revolutionized: Each single voltage and current
channel of the LMG600 contains two analog-digital converters (ADC). One for the wide bandwidth

[Link] 13/206
 User Manual Instrument Family LMG600

signal without filtering and one for the narrow bandwidth signal with proper anti-aliasing filter. The
sampling values of both ADCs are digitally processed in parallel. With this novel DualPath approach,
the user has access to narrow and wide bandwidth values simultaneously without the risk of aliasing.

Access of the measurement values

Well proven techniques like star-delta conversion have already been known to produce multiples of
measured values. In the past, it was relatively simple to assign each of these calculated values to
a calculation channel. Today, this is no longer possible because there are too many combinations
(narrow/wide bandwidth, physical/star/delta/sum values). The result would be a large confusing
number of channels and the handling of the user interface would become very inconvenient.
With the LMG600 comes a complete solution. On the display, the values of a group are show and one
can comfortably select any measurand by means of the user interface.
When the instrument is being controlled remotely (via the interfaces), the improved SCPI concept of
using a suffix comes into effect. In addition to the physical channel number, there is a 4-digit suffix
for each group. Each digit is used to encode a property of the desired value like bandwidth or wiring
(e.g. star, delta, etc.). For more details about this system see Logical Suffixes [8.2.4→100].

Measuring different types of values simultaneously

In the past, when values like RMS, harmonics, or flicker were measured, the instruments were usually
limited in the variety of what type of values could be simultaneously measured and recorded depending
on the measuring mode. One reason for this limitation was the limited digital signal processing power.
Another reason is the fact, that measurement of both, wide bandwidth values and harmonics, with
just one ADC is not possible (as discussed above).
The LMG600 has the capability to measure wide bandwidth values and harmonics simultaneously
using the novel DualPath technology. The hardware and software of the instrument is designed for
this task. However, this leads to new challenges when recording values. For example if one wants
to measure the harmonics according to the standard over an interval of 200 ms, but the RMS values
over an interval of 50 ms, the interesting question is when to record which value in order to get a
meaningful time relation. With the LMG600, the user can decide whether the recording is triggered
by the RMS values or by the harmonics. If the recording is triggered by the slower signal, only the
last set of faster values will be stored. If the recording is triggered by the faster signal, the slower
values will be stored repeatedly if needed. This process provides the highest possible consistency of
recorded data.

1.3 Organization of this manual

This manual was up-to-date at the time of publication. The manuals corresponding to the current
software version can be accessed in the “Files” Tab in [STORAGE] (see Files tab [6.3.12→94]).
This manual is organized in the following way:
• In Safety [2→17], very important safety information is provided. Please read it carefully to
prevent hazards.
• In Technical data [3→25], information about the performance of the instrument, starting
with environmental conditions and ending in the exact specifications, is presented.
• In Installation [4→45], an overview of the control elements and connectors as well as hints
concerning maintenance are provided.
• In Basic concepts [5→55], background information about basic working and organization
principles is described. Additionally, information concerning the connection of the instrument
to different measuring circuits is provided
• In Graphical user interface (GUI) [6→75], the menus and how to use them are described.
For those just wanting to remote control the instrument, it is worthwhile to read this section as
here the different settings (and so their commands) are arranged in such a way, that you find
commands which belong together.

14/206 [Link]
 1 Introduction

• In Remote control [8→97], one can find a detailed description on how to remotely control
the instrument. A list of all available commands with their description (e.g. allowed values,
details to pay attention to, etc.) is also provided.
• Finally, an index is provided which can be used to find any topics, commands, etc.

[Link] 15/206
 2 Safety

2 Safety

2.1 Used symbols

This user manual describes and explains symbols which can be found throughout this manual and are
displayed on the instrument. Strict observation of these warning signs is required for safe operation.
Electric shock
This symbol indicates danger of injury or death from electric shock due to dangerous voltages. Do
not touch. Use extreme caution.
AC voltages over 33 V RMS, 46.7 V peak and DC voltages over 70 V are deemed to be hazardous live
according to IEC 61010 resp. EN 61010. There is a danger of electric shock. This can cause death or
injury to body or health. Furthermore, there is a risk of material damage.
High temperature
This symbol indicates a high temperature. There is a burn and fire hazard. There is a danger of
fire or injury to body or health due to hot surfaces or material. Furthermore, there can be material
damage to other objects due to contact or close proximity. If a burn or fire does occur, there can be
further damage which can cause death or injury to body or health.
Caution
This symbol indicates the risk of damage to persons or material. Also if material damage occur, there
can be further damage which can cause death or injury to body or health.
This symbol on the instrument indicates that this user manual has to be consulted for instruction or
further information to ensure save operation.
Information
This symbol indicates facts or information regarding the power analyzer which should be observed for
easy and accurate operation.
Male connector
This symbol indicates a male connector.
Female connector }
This symbol indicates a female connector.
Narrow bandwidth ᚆ
This symbol indicates a narrow bandwidth in DualPath processing mode, see Bandwidth [5.6→62].
Wide bandwidth ᚊ
This symbol indicates a wide bandwidth in DualPath processing mode, see Bandwidth [5.6→62].
Star circuit ⅄
This symbol is used to indicate a circuit or wiring in star circuit, see Star-delta conversion,
option L6-OPT-SDC [5.3→60].
Delta circuit Δ
This symbol is used to indicate a circuit or wiring in delta circuit, see Star-delta conversion,
option L6-OPT-SDC [5.3→60].
Protective conductor terminal
This symbol indicates the terminal for the protective conductor. See also Connection to power
supply and protective conductor [2.2.1→19].
Soft keys <Symbol>
Soft keys do not have a fixed function. The contextual assigned function is indicated in the GUI next
to the soft keys. See also Front panel [4.2→45].
Fixed function keys [Key]
Fixed function keys (further on just called keys) have the function designated above the key.

[Link] 17/206
 User Manual Instrument Family LMG600

Touch element
Item
A displayed item in the GUI which can be selected, activated or changed by direct touch.
References/links
[→17] References to tables, figures, listings, etc. consist of their identifier followed by an arrow and the page
number.
References to chapters, sections, and subsections consist of the heading of the section and the sectional
Used symbols
number followed by an arrow and the page number.
[2.1→17]
References to interface commands (always given from the short command set because they are unique)
UTRMS [8.9.86→139]
are written in typewriter font.
Clicking on any of these references in the PDF version of this document navigates directly to the
respective section.

2.2 Safety recommendations

This instrument has been designed according to IEC 61010 and EN 61010 (for specific version, please
see the declaration of conformity located at the beginning of the manual) and left the factory in a
mechanically and electrically safe condition. To maintain safe operation, the user must follow the
instructions and warnings mentioned in this manual. The instrument must only be used for the
purposes described in this manual.
If damage to the analyzer is suspected, it must be removed from operation to prevent possible further
damage or injury. In addition the required repair work must be carried out by a trained technician
at a suitable repair facility.
Until shown to be otherwise, the analyzer must be considered unsafe under following circumstances:
• There is visual evidence of physical damage
• It fails to operate correctly
• The instrument has been heavily overloaded due to to high currents (short circuit or something
similar)
• The instrument has been heavily overloaded due to to high voltages
• The instrument has been operated with supply voltage outside specifications
• There are loose parts inside the instrument
• Long term storage has taken place in conditions outside the stated specifications for safe storage
• Condensation is present
• Rough transport has occurred
The intended use of this instrument (within the limitations stated in the technical data, see Technical
data [3→25]) is to measure electrical current and voltage, calculate additional values and output the
data.
The instrument is only allowed to operate when all four stands are placed on a flat surface or if the
instrument is mounted in a rack. In both cases, the cooling inlets and outlets have to be kept clear
(see Environmental conditions [3.1→25]).
When handling electricity and/or an electrical apparatus, be sure to observe all safety rules. These
rules include, but are not limited to, the following:

• Opening the instrument exposes components which are under high [Link] is only permitted
to trained personnel. User risks injury by removing cover and may void any manufacturer’s
warranty. All voltage sources must be disconnected from the instrument before any instrument
covers are removed. Only suitably qualified personnel are permitted the access the internal
components for the purpose of calibration, service, or assembly and disassembly.
If the instrument has been opened, a high voltage test and a test of the protective conductor is

18/206 [Link]
 2 Safety

necessary according EN 61010 following the closing of the instrument for safety purposes prior
to use.

• Fuses may only be replaced with the correctly rated and recommended types as written in this
manual. Reading the rated values from the fuse to be replaced is not permitted. The use of
repaired, short-circuited or insufficient fuses is not permitted.

• The environmental conditions (see Environmental conditions [3.1→25]) must be observed

to ensure safe operation of the instrument.
Use in any type of wet or explosive environment or in presence of flammable gases or liquids is
especially prohibited.

• The instrument and accessories (such as wires and clips) must be checked before each use.
Defective parts must be replaced.

• Ventilation openings must be kept clear (see Environmental conditions [3.1→25]) to

guarantee the required air flow needed to prevent overheating of the instrument. The air filter at
the air inlets must be clean to permit sufficient air flow. Do not operate the instrument without
air filter or the filter holder as injury may result.
Especially take care to place the instrument not above sheets of paper which could get sucked
into the ventilation openings at the bottom of the instrument!
When mounting the instrument into a rack, make sure that the slide rails do not cover any
ventilation openings.

• The instrument must not be used in a medical environment nor in any other environment that
may have a potential effect on life or health.

• Impacts or rough handling may damage the instrument. Do not place heavy objects on the
instrument.

• If the weight (see Weight [3.2→26]) of the instrument is too heavy to be carried by one person,
carry the instrument with two persons and/or use an appropriate tool. In all cases, use the
handles of the instrument to lift and carry it safely.

• The instrument is not designed to detect hazards or similar! A wrong reading (e.g. by choosing
a wrong filter or range) could give you the wrong impression of a safe state. Use appropriate
tools (e.g. a voltage detector) instead of this instrument to detect dangerous conditions.

• Be careful when connecting external equipment like an external keyboard or mouse to the
instrument. They might not be designed to operate in the same EMC environment as the
instrument and therefore they could be disturbed. This could lead to unwanted operation of the
instrument like changing ranges or similar.

• When connecting the instrument watch the order of connections: First connect it to the
protective conductor and the power supply (see Connection to power supply and
protective conductor [2.2.1→19]), then connect it to the measurement circuit (see
Connection to measurement circuit [2.2.2→20]). Then switch on the instrument, and
finally, after double checking the wiring, switch on the measurement circuit.

• This equipment was designed according to IEC 61010 and EN 61010 which are general safety
standards for equipment for measurement, control and laboratory use. In a concrete application
or environment further safety standards might be applicable and have to be regarded in addition.

2.2.1 Connection to power supply and protective conductor

• Before connecting the mains cable to the power supply, it must be made sure that the mains
supply voltage corresponds to the voltage indicated on the identification plate of the instrument.
If a voltage selector switch exists, it must be set appropriately. A suitable power source has to
be used to operate the instrument.

[Link] 19/206
 User Manual Instrument Family LMG600

• The mains plug may only be inserted into a mains power supply socket with protective earth
contact. This protection must not be disabled by the usage of plugs, cables or extension cords
without protective earth.
The mains plug must be inserted into the mains socket before any other connections are made
to the instrument. Any kind of interruption of the protective earth, inside or outside the
instrument, or disconnecting the protective earth connector can result in an unsafe condition of
the instrument and is not allowed. The usage of cables, plugs, sockets or adapters with only two
poles, prongs or connectors is not allowed.

The additional protective conductor terminal of the instrument chassis must be used in cases
where an earth current in excess of 10 A might result accidentally from the circuit under test.

Such currents are too large for the earthing connection of the instrument’s supply
cord. In case of a single fault, the protective conductor might not be able to carry
this current. If it would be interrupted, the case would no longer be protected against
electric shock!

In this case, connect the additional protective conductor terminal with an adequately rated cable
to a suitable earthing point. The additional protective conductor terminal is limited to currents
up to 32 A.

If reliable earthing cannot be realized, the connections between the circuit under test and the
instrument must be fused appropriately.

The earth terminal on the instrument must not be used as the only earth connection for the
instrument nor must the circuit under test nor any other instrument be earthed by this terminal.
The additional protective conductor is marked with following symbol:

2.2.2 Connection to measurement circuit

• Remove all energy sources from the measurement circuit before making any connections between
this circuit and the analyzer. Do not connect or disconnect any cables while they are live relative
to earth.

• Use only measurement cables with safety connectors and sufficient cross section. Be sure that
the cables have a sufficient voltage and current rating and are usable for the desired overvoltage
and measurement category.

Cables not having safety but standard connectors might have insufficient clearance and
creepage distances, even if they are plugged into the socket. So there is always a risk
of an electric shock.

Use only colored cables which match to the color of the jack to help prevent a wrong connection.

When connecting the measurement circuit, take special care not to connect the voltage wires to
the current input of the instrument. When switching the measurement circuit on, this would
result in a short circuit which bears the risk of damage to the instrument and to the user!

Such short circuits can be very dangerous, as currents of several thousand amperes
might be carried during the short circuit!

For the connection of the voltage measurement circuit to the instrument use only cables with
suitable fuses, like those delivered with the instrument.

The fuses in the voltage measurement cables will interrupt the current flow in case
that these cables are accidentally inserted into the low ohmic current measurement
jacks. Therefore short circuiting of a high power source (e.g. the output of an energy
distribution transformer) will not cause any hazard.

20/206 [Link]
 2 Safety

The yellow and black voltage cables have each an implemented fuse. Before and after each
measurement: Check the fuse! To replace this fuse, remove the cable on both sides from all
circuits to make it free of dangerous voltages. Disassemble the fuse holder. Replace the fuse
only with following type:
6.3x32 mm, FF 500 mA, 1000 V, AC+DC, 30 kA breaking capacity
Reassemble the fuse holder.
• When connecting to high power measurement circuits (e.g. the output of an energy distribution
transformer), massive damage could occur when mismatching cables, short-circuiting the
measurement circuit, or using the current jacks of the instrument instead of the voltage jacks
or similar. So it is recommended to use appropriate fuses in all measurement cables. When
selecting a fuse, ensure that at least the following properties are met:
– The usual measuring current must flow without interruption (rated current of the fuse)
– The short circuit current of the measurement circuit must be interrupted safely (breaking
capacity of the fuse)
– The maximum voltage of the measurement circuit must be interrupted safely (rated voltage
of the fuse)
– The fuse must be suitable for the type of current: AC, DC or both (breaking capacity of
the fuse)
– The fuse must be fast enough to protect the cables and the instrument
• The maximum voltages between the jacks }U and }U* as well as }U and }USensor may not
exceed the technical specifications (see Power measurement channel L60-CH-A1 [3.5→27],
Power measurement channel L60-CH-B1 [3.6→32], etc.).
• The maximum currents at the jacks }I and }I* as well as the maximum voltage between the
jacks }I and }ISensor may not exceed the technical specifications (see Power measurement
channel L60-CH-A1 [3.5→27], Power measurement channel L60-CH-B1 [3.6→32],
etc.).
• The maximum voltages of the jacks }U, }U*, }USensor , }I, }I* and }ISensor against earth
may not exceed the technical specifications (see Power measurement channel L60-CH-A1
[3.5→27], Power measurement channel L60-CH-B1 [3.6→32], etc.).
• The maximum voltages of the jacks }U, }U*and }USensor against }I, }I* and }ISensor may not
exceed the technical specifications (see Power measurement channel L60-CH-A1 [3.5→27],
Power measurement channel L60-CH-B1 [3.6→32], etc.).
• External current sensors or transformers with 1 A or 5 A secondary current must be connected
to the jacks }I and }I* only. External devices with higher secondary currents are not
allowed, because they could drive too big currents in case of overload which could interrupt
the measurement channel due to overloading! For the same reason it is not allowed to use fuses
in this current measurement wires.
Before using these jacks, test if they have a low impedance current path to prevent high voltages
at the output of the external device.
In general, it is dangerous to interrupt the secondary side of a current transformer as
there might appear very high voltages which could lead to electric shock.
For transformers with 1 A or 5 A secondary current, the jacks }I and }I* can carry
sufficient overload current and will not be interrupted by usual overload.
• Cables from/to external sensors are usually designed to operate with low voltages <10 V. When
using these in an environment with a high voltage circuit, use caution as further isolation might
be necessary. For the operation itself the isolation is sufficient, but if these cables touch a bare
conductor with dangerous voltages this can cause an unsafe condition! In such cases, further
isolation might be necessary.
For example, the secondary cables of a current clamp have a very low voltage, but they could
touch the current bar which has a dangerous voltage against earth.

[Link] 21/206
 User Manual Instrument Family LMG600

• Especially when establishing external connections, special care must be taken to prevent
electrostatic discharge.

• Different sensors might require a different type of cable to be connected to the instrument.
When changing a sensor, it has to be ensured, than a suitable cable is used. Usually a cable is
dedicated to single sensor.

• Keep away from energized measurement circuits to prevent electric shock. When performing
measurements on installations or circuits, please observe all safety regulations and guidelines.
In particular, only suitable measurement accessories should be used. Only suitably qualified
personnel are permitted to work with energized measurement circuits.

• When you put the instrument out of operation, all external cables shall be removed. Special
care has to be taken when disconnecting current sensors. Before interrupting their secondary
current, the primary current has to be switched off. After disconnecting, the secondary side of
the current sensors has to be short-circuited to prevent dangerous voltages.

2.3 Equipment ratings

The instrument is rated for following values:

• Supply, see Basic instrument [3.2→25]

• Connections, see Basic instrument [3.2→25], Power measurement channel L60-CH-

A1 [3.5→27], Power measurement channel L60-CH-B1 [3.6→32], Power measurement
channel L60-CH-C1 [3.7→36]

• Environmental conditions, see Environmental conditions [3.1→25]

• Degree of ingress protection (IP), see Basic instrument [3.2→25]

2.4 Installation

For the installation of the instrument, the following items have to be regarded:

• Apply no signals while the instrument is not operating, see Safety recommendations
[2.2→18]

• Installation/Mounting Desktop/Rack, see Installation [2.4→22]

• The instrument must be connected to a suitable protective earthing, see Connection to power
supply and protective conductor [2.2.1→19]

• Before connecting to the power supply, ensure compatibility, see Connection to power
supply and protective conductor [2.2.1→19]

• Ventilation requirements, see Environmental conditions [3.1→25]

• The safety of any system incorporating the equipment is the responsibility of the assembler of
the system!

22/206 [Link]
 2 Safety

2.5 Operation

Before and while operating the instrument, the following items have to be considered:
• Description of the controls, see Front panel [4.2→45].
• The instrument shall not be positioned in such a way that operation of the disconnecting device
is hampered.
• Connection of accessories or other equipment, see Connection [5.2→56].
• For explanations of the used symbols on the instrument, see Used symbols [2.1→17].
• Consumable materials (battery), see Battery [4.5.4→50].
• Cleaning of filter, housing, see Cleaning [4.5.1→49] and Air filter [4.5.5→51].
• If the instrument is used in a manner not specified by the manufacturer, the protection provided
by the instrument may be impaired!

2.6 Technical assistance

For technical assistance you can contact the supplier of the instrument or the manufacturer:
ZES ZIMMER Electronic Systems GmbH
Tabaksmühlenweg 30
D-61440 Oberursel
Germany
Phone: +49 (0)6171/628750
Fax: +49 (0)6171/52086
Email: sales@[Link]
URL: [Link]

[Link] 23/206
 3 Technical data

3 Technical data

The terms and definitions used in this section are amongst others defined in IEC 61010-1/EN 61010-1
(version according to the above declaration of conformity).

3.1 Environmental conditions

This instrument is intended for use under the following environmental conditions:
• Indoor use only
• Altitude up to 2000 m
• Temperature 5 ℃ to 40 ℃
• Maximum relative humidity 80 % for temperatures up to 31 ℃ decreasing linearly to 50 % relative
humidity at 40 ℃, non-condensing
• Mains supply voltage fluctuations up to ±10 % of the nominal voltage
• Transient overvoltages up to the levels of overvoltage category II, i.e. to be supplied from a
power outlet of the building wiring
• Temporary overvoltages occurring on the mains supply
• Pollution degree 2, i.e. only non-conductive pollution occurs except that occasionally a
temporary conductivity caused by condensation is expected
• Below the instrument a clearance of >13 mm and on each side of the instrument a clearance
of >20 mm must be kept clear of anything which could reduce the air flow for cooling the
instrument.

3.2 Basic instrument

Display
Color display, resolution 1024x600 pixels

Mains supply
100 … 230 V, 47 … 63 Hz, max. 400 W (depending on installed options and connected devices), 2 fuses
5x20 mm, F 10A H 250V according IEC 60127-2 sheet 5. Please regard that the switching capacity has
to be “H“!
IEC connector C14 according IEC 60320-1/EN 60320-1.
Do only use supply cables which have a protective conductor and a cross section of at least
3*0.75 mm2 .

Degree of ingress protection

IP20

Storage temperature
-20 ℃ … +50 ℃

Safety
IEC 61010-1/EN 61010-1, version according to the above declaration of conformity

EMC
EN 61326-1, version according to the above declaration of conformity
EN 61000-3-2, version according to the above declaration of conformity
EN 61000-3-3, version according to the above declaration of conformity

[Link] 25/206
 User Manual Instrument Family LMG600

Case dimensions
Desktop instr. for 7 plugs: (WxHxD) 433 mm x 177 mm x 590 mm
19” instrument for 7 plugs: (WxHxD) 84 HP x 4 U x 590 mm

Weight
Depending on option:
max. 18.5 kg for instrument for 7 plugs
max. 15.5 kg for instrument for 4 plugs

3.3 Synchronization Connector

This jack (see Figure 4.2 [→47]) is used for signals concerning synchronization and measurement
control. All of this signals can be configured as input or output and can be used to control the
instrument by external devices or to signal the state of the instrument to control external devices,
receptively.

1
1 Reserved
9

9
Reserved 2
10
Sync_Transient_I/O
Reserved 3
11 Reserved
Reserved 4
12
+5 V 5
13
Reserved 6
14
Sync_Energy_I/O
Reserved 7
15
Sync_Frequency_I/O
Reserved 8
15

Sync_Cycle_I/O
8

Figure 3.1: Synchronization connector , 15 pin D-SUB male face view

1. Reserved
This pin is reserved for future purposes.
2. SYNC_Transient_IO
Input: A rising edge triggers a transient recording in the instrument.
Output: A rising edge indicates, that a transient was triggered in the instrument. After 0.1 ms
the signal returns to 0.
3. Reserved
This pin is reserved for future purposes.
4. GND
5. GND
GND for all input and output signals and for the auxiliary power supply. Please keep in mind,
that this ground is not connected to the case and the protective earth of the instrument!
6. SYNC_Energy_IO
During the 1 state the integration is running, during the 0 state there is no integration.
7. SYNC_Frequency_IO
Input: The synchronisation frequency is determined by the rising edge of the signal. It can be
used in the instrument by choosing external synchronization, see Sync settings [→90].
8. SYNC_Cycle_IO
Input: Each rising edge of this signal starts a new measurement cycle. The duration of each cycle
must not exceed the range that can be set up in the instrument. This signal is only evaluated,
if external cycle is activated, see Measurement tab [6.3.2→86].

26/206 [Link]
 3 Technical data

9. Reserved
This pin is reserved for future purposes.
10. Reserved
This pin is reserved for future purposes.
11. Reserved
This pin is reserved for future purposes.
12. +5 V
Auxiliary supply with ±10 % tolerance, internal serial protective resistor 10 Ω.
13. Reserved
This pin is reserved for future purposes.
14. Reserved
This pin is reserved for future purposes.
15. Reserved
This pin is reserved for future purposes.

Input Signal
Low is detected for voltage ≤0.8 V (@ -0.15 mA)
High is detected for voltage ≥2.3 V (@ -0.1 mA)
There is an internal pull up resistor to +5 V. The signal must be in the range from -0.3 V to +5.3 V.

Output Signal
Low voltage ≤0.5 V, +1,5 mA…-1,5 mA
High voltage ≥4.3 V, +1 mA…-1 mA

3.4 VGA/DVI interface (option L6-OPT-DVI)

Jack to connect an external display or video projector. It supports digital signals as well as analog
signals.
For the digital DVI signals you can connect a DVI cable directly. If you need analog VGA signals,
please use a commercially available adaptor which handles the interface from the DVI pin out to the
usual 15 pin HD-SUB VGA connector.
The external display/projector must support following resolution:
• LMG670
1024x768 pixel at 50 frames per second
• LMG640
800x600 pixel at 50 frames per second

3.5 Power measurement channel L60-CH-A1

This channel is rated

• for 600 V according to measurement category CAT IV
• for 1000 V according to measurement category CAT III
• for 1000 V according to measurement category CAT II
• other circuits: working voltage 1000 V, working voltage peak 3200 V and transient overvoltage
3000 V
The RMS values specified for the ranges are the maximum RMS values which could be measured
theoretically. This values are not allowed to apply if safe operation or any other safety values are not
guaranteed.

[Link] 27/206
 User Manual Instrument Family LMG600

Support of DualPath (dual bandwidth) mode

This channel supports the DualPath mode, see Bandwidth [5.6→62].

Sample rate and bandwidth of the wide bandwidth converter

Sample rate: 1, 21 MS/s
Resolution: 18 bit
Bandwidth, analog anti-aliasing filter disabled: 10 MHz
Bandwidth, analog anti-aliasing filter activated: about 150 kHz

Sample rate and bandwidth of the narrow bandwidth converter

Sample rate: 151, 51 kS/s
Resolution: 18 bit
Bandwidth, analog anti-aliasing filter always activated: about 15 kHz

Signal filter
This filters are analog filters in the signal path with a bandwidth of about 15 kHz and 150 kHz.
To ensure the anti-aliasing function for the corresponding analog-digital converters (ADC) with an
attenuation of >50 dB at higher frequencies than half of sampling rate the specified design parameters
were chosen.

Analog anti-aliasing filter 15 kHz (narrowband)

Design parameter: Bessel filter, 5th order, cutoff frequency 14.5 kHz
Frequency / Hz Filter attenuation in % Filter attenuation in dB
10 0.0004 0.0000
20 0.0003 0.0000
50 0.0000 0.0000
100 -0.0012 -0.0001
200 -0.0058 -0.0005
500 -0.0385 -0.0033
1000 -0.1552 -0.0135
2000 -0.6210 -0.0541
5000 -3.8385 -0.3400
10000 -14.7440 -1.3855
15000 -31.1127 -3.2372
75000 -99.7121 -50.8267

Analog anti-aliasing filter 150 kHz (wideband)

Design parameter: Bessel filter, 7th order, cutoff frequency 145 kHz
Frequency / Hz Filter attenuation in % Filter attenuation in dB
10 0.0000 0.0000
20 0.0000 0.0000
50 0.0000 0.0000
100 -0.0000 -0.0000
200 -0.0001 -0.0000
500 -0.0004 -0.0000
1000 -0.0016 -0.0001
2000 -0.0064 -0.0006
5000 -0.0398 -0.0035
10000 -0.1593 -0.0138
20000 -0.6359 -0.0554
50000 -3.9203 -0.3474
100000 -14.9399 -1.4055
150000 -31.0563 -3.2301
600000 -99.7028 -50.5399

28/206 [Link]
 3 Technical data

Harmonics
The special capabilities of this channel for the harmonics measurement are described in
Interharmonics = 0 [5.8.1→66].

CE Harmonics
CE Harmonische are the case when INTERHARM = 9 and fundamental frequency between 45 Hz and INTERHARM
65 Hz. For those is valid: [8.9.122→151]

1. Relative deviation between f1 and frequency fsyn , to which the sampling rate is synchronized
is <0.03 % of f1 under steady-state conditions.

2. The attenuation of the anti-aliasing filter is >50 dB at higher frequencies than half of sampling
rate.

3. The instrument complies with class I according IEC 61000-4-7 Ed. 2.0 and
EN 61000-4-7 Ed. 2.0.

4. Uncertainty according IEC 61000-4-7 Ed. 2.0 and EN 61000-4-7 Ed. 2.0
with m = measuring value and nom = nominal value of the range:

voltage measurement Um ≥ 1 % Unom: ± 5 % Um

Um < 1 % Unom: ± 0.05 % Unom
current measurement Im ≥ 3 % Inom: ± 5 % Im
Im < 3 % Inom: ± 0.15 % Inom

Measurement uncertainty
The measurement uncertainty is valid under the following conditions:

1. Sinusoidal voltage and current

2. Ambient temperature (23±3) ℃, no additional heating or cooling (e.g. by sunlight or current of

air)

3. The temperature effect is ±(0.01 % of reading)/ K in the range of 5 ℃ … 20 ℃ and 26 ℃ … 40 ℃

4. warm up time 1 h

5. The upper range value is defined by the maximum peak value, see Voltage channel L60-CH-
A1 [3.5.1→31] and Current channel L60-CH-A1 [3.5.2→32]. All other values are calculated
from voltage, current and active power. The tolerances results from the functional relationship,
see Measurement uncertainty of measured and calculated values [5.12→72].

6. Specified are the direct measured and unfiltered measuring values. For the specification of the
filtered measuring values, see Signal filter [3.5→28].

7. The upper power range value is the product of upper voltage range value and upper current
range value. The specification is valid for power factor 0 … 1.

8. Voltage and current are higher than 10 % of nominal range and not higher than the maximum
TRMS value of the range. Voltage peak and current peak are not higher than range peak.

9. All specifications above 1 MHz are design values.

10. The instrument should be calibrated every 12 month, last adjustment not older than 12 months
and adjustment was done at 23 ℃.

[Link] 29/206
 User Manual Instrument Family LMG600

The values are to be interpreted as ±(% of reading + % of upper range value).

Frequency DC 0.05 Hz … 45 Hz 45 Hz … 65 Hz 3 kHz … 10 kHz

65 Hz … 3 kHz
Voltage }U* 0.02 + 0.08 0.015 + 0.03 0.01 + 0.02 0.03 + 0.06
Voltage }USensor 0.02 + 0.08 0.015 + 0.03 0.01 + 0.02 0.03 + 0.06
Current }I* 0.02 + 0.1 0.015 + 0.03 0.01 + 0.02 0.03 + 0.06
5 mA … 5 A range
Current }I* 0.02 + 0.1b 0.015 + 0.03a 0.01 + 0.02a 0.1 + 0.2a
10 A … 32 A range
Current }ISensor 0.02 + 0.08 0.015 + 0.03 0.01 + 0.02 0.03 + 0.06
Active power }U*/}I* 0.032 + 0.09 0.024 + 0.03 0.015 + 0.01 0.048 + 0.06
5 mA … 5 A range
Active power }U*/}I* 0.032 + 0.09d 0.024 + 0.03c 0.015 + 0.01c 0.104 + 0.13c
10 A … 32 A range
Active power }U*/}ISensor 0.032 + 0.08 0.024 + 0.03 0.015 + 0.01 0.048 + 0.06
Active power }USensor /}I* 0.032 + 0.09 0.024 + 0.03 0.015 + 0.01 0.048 + 0.06
5 mA … 5 A range
Active power }USensor /}I* 0.032 + 0.09d 0.024 + 0.03c 0.015 + 0.01c 0.104 + 0.13c
10 A … 32 A range
Active power }USensor /}ISensor 0.032 + 0.08 0.024 + 0.03 0.015 + 0.01 0.048 + 0.06
a additional uncertainty in the 10 A … 32 A range: ± 30AµA
2 ∗ Itrms 2

b additional uncertainty in the 10 A … 32 A range: ± 50AµA

2 ∗ Itrms 2
c additional uncertainty in the 10 A … 32 A range: ± 30AµA
2 ∗ Itrms 2 ∗ Utrms
d additional uncertainty in the 10 A … 32 A range: ± 50AµA
2 ∗ Itrms 2 ∗ Utrms

Frequency 10 kHz … 50 kHz 50 kHz … 100 kHz 100 kHz … 500 kHz
Voltage }U* 0.2 + 0.4 0.5 + 1.0
Voltage }USensor 0.2 + 0.4 0.4 + 0.8
Current }I* 0.2 + 0.4 0.5 + 1.0
5 mA … 5 A range
Current }I* 0.3 + 0.6a f/100 kHz * 0.8 +
10 A … 32 A range f/100 kHz * 1.2a
Current }ISensor 0.2 + 0.4 0.4 + 0.8
Active power }U*/}I* 0.32 + 0.4 0.8 + 1.0
5 mA … 5 A range
Active power }U*/}I* 0.4 + 0.5c f/100 kHz * 0.8 + f/100 kHz * 1.0 +
10 A … 32 A range f/100 kHz * 0.8c f/100 kHz * 1.1c
Active power }U*/}ISensor 0.32 + 0.4 0.72 + 0.9
Active power }USensor /}I* 0.32 + 0.4 0.72 + 0.9
5 mA … 5 A range
Active power }USensor /}I* 0.4 + 0.5c f/100 kHz * 0.8 + f/100 kHz * 1.0 +
10 A … 32 A range f/100 kHz * 0.8c f/100 kHz * 1.0c
Active power }USensor /}ISensor 0.32 + 0.4 0.64 + 0.8
a additional uncertainty in the 10 A … 32 A range: ± 30AµA
2 ∗ Itrms 2
c additional uncertainty in the 10 A … 32 A range: ± 30AµA
2 ∗ Itrms 2 ∗ Utrms

30/206 [Link]
 3 Technical data

Frequency 500 kHz … 1 MHz 1 MHz … 2 MHz 2 MHz … 10 MHz

Voltage }U* 0.5 + 1.0 f/1 MHz * 1.5 + f/1 MHz * 1.5
Voltage }USensor 0.4 + 0.8 f/1 MHz * 0.7 + f/1 MHz * 1.5
Current }I* 0.5 + 1.0 f/1 MHz * 1.0 + -
5 mA … 5 A range f/1 MHz * 2.0
Current }I* -
10 A … 32 A range
Current }ISensor 0.4 + 0.8 f/1 MHz * 0.7 + f/1 MHz * 1.5
Active power }U*/}I* 0.8 + 1.0 f/1 MHz * 2.0 + -
5 mA … 5 A range f/1 MHz * 1.8
Active power }U*/}I* -
10 A … 32 A range
Active power }U*/}ISensor 0.72 + 0.9 f/1 MHz * 1.8 + f/1 MHz * 1.5
Active power }USensor /}I* 0.72 + 0.9 f/1 MHz * 1.4 + -
5 mA … 5 A range f/1 MHz * 1.8
Active power }USensor /}I* -
10 A … 32 A range
Active power }USensor /}ISensor 0.64 + 0.8 f/1 MHz * 1.1 + f/1 MHz * 1.5

Common-mode rejection ratio (CMRR)

Common-mode rejection ratio is measured by using a sinusoidal voltage of 100 V against earth. For
the voltage ranges the signal is applied to the short circuit jacks }U and }U* resp. }U and }USensor .
For the current ranges the signal is applied to the short circuit jacks }I and }ISensor resp. to the }I
jack.

Common-mode Signal- U*, U*, Usensor, I*, I*, Isensor,

frequency Filter 3V 1000 V 4V 5 mA 32 A 4A
range range range range range range
53 Hz 15 kHz >120 dB >120 dB >120 dB >160 dB >150 dB >120 dB
53 Hz off >120 dB >120 dB >120 dB >160 dB >150 dB >120 dB
100 kHz 15 kHz >120 dB >120 dB >115 dB >160 dB >150 dB >115 dB
100 kHz off >75 dB >75 dB >110 dB >100 dB >150 dB >110 dB

3.5.1 Voltage channel L60-CH-A1

Measurement ranges for the jacks }U*/}U

Nominal range / V 3 6 12.5 25 60 130 250 400 600 1000

Max. TRMS value / V 3.3 6.6 13.8 27.5 66 136 270 440 660 1000
Max. peak value / V 6 12 25 50 100 200 400 800 1600 3200
Input impedance about 4.59 MΩ, 3 pF
Overload capability 1000 V + 10 % continuously, 1500 V for 1s
Capacity against earth about 90 pF

Measurement ranges for the jacks }USensor /}U

Nominal range / V 0.030 0.060 0.120 0.250 0.500 1 2 4

Max. TRMS value / V 0.033 0.066 0.132 0.275 0.550 1.1 2.2 4.4
Max. peak value / V 0.0977 0.1953 0.3906 0.7813 1.563 3.125 6.25 12.5
Input impedance about 100 kΩ, 34 pF
Overload capability 100 V continuously, 250 V for 1 s
Capacity against earth about 90 pF

[Link] 31/206
 User Manual Instrument Family LMG600

3.5.2 Current channel L60-CH-A1

Measurement ranges for the jacks }I*/}I
Nominal value / A 0.005 0.010 0.020 0.040 0.080 0.150 0.300 0.600
Max. TRMS value / A 0.0055 0.011 0.022 0.044 0.088 0.165 0.330 0.660
Max. peak value / A 0.014 0.028 0.056 0.112 0.224 0.469 0.938 1.875
Input impedance about 2.2 Ω about 600 mΩ about 80 mΩ
Overload capability LMG operating, 10 A continuously, 150 A for 10 ms
Capacity against earth about 90 pF

Nominal value / A 1.2 2.5 5 10 20 32

Max. TRMS value / A 1.32 2.75 5.5 11 22 32
Max. peak value / A 3.75 7.5 15 30 60 120
Input impedance about 20 mΩ about 10 mΩ
Overload capability LMG operating, 32 A continuously, 150 A for 10 ms
Capacity against earth 90 pF

Measurement ranges for the jacks }ISensor /}I

Nominal range / V 0.030 0.060 0.120 0.250 0.500 1 2 4
Max. TRMS value / V 0.033 0.066 0.132 0.275 0.550 1.1 2.2 4.4
Max. peak value / V 0.0977 0.1953 0.3906 0.7813 1.563 3.125 6.25 12.5
Input impedance about 100 kΩ, 34 pF
Overload capability 100 V continuously, 250 V for 1 s
Capacity against earth about 90 pF

3.6 Power measurement channel L60-CH-B1

This channel is rated

• for 600 V according to measurement category CAT IV

• for 1000 V according to measurement category CAT III

• for 1000 V according to measurement category CAT II

• other circuits: working voltage 1000 V, working voltage peak 3200 V and transient overvoltage
3000 V

The RMS values specified for the ranges are the maximum RMS values which could be measured
theoretically. This values are not allowed to apply if safe operation or any other safety values are not
guaranteed.

Support of DualPath (dual bandwidth) mode

This channel supports the DualPath mode, see Bandwidth [5.6→62].

Sample rate and bandwidth of the wide bandwidth converter

Sample rate: 151, 51 kS/s
Resolution: 16 bit
Bandwidth: 500 kHz

Sample rate and bandwidth of the narrow bandwidth converter

Sample rate: 151, 51 kS/s
Resolution: 16 bit
Bandwidth, analog anti-aliasing filter always activated: about 15 kHz

32/206 [Link]
 3 Technical data

Signal filter
This filter is an analog filter in the signal path with a bandwidth of about 15 kHz. To ensure the
anti-aliasing function for the analog-digital converter (ADC) with an attenuation of >50 dB at higher
frequencies than half of sampling rate the specified design parameters were chosen.

Analog anti-aliasing filter 15 kHz (narrowband)

Design parameter: Bessel filter, 5th order, cutoff frequency 14.5 kHz
Frequency / Hz Filter attenuation in % Filter attenuation in dB
10 0.0004 0.0000
20 0.0003 0.0000
50 0.0000 0.0000
100 -0.0012 -0.0001
200 -0.0058 -0.0005
500 -0.0385 -0.0033
1000 -0.1552 -0.0135
2000 -0.6210 -0.0541
5000 -3.8385 -0.3400
10000 -14.7440 -1.3855
15000 -31.1127 -3.2372
75000 -99.7121 -50.8267

Harmonics
The special capabilities of this channel for the harmonics measurement are in principle described in
Interharmonics = 0 [5.8.1→66] but with following tables:

Processing single path, auto filter off

# Filter setting Harmonics Fundamental Gaps Max. Order or
setting frequency frequency
1 <15 kHz no effect 2 - 7.5 Hz no 2000th or filter
frequency
2 <15 kHz no effect 7.5 - 33 Hz no filter frequency
3 <15 kHz no effect 33 Hz - 7.5 kHz yes filter frequency
4 15 kHz no effect 2 - 7.5 Hz no 2000th
5 15 kHz no effect 7.5 - 33 Hz no 15 kHz
6 15 kHz no effect 33 Hz - 7.5 kHz yes 15 kHz
9 no filter Custom* 20 - 37.5 Hz yes 2000th
10 no filter Custom* 37.5 - 7.5 kHz yes 75 kHz
11 no filter Auto — — —
*
Aliasing is not prevented by the instrument, see Anti-aliasing [5.6.2→64]
The combination #11 (no filter, harmonics set to auto) is not valid, because without filter there can
be no guarantee for no aliasing. So there no harmonics will be calculated.

Processing single path, auto filter on, auto harmonics

# Filter setting Harmonics Fundamental Gaps Max. Order or
setting frequency frequency
12 Auto on Auto 2 - 7.5 Hz no 2000th
13 Auto on Auto 7.5 - 33 Hz no 15 kHz
14 Auto on Auto 33 - 7.5 kHz yes 15 kHz

Processing single path, auto filter on, custom harmonics

# Filter setting Harmonics Fundamental Gaps Max. Order or
setting frequency frequency
16 Auto on Custom 2 - 7.5 Hz no 2000th
17 Auto on Custom 7.5 - 33 Hz no 15 kHz
18 Auto on Custom* 33 - 7.5 kHz yes 75 kHz
*
Aliasing is not prevented by the instrument, see Anti-aliasing [5.6.2→64]

[Link] 33/206
 User Manual Instrument Family LMG600

Processing dual path

# Filter setting Harmonics Fundamental Gaps Max. Order or
setting frequency frequency
20 <15 kHz no effect 2 - 7.5 Hz no 2000th or filter
frequency
21 <15 kHz no effect 7.5 - 33 Hz no filter frequency
22 <15 kHz no effect 33 Hz - 7.5 kHz yes filter frequency
23 15 kHz or auto no effect 2 - 7.5 Hz no 2000th
filter off
24 15 kHz or auto no effect 7.5 - 33 Hz no 15 kHz
filter off
25 15 kHz or auto no effect 33 - 7.5 kHz yes 15 kHz
filter off
With dual path processing the harmonics are just computed for the small band values. There is no
calculation for wide band values.

CE Harmonics
INTERHARM CE Harmonische are the case when INTERHARM = 9 and fundamental frequency between 45 Hz and
[8.9.122→151] 65 Hz. For those is valid:
1. Relative deviation between f1 and frequency fsyn , to which the sampling rate is synchronised
is <0.03 % of f1 under steady-state conditions.
2. The attenuation of the anti-aliasing filter is >50 dB at higher frequencies than half of sampling
rate.
3. The instrument complies with class I according IEC 61000-4-7 Ed. 2.0 and
EN 61000-4-7 Ed. 2.0.
4. Uncertainty according IEC 61000-4-7 Ed. 2.0 and EN 61000-4-7 Ed. 2.0
with m = measuring value and nom = nominal value of the range:

voltage measurement Um ≥ 1 % Unom: ± 5 % Um

Um < 1 % Unom: ± 0.05 % Unom
current measurement Im ≥ 3 % Inom: ± 5 % Im
Im < 3 % Inom: ± 0.15 % Inom

Measurement uncertainty
The measurement uncertainty is valid under the following conditions:
1. Sinusoidal voltage and current
2. Ambient temperature (23±3) ℃, no additional heating or cooling (e.g. by sunlight or current of
air)
3. The temperature effect is ±(0.01 % of reading)/ K in the range of 5 ℃ … 20 ℃ and 26 ℃ … 40 ℃
4. warm up time 1 h
5. The upper range value is defined by the maximum peak value, see Voltage channel L60-CH-
B1 [3.6.1→36] and Current channel L60-CH-B1 [3.6.2→36]. All other values are calculated
from voltage, current and active power. The tolerances results from the functional relationship,
see Measurement uncertainty of measured and calculated values [5.12→72].
6. Specified are the direct measured and unfiltered measuring values. For the specification of the
filtered measuring values, see Signal filter [3.6→33].
7. The upper power range value is the product of upper voltage range value and upper current
range value. The specification is valid for power factor 0 … 1.
8. Voltage and current are higher than 10 % of nominal range and not higher than the maximum
TRMS value of the range. Voltage peak and current peak are not higher than range peak.

34/206 [Link]
 3 Technical data

9. The instrument should be calibrated every 12 month, last adjustment not older than 12 months
and adjustment was done at 23 ℃.

The values are to be interpreted as ±(% of reading + % of upper range value).

Frequency DC 0.05 Hz … 45 Hz 45 Hz … 65 Hz 1 kHz … 5 kHz

65 Hz … 1 kHz
Voltage }U* 0.1 + 0.1 0.1 + 0.1 0.05 + 0.05 0.2 + 0.2
Current }I* 5 mA … 5 A range 0.1 + 0.1 0.1 + 0.1 0.05 + 0.05 0.2 + 0.2
Current }ISensor
Current }I* 10 A … 32 A range 0.1 + 0.1b 0.1 + 0.1a 0.05 + 0.05a 0.2 + 0.2a
Active power }U*/}I* 0.16 + 0.1 0.16 + 0.1 0.07 + 0.04 0.32 + 0.2
5 mA … 5 A range
Active power }U*/}ISensor
Active power }U*/}I* 0.16 + 0.1d 0.16 + 0.1c 0.07 + 0.04c 0.32 + 0.2c
10 A … 32 A range
a additional uncertainty in the 10 A … 32 A range: ± 30AµA
2 ∗ Itrms 2
b additional uncertainty in the 10 A … 32 A range: ± 50AµA
2 ∗ Itrms 2
c additional uncertainty in the 10 A … 32 A range: ± 30AµA
2 ∗ Itrms 2 ∗ Utrms
d additional uncertainty in the 10 A … 32 A range: ± 50AµA
2 ∗ Itrms 2 ∗ Utrms

Frequency 5 kHz … 20 kHz 20 kHz … 100 kHz 100 kHz … 500 kHz
Voltage }U* 0.3 + 0.4 0.4 + 0.8 f/100 kHz * 0.8 +
f/100 kHz * 1.2
Current }I* 5 mA … 5 A range 0.3 + 0.4 0.4 + 0.8 f/100 kHz * 0.8 +
Current }ISensor f/100 kHz * 1.2
Current }I* 10 A … 32 A range 0.6 + 1.2a 1.5 + 1.5a f/100 kHz * 2.0 +
f/100 kHz * 2.0a
Active power }U*/}I* 5 mA … 5 A range 0.48 + 0.4 0.64 + 0.8 f/100 kHz * 1.28 +
Active power }U*/}ISensor f/100 kHz * 1.2
Active power }U*/}I* 10 A … 32 A range 0.72 + 0.8c 1.52 + 1.15c f/100 kHz * 2.24 +
f/100 kHz * 1.6c
a additional uncertainty in the 10 A … 32 A range: ± 30AµA
2 ∗ Itrms 2
c additional uncertainty in the 10 A … 32 A range: ± 30AµA
2 ∗ Itrms 2 ∗ Utrms

Common-mode rejection ratio (CMRR)

Common-mode rejection ratio is measured by using a sinusoidal voltage of 100 V against earth. For
the voltage ranges the signal is applied to the short circuit jacks }U and }U* . For the current ranges
the signal is applied to the short circuit jacks }I and }ISensor resp. to the }I jack.

Common-mode Signal- U*, U*, I*, I*, Isensor,

frequency Filter 3V 1000 V 5 mA 32 A 4A
range range range range range
53 Hz 15 kHz >120 dB >120 dB >160 dB >150 dB >120 dB
53 Hz off >120 dB >120 dB >160 dB >150 dB >120 dB
100 kHz 15 kHz >120 dB >120 dB >160 dB >150 dB >115 dB
100 kHz off >75 dB >75 dB >100 dB >150 dB >110 dB

[Link] 35/206
 User Manual Instrument Family LMG600

3.6.1 Voltage channel L60-CH-B1

Measurement ranges for the jacks }U*/}U
Nominal range / V 3 6 12.5 25 60 130 250 400 600 1000
Max. TRMS value / V 3.3 6.6 13.8 27.5 66 136 270 440 660 1000
Max. peak value / V 6 12 25 50 100 200 400 800 1600 3200
Input impedance about 4.59 MΩ, 3 pF
Overload capability 1000 V + 10 % continuously, 1500 V for 1s
Capacity against earth about 90 pF

3.6.2 Current channel L60-CH-B1

Measurement ranges for the jacks }I*/}I
Nominal value / A 0.005 0.010 0.020 0.040 0.080 0.150 0.300 0.600
Max. TRMS value / A 0.0055 0.011 0.022 0.044 0.088 0.165 0.330 0.660
Max. peak value / A 0.014 0.028 0.056 0.112 0.224 0.469 0.938 1.875
Input impedance about 2.2 Ω about 600 mΩ about 80 mΩ
Overload capability LMG operating, 10 A continuously, 150 A for 10 ms
Capacity against earth about 90 pF

Nominal value / A 1.2 2.5 5 10 20 32

Max. TRMS value / A 1.32 2.75 5.5 11 22 32
Max. peak value / A 3.75 7.5 15 30 60 120
Input impedance about 20 mΩ about 10 mΩ
Overload capability LMG operating, 32 A continuously, 150 A for 10 ms
Capacity against earth 90 pF

Measurement ranges for the jacks }ISensor /}I

Nominal range / V 0.030 0.060 0.120 0.250 0.500 1 2 4
Max. TRMS value / V 0.033 0.066 0.132 0.275 0.550 1.1 2.2 4.4
Max. peak value / V 0.0977 0.1953 0.3906 0.7813 1.563 3.125 6.25 12.5
Input impedance about 100 kΩ, 34 pF
Overload capability 100 V continuously, 250 V for 1 s
Capacity against earth about 90 pF

3.7 Power measurement channel L60-CH-C1

This channel is rated

• for 600 V according to measurement category CAT IV
• for 1000 V according to measurement category CAT III
• for 1000 V according to measurement category CAT II
• other circuits: working voltage 1000 V, working voltage peak 3200 V and transient overvoltage
3000 V
The RMS values specified for the ranges are the maximum RMS values which could be measured
theoretically. This values are not allowed to apply if safe operation or any other safety values are not
guaranteed.

Support of DualPath (dual bandwidth) mode

This channel does not measure wide bandwidth values and does therefore not support the DualPath
mode (see Bandwidth [5.6→62]).

Sample rate and bandwidth

Sample rate: 151, 51 kS/s
Resolution: 16 bit
Bandwidth, analog anti-aliasing filter always activated: about 15 kHz

36/206 [Link]
 3 Technical data

Signal filter

This filter is an analog filter in the signal path with a bandwidth of about 15 kHz. To ensure the
anti-aliasing function for the analog-digital converter (ADC) with an attenuation of >50 dB at higher
frequencies than half of sampling rate the specified design parameters were chosen.

Analog anti-aliasing filter 15 kHz (narrowband)

Design parameter: Bessel filter, 5th order, cutoff frequency 14.5 kHz
Frequency / Hz Filter attenuation in % Filter attenuation in dB
10 0.0004 0.0000
20 0.0003 0.0000
50 0.0000 0.0000
100 -0.0012 -0.0001
200 -0.0058 -0.0005
500 -0.0385 -0.0033
1000 -0.1552 -0.0135
2000 -0.6210 -0.0541
5000 -3.8385 -0.3400
10000 -14.7440 -1.3855
15000 -31.1127 -3.2372
75000 -99.7121 -50.8267

Harmonics

The special capabilities of this channel for the harmonics measurement are in principle described in
Interharmonics = 0 [5.8.1→66] but with following tables:

Processing single path, auto filter off

# Filter setting Harmonics Fundamental Gaps Max. Order or

setting frequency frequency
1 <15 kHz no effect 2 - 7.5 Hz no 2000th or filter
frequency
2 <15 kHz no effect 7.5 - 33 Hz no filter frequency
3 <15 kHz no effect 33 Hz - 7.5 kHz yes filter frequency
4 15 kHz no effect 2 - 7.5 Hz no 2000th
5 15 kHz no effect 7.5 - 33 Hz no 15 kHz
6 15 kHz no effect 33 Hz - 7.5 kHz yes 15 kHz

Processing single path, auto filter on, auto harmonics

# Filter setting Harmonics Fundamental Gaps Max. Order or

setting frequency frequency
12 Auto on Auto 2 - 7.5 Hz no 2000th
13 Auto on Auto 7.5 - 33 Hz no 15 kHz
14 Auto on Auto 33 - 7.5 kHz yes 15 kHz

Processing single path, auto filter on, custom harmonics

# Filter setting Harmonics Fundamental Gaps Max. Order or

setting frequency frequency
16 Auto on Custom 2 - 7.5 Hz no 2000th
17 Auto on Custom 7.5 - 33 Hz no 15 kHz
18 Auto on Custom 33 - 7.5 kHz yes 15 kHz

[Link] 37/206
 User Manual Instrument Family LMG600

CE Harmonics
INTERHARM CE Harmonische are the case when INTERHARM = 9 and fundamental frequency between 45 Hz and
[8.9.122→151] 65 Hz. For those is valid:
1. Relative deviation between f1 and frequency fsyn , to which the sampling rate is synchronised
is <0.03 % of f1 under steady-state conditions.
2. The attenuation of the anti-aliasing filter is >50 dB at higher frequencies than half of sampling
rate.
3. The instrument complies with class I according IEC 61000-4-7 Ed. 2.0 and
EN 61000-4-7 Ed. 2.0.
4. Uncertainty according IEC 61000-4-7 Ed. 2.0 and EN 61000-4-7 Ed. 2.0
with m = measuring value and nom = nominal value of the range:

voltage measurement Um ≥ 1 % Unom: ± 5 % Um

Um < 1 % Unom: ± 0.05 % Unom
current measurement Im ≥ 3 % Inom: ± 5 % Im
Im < 3 % Inom: ± 0.15 % Inom

Measurement uncertainty
The measurement uncertainty is valid under the following conditions:
1. Sinusoidal voltage and current
2. Ambient temperature (23±3) ℃, no additional heating or cooling (e.g. by sunlight or current of
air)
3. The temperature effect is ±(0.01 % of reading)/ K in the range of 5 ℃ … 20 ℃ and 26 ℃ … 40 ℃
4. warm up time 1 h
5. The upper range value is defined by the maximum peak value, see Voltage channel L60-CH-
C1 [3.7.1→39] and Current channel L60-CH-C1 [3.7.2→39]. All other values are calculated
from voltage, current and active power. The tolerances results from the functional relationship,
see Measurement uncertainty of measured and calculated values [5.12→72].
6. Specified are the direct measured measuring values. The specification is including the 15 kHz
signal filter. For information the exact filter attenuation is specified in Signal filter [3.7→37].
7. The upper power range value is the product of upper voltage range value and upper current
range value. The specification is valid for power factor 0 … 1.
8. Voltage and current are higher than 10 % of nominal range and not higher than the maximum
TRMS value of the range. Voltage peak and current peak are not higher than range peak.
9. The instrument should be calibrated every 12 month, last adjustment not older than 12 months
and adjustment was done at 23 ℃.
The values are to be interpreted as ±(% of reading + % of upper range value).

Frequency DC 0.05 Hz … 45 Hz 45 Hz … 65 Hz 200 Hz … 500 Hz

65 Hz … 200 Hz
Voltage }U* 0.1 + 0.1 0.02 + 0.05 0.02 + 0.02 0.05 + 0.05
Current }I* 0.1 + 0.1b 0.02 + 0.05a 0.02 + 0.02a 0.05 + 0.05a
Current }ISensor 0.1 + 0.1 0.02 + 0.05 0.02 + 0.02 0.05 + 0.05
Active power 0.16 + 0.1d 0.032 + 0.05c 0.03 + 0.01c 0.08 + 0.05c
a additional uncertainty in the 10 A … 32 A range: ± 30AµA
2 ∗ Itrms 2
b additional uncertainty in the 10 A … 32 A range: ± 50AµA
2 ∗ Itrms 2
c additional uncertainty in the 10 A … 32 A range: ± 30AµA
2 ∗ Itrms 2 ∗ Utrms
d additional uncertainty in the 10 A … 32 A range: ± 50AµA
2 ∗ Itrms 2 ∗ Utrms

38/206 [Link]
 3 Technical data

Frequency 500 Hz … 1 kHz 1 kHz … 2 kHz 2 kHz … 10 kHz

Voltage }U* 0.2 + 0.1 1.0 + 0.5 f/1 kHz * 1.0 + f/1 kHz * 1.0
Current }I* 0.2 + 0.1a 1.0 + 0.5a f/1 kHz * 1.0 + f/1 kHz * 1.0a
Current }ISensor 0.2 + 0.1 1.0 + 0.5 f/1 kHz * 1.0 + f/1 kHz * 1.0
Active power 0.32 + 0.1c 1.6 + 0.5c f/1 kHz * 1.6 + f/1 kHz * 1.0c
a additional uncertainty in the 10 A … 32 A range: ± 30AµA
2 ∗ Itrms 2
c additional uncertainty in the 10 A … 32 A range: ± 30AµA
2 ∗ Itrms 2 ∗ Utrms

Common-mode rejection ratio (CMRR)

Common-mode rejection ratio is measured by using a sinusoidal voltage of 100 V against earth. For
the voltage ranges the signal is applied to the short circuit jacks }U and }U* . For the current ranges
the signal is applied to the short circuit jacks }I and }ISensor resp. to the }I jack.

Common-mode Signal- U*, U*, I*, I*, Isensor,

frequency Filter 3V 1000 V 5 mA 32 A 4A
range range range range range
53 Hz 15 kHz >120 dB >120 dB >160 dB >150 dB >120 dB
53 Hz off >120 dB >120 dB >160 dB >150 dB >120 dB
100 kHz 15 kHz >120 dB >120 dB >160 dB >150 dB >115 dB
100 kHz off >75 dB >75 dB >100 dB >150 dB >110 dB

3.7.1 Voltage channel L60-CH-C1

Measurement ranges for the jacks }U*/}U
Nominal range / V 3 6 12.5 25 60 130 250 400 600 1000
Max. TRMS value / V 3.3 6.6 13.8 27.5 66 136 270 440 660 1000
Max. peak value / V 6 12 25 50 100 200 400 800 1600 3200
Input impedance about 4.59 MΩ, 3 pF
Overload capability 1000 V + 10 % continuously, 1500 V for 1s
Capacity against earth about 90 pF

3.7.2 Current channel L60-CH-C1

Measurement ranges for the jacks }I*/}I
Nominal value / A 0.005 0.010 0.020 0.040 0.080 0.150 0.300 0.600
Max. TRMS value / A 0.0055 0.011 0.022 0.044 0.088 0.165 0.330 0.660
Max. peak value / A 0.014 0.028 0.056 0.112 0.224 0.469 0.938 1.875
Input impedance about 2.2 Ω about 600 mΩ about 80 mΩ
Overload capability LMG operating, 10 A continuously, 150 A for 10 ms
Capacity against earth about 90 pF

Nominal value / A 1.2 2.5 5 10 20 32

Max. TRMS value / A 1.32 2.75 5.5 11 22 32
Max. peak value / A 3.75 7.5 15 30 60 120
Input impedance about 20 mΩ about 10 mΩ
Overload capability LMG operating, 32 A continuously, 150 A for 10 ms
Capacity against earth 90 pF

Measurement ranges for the jacks }ISensor /}I

Nominal range / V 0.030 0.060 0.120 0.250 0.500 1 2 4
Max. TRMS value / V 0.033 0.066 0.132 0.275 0.550 1.1 2.2 4.4
Max. peak value / V 0.0977 0.1953 0.3906 0.7813 1.563 3.125 6.25 12.5
Input impedance about 100 kΩ, 34 pF
Overload capability 100 V continuously, 250 V for 1 s
Capacity against earth about 90 pF

[Link] 39/206
 User Manual Instrument Family LMG600

3.8 Processing signal interface L6-OPT-PSI

This interface has several analog and digital inputs and outputs. They are arranged in groups and
these groups are isolated against each other and against earth for signals with a maximum amplitude
of 33 V. This isolation between the groups prevents ground loops.

3.8.1 Fast analog inputs

These two analog inputs have their own ground system (isolated against any other connector) and are
sampled with about 150 kS/s. They are accessible via the two BNC connectors.

Pins
AFIn_1 and AFIn_2 with AFIn_GND12

Resolution
16 Bit

Uncertainty
±(0.05 % of reading + 0.05 % of full scale value)

-3 dB Bandwidth
14.5 kHz

Full scale value

±20 V

Overload capability
±33 V

Input resistance
100 kΩ ± 0.1 %

3.8.2 Slow analog inputs

These eight analog inputs have their own ground system (isolated against any other connector) and
are sampled with about 100 S/s. They are accessible via the 9 pin female D-SUB connector, see
Figure 3.2 [→40]. They are designed to measure DC or slow changing signals like temperature, etc.
1

AIn_1 1
6

6 AIn_5
AIn_2 2
7 AIn_6
AIn_GND18 3
8 AIn_7
AIn_3 4
9 AIn_8
5
9

AIn_4
5

Figure 3.2: Processing signal interface, analog input ,

9 pin D-SUB female face view

Pins
AIn_1 … AIn_8 with AIn_GND18

Resolution
16 Bit

Uncertainty
±(0.05 % of reading + 0.05 % of full scale value)

Full scale value

±20 V

40/206 [Link]
 3 Technical data

Overload capability
±33 V

Input impedance
100 kΩ ± 0.1 %

3.8.3 Analog Outputs

These 32 analog outputs have their own ground system (isolated against any other connector) and
are set after each measurement cycle. They are accessible via the 15 pin and 25 pin female D-SUB
connectors, see Figure 3.3 [→41].

1
AOut_1 1

14
14 AOut_11
AOut_GND 2
15 AOut_12
AOut_2 3
16 AOut_13
AOut_3 4
17 AOut_GND
AOut_4 5
18 AOut_14
AOut_5 6
19 AOut_15
AOut_GND 7
20 AOut_16
AOut_6 8
21 AOut_17
AOut_7 9
22 AOut_GND
AOut_8 10
23 AOut_18
AOut_9 11
24 AOut_19
AOut_GND 12
25 AOut_20
13
25

AOut_10
13
1

AOut_21 1
9

9 AOut_27
AOut_22 2
10 AOut_28
AOut_GND 3
11 AOut_29
AOut_23 4
12 AOut_GND
AOut_24 5
13 AOut_30
AOut_GND 6
14 AOut_31
AOut_25 7
15 AOut_32
8
15

AOut_26
8

Figure 3.3: Processing signal interface, analog output ,

25 pin and 15 pin D-SUB female face view

Pins
AOut_1 … AOut_32 with AOut_GND

Resolution
14 Bit

Uncertainty
±(0.05 % of output + 0.05 % of full scale value)

Full scale value

±11 V
Short circuit proof against AOut_GND

[Link] 41/206
 User Manual Instrument Family LMG600

Output load
<10 mA

Overload
It is not allowed to apply any voltage to the output pins.

Output impedance
<1 Ω

3.8.4 Switching Outputs

These 8 outputs are arranged as 6 switches with two connectors each and 2 switches with a common
negative connector. Thus the outputs are isolated against each other and the other ground systems.
They are accessible at one female 25 pin D-SUB connector (see Figure 3.4 [→42]) and set after each
measurement cycle. This switches are realized as NPN transistors. That is the reason, why one pin is
marked with minus (-, emitter) and the other pin is marked with plus (+, collector).

1
DIn_1+ 1
14
14 DIn_2+
DIn_14- 2
15 DIn_3+
DIn_4+ 3
16 DIn_5+
DIn_6+ 4
17 DIn_58-
DIn_7+ 5
18 DIn_8+
SW_1+ 6
19 SW_1-
SW_2+ 7
20 SW_2-
SW_3+ 8
21 SW_3-
SW_4+ 9
22 SW_4-
SW_5+ 10
23 SW_5-
SW_6+ 11
24 SW_6-
SW_7+ 12
25 SW_78-
13
25

SW_8+
13

Figure 3.4: Processing signal interface, digital inputs and outputs ,

25 pin D-SUB female face view

Pins
SW_1+ … SW_8+ with SW_1- … SW_6- and SW_78-

Opened switch
max. 33V @ 100 µA

Closed switch
max. 0.9 V @ 100 mA

Reverse polarity
Switch is closed, max. -1 V @ -100 mA

Overload
-1 V … +33V

42/206 [Link]
 3 Technical data

3.8.5 Switching Inputs

These 8 inputs are arranged in two groups, each with 4 inputs and a common ground. Thereby the
input groups are isolated against each other and the other ground systems. They are accessible at one
25 pin D-SUB connector (see Figure 3.4 [→42]) and are sampled with about 150 kS/s. These inputs
have to drive the LED of an optocoupler and therefore require some current to work! That is the
reason, why they one pin is marked with minus (-, cathode) and the other pin is marked with plus
(+, anode).

Pins
Din_1+ …Din_8+ with Din_14- and Din_58-

Input Signal
Low is detected for voltage ≤1.0 V
High is detected for voltage ≥2.7 V @ 1.5 mA

Overload
±33 V

3.8.6 Speed/Torque/Frequency Inputs

These 2 inputs have one common ground. Each input has 3 signals available:
A is used for frequency/speed
B is a signal with 90 ° phase shift against A which can be used to determine the direction of the
rotation
Z for a signal which detects the Zero position of the sensor.
1

A_1 1
9

9 A_1
B_1 2
10 B_1
Z_1 3
11 Z_1
ABZ_GND 4
12 ABZ_+5V
A_2 5
13 A_2
B_2 6
14 B_2
Z_2 7
15 Z_2
8
15

ABZ_GND
8

Figure 3.5: Processing signal interface, speed torque frequency input ,

15 pin D-SUB female face view

The type of accepted input signals as well as filtering can be selected:

• TTL: The signal must be applied against ground (single ended)

• HTL: The signal must be applied against ground (single ended)

• RS422 : The signal must be applied against the inverse input (differential)

• Filter: Low (about 30 kHz), Mid (about 300 kHz), High (about 700 kHz) or Off (≥10 MHz). The
exact frequencies depend on the signal level.

These inputs can be used as follows:

• Speed input sensor

The signal A is used to determine the frequency of the sensor. The signals B and Z (if available)
are used to determine the rotation direction and the zero position, respectively.

[Link] 43/206
 User Manual Instrument Family LMG600

• Fast torque input sensors with digital output

These sensors have usually only signal A. Please note, that this input can only be used for
sensors with digital output. Sensors with analog output can be connected (depending on their
speed) to the fast or slow analog inputs.
• General frequency measurement
This frequency must be applied to the A input, B and Z can be left unconnected.
From the A inputs the instrument always calculates the frequency once per cycle time, the B and Z
inputs are sampled with about 150 kS/s.
The signals and an auxiliary supply for feeding sensors are accessible via a 15 pin D-SUB connector
(see Figure 3.5 [→43]).

Pins
A_1, A_1, A_2, A_2, B_1, B_1, B_2, B_2, Z_1, Z_1, Z_2, Z_2, ABZ_GND, ABZ_+5V

TTL signals
Low is detected for voltage ≤1.0 V
High is detected for voltage ≥1.8 V
These voltages must be applied between X_n and ABZ_GND.

HTL signals
Low is detected for voltage ≤4.0 V
High is detected for voltage ≥7.0 V
These voltages must be applied between X_n and ABZ_GND.

RS422 signals (differential)

The differential voltage must be ≥±0.2 V and ≤±10 V and be applied between X_n and X_n.
The allowed common mode voltage must be ≥-7.0 V and ≤+12.0 V (applied between X_n and
ABZ_GND).

Overload
-10 V … +33 V between any input pins inside this group

Input resistance
Single ended: ≥4 kΩ (between X_n and ABZ_GND)
Differential: ≥4 kΩ (between X_n and ABZ_GND as well as X_n and ABZ_GND)

Frequency range
The minimum frequency depends on the cycle time (it is about the reciprocal of the cycle time):
0.05 Hz … ≥10 MHz

Uncertainty
±100 ppm of value

Auxiliary supply
+5 V ±10 % @ 200 mA (short circuit proof against ABZ_GND)

44/206 [Link]
 4 Installation

4 Installation

4.1 Unpacking and installing the instrument

After unpacking the equipment, it should be checked for damage. Damage due to transportation
should be reported to the transporter and to the equipment supplier at the earliest opportunity. If it
is uncertain if one can safely use the damaged equipment, then the equipment should not be used.

Next, check if all items listed on the delivery note are included. The package should be stored for
future transports, e.g. for the annual calibration.

The instrument shall only be used in an environment as described in this manual. To ascertain
sufficient air circulation, the instrument should be operated in a horizontal position. Please regard
the technical data given in Technical data [3→25].

4.2 Front panel

1 2 3 4

MEASUREMENT 5
Precision Power Analyzer LMG670 DEFAULT 7 CURRENT 8 VOLTAGE 9

POWER 4 GRAPH 5 CUSTOM 6

APPS 1 ENERGY 2 I/O 3

0 MISC. . -

ENTER BACK CANCEL

6
SETUP 7
INSTR. GROUP CHANNEL

APPS ACTIONS STORAGE

FREEZE EXECUTE HELP

STANDBY TOUCH USB 1 USB 2

11 10 9 8

Figure 4.1: Elements of the front panel

The front panel items are identical for all LMG600 series instruments. The numbers in
Figure 4.1 [→45] correspond to the following elements:

1. Touchscreen
Here all values and menus are displayed. Through the touchscreen, users can operate the
instrument in a very simple and direct way.

2. Tab Keys
Most menus consist of several tabs displaying different values. With the tab keys, the selected
tab can be changed.
Depending on the context, this function sometimes can also be performed by using the arrow
keys or the scroll wheel.

[Link] 45/206
 User Manual Instrument Family LMG600

3. 8 double soft keys

The instrument has 8 rows of left and right soft keys. Soft keys do not have a fixed function, but
their function depends upon the content which is displayed next to them in the GUI. Depending
on the displayed content, the right/left soft keys might have a different function. If there is just
one function, both the right and left soft keys invoke this function. In this manual, the usage of
soft keys is marked with <Soft key>.

4. Arrows keys with Select

With the arrow keys, you usually move/navigate in blocks and tables. The center key (Select)
is used to activate/select/use the currently focused item.

5. MEASUREMENT
The primary function of these keys is to select a menu displaying measured values. The different
menus are described in detail in Measurement menus [6.2→80].
These keys are also used for entering numbers. In this case, the numerical value of each key is
illuminated.

6. [ENTER], [BACK] and [CANCEL]

[CANCEL] aborts the current selection, [ENTER] confirms. [BACK] is used to backspace
while editing or switch to the previous menu from settings or sub-settings menus.

7. SETUP
In the menus accessed with these keys, one can configure the measuring settings. Global settings
are defined in [INSTR.]. Settings in group context are done in [GROUP] and individual
channel parameters can be set up in [CHANNEL]�hese menus, as well as the [APPS](Setup)
, [ACTIONS] and [STORAGE] menus, are described in detail in Setup menus [6.3→86].

[HELP]
When the help function is activated, the keys LED will blink. Touching any displayed item on
the screen will show up additional information about this item. Touching any other area will
display an overview map. Pressing [HELP] again will deactivate the help mode and return to
the regular operation mode.
[EXECUTE]
If this key is illuminated, the action assigned in [ACTIONS] is executed. The key blinks during
execution. If this key is not illuminated, no action will be performed.
[FREEZE]
This key allows one to freeze all displayed values. When this function is activated, the keys LED
will be blinking. One can then switch between all the measurement menus to view all the values
which had been simultaneously measured.
The setup menus, however, continue to display the current configuration state of the instrument.
If for example auto range is activated and you press [FREEZE], the current automatically
chosen range is displayed as the signal changes. In the same way, the status bar displays the
current configuration.
Note that the interfaces are not affected by this function. By using this function, it is still
possible to collect data using the interface and at the same time freeze something interesting on
the screen.

8. Scroll wheel
The scroll wheel can, depending on context, either scroll through a list, move graphical elements,
or select different input elements. In the last case, pressing this wheel activates or changes the
current setting.

9. USB connectors
The USB connectors can be used to exchange data with a memory device or to connect a
mouse/keyboard to the instrument. Their function is identical to the USB connectors located
on the rear of the instrument.
The LEDs next to each USB connector are used to signal when data is being transfered to/from
the memory device. In order to prevent data loss, one should not remove the memory device
while the LED is on.

46/206 [Link]
 4 Installation

10. [TOUCH]
By using this key, the touch function of the touchscreen can be deactivated. This is useful to
prevent unwanted actions when discussing displayed data on the screen. While the touch panel
is deactivated, the LED beside the key is off to inform about this state.

11. [STANDBY]
By pressing this key, a running instrument is safely shut down. See also Switching on/off
[4.4→49]. When the standby state is active, the LED beside the key is highlighted. Pressing
[STANDBY] will start the instrument.

4.3 Rear panel

The rears of all instruments of the LMG600 series are almost identical. It consists of a base plug-in
module, several channel plug-in modules and an optional PSI card.

4.3.1 Base plug-in module

The numbers in the base plug-in illustration in Figure 4.2 [→47] correspond to the following
elements:
VGA/DVI

Ext. 1

Ext. 2

8
RS232

6
USB
USB

LAN

MAC

5
9

I 0
SN
Sync.

10

2
CE !

Figure 4.2: Elements of the base plug-in module

1. Additional protective conductor terminal

The terminal for the protective conductor. See also Connection to power supply and
protective conductor [2.2.1→19]. The area of connected solid or stranded wires must not
exceed 10 mm² or 6 mm², respectively.

2. Plate with the serial number of the instrument.

3. Sync.
Connector for external synchronization. For details, see Synchronization Connector
[3.3→26].

4. LAN
LAN connector for remote controlling the instrument, see also Remote control [8→97].

5. USB
USB connectors for connection to devices such as mouse, keyboard or storage devices.

[Link] 47/206
 User Manual Instrument Family LMG600

6. RS232
Connector for remote controlling of the instrument via the RS232 interface. See also Remote
control [8→97].
7. VGA/DVI
Connector for an external display or video projector. DVI signals are transferred directly, VGA
signals are accessible by using an external DVI/VGA adaptor.
8. Ext. 1, Ext. 2
These slots are reserved for future extension boards.
9. Plate with the MAC address of the LAN interface
10. Power connector with power switch and integrated fuses
Via this connector, the instrument is supplied with power. For further details, see Switching
on/off [4.4→49], Environmental conditions [3.1→25] and Basic instrument [3.2→25].

4.3.2 Channel plug-in modules

The numbers shown in the illustration of the channel plug-in module in Figure 4.3 [→48] correspond
to the following elements:

U*

2 8

1 3
U Usensor

L60-CH-xx

I*

5 8

4 6
I Isensor

Sensor ID

Figure 4.3: Elements of a single channel plug-in module

1. }U
Voltage input, common low for }U*and }USensor . 4 mm safety laboratory jack, black, surface
mounted.
2. }U*
Voltage input (high), 4 mm safety laboratory jack, yellow, surface mounted.
3. }USensor
Voltage input for voltage sensor signals (high), 4 mm safety laboratory jack, red, surface
mounted. This jack is only available with certain types of channels.
4. }I
Current input, common low for }I*and }ISensor . 4 mm safety laboratory jack, grey, panel
mounted.
5. }I*
Current input (high), 4 mm safety laboratory jack, violet, panel mounted.
6. }ISensor
Voltage input for current sensor signals (high), 4 mm safety laboratory jack, red, panel mounted.

48/206 [Link]
 4 Installation

7. Sensor ID
D-SUB 15 pin female connector for connecting current or voltage sensors. The stored information
is transferred and power is supplied via this jack.
8. Nut which can be used to fix the cables which are plugged into the instrument. This is useful
to prevent the signal from being accidentally interrupted. The diameter of the screw to be used
must conform to M4 and the maximum length of the part to be inserted into the instrument
must not exceed 7 mm.

4.4 Switching on/off

The instrument has two elements to control the operation mode. On the rear of the instrument, there
is a real power switch. If this is set to off, the instrument is disconnected from the power line and
does not consume any power. On the front, there is a standby key which is only active if the rear side
power switch is in the on position.
When switching the instrument off using the rear side power switch, the current operation state of
the instrument is stored and restored when the instrument is switched on again. If the instrument is
in standby mode and switched off, the instrument will remain in standby mode when it is switched on
again. If the instrument is running and switched off (not recommended, see below), the instrument
starts up after being switched on.
The [STANDBY] key shuts down the instrument in a safe manner. That means that all open files are
closed without losing data. Write caches are stored and will not be lost. When a running instrument
is switched off with the back side power switch (or by switching off the power supply), then it is
possible that some data (e.g. from open files) can not be saved and will therefore be lost.
If the instrument is in standby mode, it can be switched off using the power switch on the rear panel
without losing any data.
The start-up of the instrument can take several seconds.

4.5 Maintenance

To maintain proper and safe operation, the following sections should be taken into consideration.
If the instrument has been opened, a high voltage test and a test of the protective conductor are
necessary according to EN 61010 following the closing of the instrument for safety purposes prior to
use. The instrument is only allowed to be opened in a pollution degree 2 environment or better!

4.5.1 Cleaning

For cleaning of the instrument and especially of the front panel, please use a soft cotton cloth together
with some isopropyl alcohol.
Before cleaning please ensure that the instrument is disconnected from all cables and that there is no
danger of open fire and electric shock in the environment!

4.5.2 Calibration

One can only take advantage of the performance and precision of this high-end measuring instrument
if the instrument is well adjusted and calibrated. We recommend that the instrument be adjusted and
calibrated regularly by ZES. Calibration by third-party laboratories frequently causes unnecessary
problems.
If you allow the calibration to be performed by a third-party calibration lab, please be aware of two
typical problems that might be encountered:

[Link] 49/206
 User Manual Instrument Family LMG600

• The reference instruments might not have the required accuracy, especially for active AC power.
A very common error is that the reference sources, which some companies call ‘calibrator’, do
not have the necessary uncertainty to calibrate this instrument. The calibrators are very useful
for many hand held multimeters, but they are often worthless when calibrating active power.
The Fluke 5500A calibrator is a typical, incorrect reference source for this instrument. Please
keep in mind, that the reference instrument should be at least 3 times more accurate than the
device under test. If not, the precision power meter calibrates the so called calibrator and not
vice versa! The deviations are, in this case, the deviation of the calibrator and not the deviations
of the instrument.
• The reference instrument may be traceable for voltage and current, but it is very rare that
it is traceable for active AC power with the required uncertainty. Nevertheless it is common,
that calibration labs calibrate active power even though only voltage and current are traceable.
This happens very often, even in the context of accredited calibration services. In such cases,
it regularly happens that the voltage and current are accredited but the active power is not
accredited. Such protocols are worthless for active power!
If a calibration is performed by any third-party lab, the following points should be calibrated to ensure
proper function of the instrument:
• Voltage and current of all ranges at a frequency near to 50 Hz.
• A representative selection of voltage/current range combinations to ensure a proper power
reading
The ZES ZIMMER calibration service offers a traceable calibration of all relevant parameters and
meets the requirements of ISO 17025/IEC 17025. Our active power calibration is directly traceable
to the Physikalisch Technische Bundesanstalt (the German National Laboratory) in Braunschweig,
Germany.
A further advantage of our calibration is that, in case a defect is identified and service becomes
necessary, there are no additional shipping costs and delay times.

Requirements for reference instruments

As generally known, the references (calibration sources and/or reference power meters) have to be in
an uncertainty class which is at least 3 times better than the instrument under calibration. Ideally, the
uncertainty class of the reference should be between 5 to 10 times better. For the allowed uncertainty
of this instrument, please refer to the Technical data [3→25] section.
A calibration never requires the instrument to be opened.

4.5.3 Adjustment

The adjustment has to be done at (23±1) ℃.

ZES ZIMMER offers a way to adjust the instruments outside of our factory if some technical
preconditions are fulfilled. Please contact sales@[Link] for further information.
Only in rare cases the instrument is required to be opened for the adjustment.

4.5.4 Battery

A CR2032-type battery is used in the instrument for preserving data such as the system time while
the instrument is switched off.
The battery should be replaced after 3 years or when any problems occur. This battery is soldered,
so it is recommended that the replacement of the battery be performed at a ZES ZIMMER service
department, for example during calibration of the instrument.
If this replacement is performed outside of a ZES ZIMMER service department, please adhere to the
safety check as described at the beginning of this section, because the replacement does require the
instrument to be opened.

50/206 [Link]
 4 Installation

4.5.5 Air filter

Be sure that the instrument is disconnected from all cables before removing the filter holders and that
the filter holders are mounted properly before connecting the instrument again.
The air filters are located at the bottom and right hand side (front view) of the instrument. They
should be cleaned regularly, depending on the degree of pollution of the environment. To do this,
remove the filter holders, clean the filters and remount everything.
Cleaning of the air filters does not require the instrument to be opened.

4.5.6 Fuses

The mains supply fuse is the only fuse in the instrument which is for the protection of the instrument
and can be replaced by the user. All other fuses , especially those on the measuring channels are
not for the protection of the instrument but for the protection of the user in case of misuse! If such
a fuse has blown it is very likely that the instrument was damaged by the misuse. In this case, the
replacement of such a fuse is strictly forbidden! The instrument must not be operated and must be
checked for proper and - most importantly - safe operation by a competent service station.

Mains supply fuse

The mains supply fuse is the only fuse in the instrument which is for the protection of the instrument
and which can be replaced by the user in case it is defective. This fuse is located in the IEC inlet and
can be replaced by a new fuse of the same type. The correct type can be found in Mains supply
[3.2→25]. If you are having difficulties acquiring the required fuse, please contact the ZES ZIMMER
sales department. The instrument does not have to be opened during replacement of the fuse.

4.5.7 Touchscreen adjustment

The touchscreen is adjusted properly when the instrument is delivered. However, the optimal position
of the touch depends slightly on the viewing position of the user (i.e. parallax error). A taller
user might require the touchscreen to be adjusted slightly differently than a smaller user. Also, if
the instrument is mounted on a higher or lower position in a rack, another adjustment might be
necessary.
To adjust the touch, see Touchscreen tab [6.3.6→88].

4.5.8 Software update

For a software update it is necessary to boot the LMG from a USB storage device.

Writing an image to the USB storage

• From [Link] load the free of charge
program “Win32diskimager” and the image with the wanted LMG software. The memory must
have a size of 512 MB at least. It is not necessary to format it.
• Start “Win32diskimager”. On the top left choose the downloaded image file (by clicking on
the blue file symbol). When selecting this file, make sure that at least the file type *.img (the
default) is allowed.
The image file must not be stored on a network drive but on a local drive to ensure an
uninterrupted image writing
On the top right choose the USB storage device which should be used for the update. If the
correct device is not displayed please prepare it as described below.
Start the procedure with “Write”, this can take few minutes. Finally exit the program.
• Connect this storage device and a USB keyboard to the LMG. Start the instrument an keep F11
key pressed. In the appearing dialog choose the USB device.

[Link] 51/206
 User Manual Instrument Family LMG600

The USB storage device is usually the second entry in the list. It’s text is build from
manufacturer informations. The first item with ”…WDC…” is the internal drive. If
this is choosen accidently, the instrument boots in the usual way instead of updating.
The third point ”Enter Setup” should not be used.
After passing further dialogs, the update is finished and the LMG could be used after a reboot.

Preparation of the USB storage

The content of this storage will be deleted. Please back it up before continuing
After writing an update image onto the stick, Windows will not detect the USB storage
any more. To keep using it, one has to follow the following procedure. In case there is any
doubt, consult your system administrator.

If the USB storage is not recognized by Windows or “Win32diskimager”, one can try the following
with Windows 7:

In the start menu choose “Control Panel”. In the top right corner is a selector named “View by:”
where a few different possibilities are listed:
• Big icons or Small icons
One can directly click on “Administrative Tools ”.
• Category
Here, one needs to first select “System and Security” and then “Administrative Tools”.
Then click on “Computer Management” and then “Disk Management”.
All connected storage are listed in the lower pane of the middle area. First, delete all partitions of the
USB storage. Ensure that you have selected the correct storage (as the hard drives of the computer
are also displayed!), because all data will be deleted!
Click with the right mouse button on all existing partitions of the USB storage and choose “Delete
Volume” if this point is available. Then click with the right mouse button on the remaining partition
and select “New simple volume”. Using the assistant wizard, select the full size and assign a drive
letter. If the storage is going to be used with “Win32diskimager”, one can select “Do not format this
volume” to save time. If the storage should be used under Windows, it must be formated.
After the wizard is finished, the storage is now ready to be recognized by Windows and to be used by
Win32diskimager.

4.5.9 In case of trouble

There can be two kinds of troubles: Either measured values are not plausible or the software crashed.
Values not plausible
This case can have many different reasons, starting from a wrong setup and ending in an hardware
defect in the instrument. In this case it is possible to generate a status report which includes all
relevant settings and measurements. The detailed description how to do this can be found at the
description of the Status report tab [6.3.13→94].
At a glance
Press [STORAGE] and go to the status report tab to create the report.
Please always add as many information as possible: Which values were expected? What is
the uncertainty for this values? How was the instrument connected? …
The created PDF file can be copied to an USB stick (see Files tab [6.3.12→94]) and can be sent via
email to your local service point.
Software crashed
If the software crashed the instrument displays a maintenance menu after some seconds. There some
actions can be chosen:

52/206 [Link]
 4 Installation

1. Restart system
Starts the system again.
2. Shut down system
Switches off the instrument.
3. Copy event and fault records on USB stick
Reads the fault memory and copies it to an USB stick.
4. Factory reset
All settings are reset to factory defaults. All custom changes are lost.
5. Short diagnostics
This short error description is a first hint to the reason.
6. Front unit test
A test procedure for the front unit. This should only be used by instructed persons.
The maintenance mode can also be reached manually by pressing <Maintenance Mode> in tab
”General” in the [INSTR.] menu.
Usually it is sufficient to use action 3.
The generated file has a name of Type ”zes*.zes”. Please send this file via email to your
local service point and add a description under which circumstances the software crashed.
If there are several effects, please note the time when this effects happened, because the
entries in the fault memory have timestamps and can be correlated to the observed effects.
To do this, press 3, connect the USB stick and press [ENTER]. After the transfer a message appears.
Press [ENTER]again and switch off the instrument by pressing 2 and [ENTER].

[Link] 53/206
 5 Basic concepts

5 Basic concepts

This chapter describes the basic concepts used by the instrument and should be known when working
with the instrument.

5.1 Groups

In order to reflect the physical relation between channels or the physical circuits being measured the
power channels (P channels) are organized into groups. The criterion for the grouping of P channels
is the electrical system to be measured. This in turn translates into two physical criteria: the number
of phases and the number of wires.
Groups
Most common electrical systems have either 1 phase (1φ) or 3 phases (3φ). 2 phase systems (2φ) are
less common and systems with 4 (4φ) or more phases are very rare. Nevertheless, the instrument
supports all of these configurations. The wires constitute the physical medium for the phases. Note
that protective conductors usually (and also in this manual) do not count as wires! One-phase systems
(1φ) always use 2 wires (2W), while two-phase systems (2φ) may have two (2W) or three (3W) wires
and three-phase systems (3φ) three (3W) or four (4W) wires. Table 5.1 [→55] lists the most common
groupings. A description of how to configure the instrument accordingly can be found in Setup
menus [6.3→86].
A crucial requirement for all P channel members of a group is that their respective signals have the
same fundamental frequency. This is generally the case for the electrical systems described in this
manual. If this requirement is not met, a lot of the statements and explanations given in this manual
do not apply! Therefore, any deviation from this rule should be well justified by expertise.
As an additional constraint, all channels in a group must be of the same type. This serves to prevent
subtle issues arising from different behavior due to technical differences between channel types.
Depending on the task at hand and the number of available P channels, one or more groups have
to be configured. Each P channel can be a member of exactly one group at all times; ungrouped P
channels are not permitted.
While the grouping specifies which channels to combine, the aptly named wiring setting tells the WIRE [8.9.130→153]
instrument how the conductors of a group are wired up. The wiring therefore determines how the
measured signals are to be interpreted by the instrument. So given the assumption of a common
fundamental frequency and a correct wiring setting, a group has the following noteworthy properties:
• A single synchronization source is used for all P channels in the group. Its frequency is the
group’s (sync) frequency.
• Various sum values, e.g. total active power, are calculated over all P channels in the group.
• The instrument applies the various group settings (e.g. filters and coupling) uniformly to all
P channels of the group. This eliminates a large number of possible errors due to differing
configurations within the same group, which might otherwise lead to dubious results when
combining values from such channels.

1 channel 1φ 2W for 1 phase system with two wires

2 channels 1φ 3W for 1 phase systems with three wires (split phase) or

3φ 3W for 3 phase systems with 3 wires (Aron circuit)

3 channels 3φ 3W for 3 phase systems with 3 wires or

3φ 4W for 3 phase systems with 4 wires

Table 5.1: Number of channels in a group and typical systems to be measured

[Link] 55/206
 User Manual Instrument Family LMG600

In the following sections, typical ways to wire one group are described.
If you have a more complex system, each group is wired on its own, independent from the other groups.
For example, having a frequency converter with a single-phase input and a three-phase output, you
can connect the single-phase system as shown in the appropriate section, and independently from
that, the three-phase system as shown in its appropriate section.
The principle wirings are shown with direct measurement of current and voltage. But it is also
possible to use voltage and/or current sensors/transformers. How to install them in principle is shown
in Wiring using external current sensors [5.2.4→59] and Wiring using external voltage
sensors [5.2.5→59].

5.2 Connection

Before connecting the instrument ensure that all safety requirements are fulfilled. Please regard
especially Safety recommendations [2.2→18], Connection to power supply and protective
conductor [2.2.1→19] and Connection to measurement circuit [2.2.2→20].

5.2.1 Wiring of single-channel groups

1φ 2W
For single-phase measurement, it is usually recommended to measure the current in the wire which
is closest to earth, see Figure 5.1 [→56]. This optimizes the common mode rejection. This circuit
measures the voltage and current correctly relative to the load and source, respectively.

U1*

U1*
U1

U1
I1*

I1*
I1

Source Load U* I1 U*

PE

L1
U1* U Usensor U Usensor

V
U1
N I1 A I1*
L60-CH-xx L60-CH-xx

I* I*

I Isensor I Isensor

Sensor ID Sensor ID

Figure 5.1: Single channel with wiring 1φ 2W shown as circuit, logical connection and practical
connection with coloured wires

5.2.2 Wiring of dual channel groups

Split phase system, 1φ 3W
This system (Figure 5.2 [→57]) is often used in northern America. This is sometimes incorrectly called
a two-phase system (2φ 3W) , but this is technically not correct. This circuit measures the voltage
and current correctly relative to the load and source, respectively.

56/206 [Link]
 5 Basic concepts

U2*
U1*

U2

U2
U1

I2*

I2*
I1*

I1*
I2

I2
I1

I1
Source Load U* U* U* U*

PE
I1* A I1
L1
U1* U Usensor U Usensor U Usensor U Usensor

V
U1
I2* A I2
L2
U2* L60-CH-xx L60-CH-xx L60-CH-xx L60-CH-xx

V
U2 I* I* I* I*

I Isensor I Isensor I Isensor I Isensor

Sensor ID Sensor ID Sensor ID Sensor ID

Figure 5.2: 2 channels with wiring 1φ 3W, split phase shown as circuit, logical connection and practical
connection with coloured wires

Three-phase system, Aron circuit, 3φ 3W

Aron wiring (Figure 5.3 [→57]) works only if the system is a real three-wire system. If you have
for example a frequency converter and a significant current is flowing from the motor by capacitive
coupling to earth and then back to the converter, earth would be a fourth wire. In this case, the
requirements for an Aron circuit are not met and the results might be wrong.
U2*
U1*

U2

U2
U1

I2*

I2*
I1*

I1*
I2

I2
I1

I1

Source Load U* U* U* U*

PE
I1* A I1
L1
U1* U Usensor U Usensor U Usensor U Usensor

V
U1
L2
U2 L60-CH-xx L60-CH-xx L60-CH-xx L60-CH-xx

V
U2* I* I* I* I*

L3 I2* A I2

I Isensor I Isensor I Isensor I Isensor

Sensor ID Sensor ID Sensor ID Sensor ID

Figure 5.3: 2 channels with wiring 3φ 3W, Aron circuit shown as circuit, logical connection and
practical connection with coloured wires

When selecting Aron wiring, the instrument will calculate the third missing voltage and current. As
default the total active power of the system is the only valid sum value of the group.
When using the installed option star-delta conversion, the complete system is measured and it is
possible to recalculate the whole circuit to star or delta. This feature adds to the measurement of the
total active power of the system (which is the usual limitation of the Aron circuit) the measurement
of all values such as power factor, reactive power, etc.

[Link] 57/206
 User Manual Instrument Family LMG600

To set up this calculation, please see GROUP menu [6.3.7→88].

5.2.3 Wiring of triple channel groups

System with neutral wire N, 3φ 4W

When the neutral wire N is accessible, the wiring according to Figure 5.4 [→58] is recommended,
because you would not need the star-delta conversion to get valid values. When values are measured
in a star circuit, it is possible to calculate the delta values by star-delta conversion.

U2*

U3*
U1*

U2

U3

U3
U1

I2*

I3*

I2*

I3*
I1*

I1*
I2

I3

I2

I3
I1

I1
Source Load U* U* U* U* U* U*

PE
I1* A I1
L1
U Usensor U Usensor U Usensor U Usensor U Usensor U Usensor

I2* A I2
L2
L60-CH-xx L60-CH-xx L60-CH-xx L60-CH-xx L60-CH-xx L60-CH-xx

I* I* I* I* I* I*

L3 I3* A I3
U1* U2* U3*
V V V
U1 U2 U3
N I Isensor I Isensor I Isensor I Isensor I Isensor I Isensor

Sensor ID Sensor ID Sensor ID Sensor ID Sensor ID Sensor ID

Figure 5.4: 3 channels with wiring 3φ 4W, U⅄, I⅄ shown as circuit, logical connection and practical
connection with coloured wires

System without a neutral wire N, 3φ 3W

When the neutral wire N is not accessible, a wiring according to Figure 5.5 [→58] is recommended.
In this circuit, the problem is that the voltage and current which are applied to a power measurement
channel will never apply to any component at the same time. So the product of voltage and current is
no longer a real power but a useless phantom power. The solution, in this case, is that the instrument
can either recalculate the star voltage from the delta voltage or calculate the delta current from the
star current. By this approach, voltage and current apply to a real existing component and become
valid. By using brute force calculation, it is possible to measure such systems.
U2*

U3*
U1*

U2

U3
U1

I2*

I3*

I2*

I3*
I1*

I1*
I2

I3

I2

I3
I1

I1

Source Load U* U* U* U* U* U*

PE
I1* A I1
L1
U1* U3 U Usensor U Usensor U Usensor U Usensor U Usensor U Usensor

V
U1
I2* A I2
L2
U2* V L60-CH-xx L60-CH-xx L60-CH-xx L60-CH-xx L60-CH-xx L60-CH-xx

V
U2 U3* I* I* I* I* I* I*

L3 I3* A I3

I Isensor I Isensor I Isensor I Isensor I Isensor I Isensor

Sensor ID Sensor ID Sensor ID Sensor ID Sensor ID Sensor ID

Figure 5.5: 3 channels with wiring 3φ 3W, UΔ, I⅄ shown as circuit, logical connection and practical
connection with coloured wires

58/206 [Link]
 5 Basic concepts

5.2.4 Wiring using external current sensors

Instead of direct current measurement, it is also possible to use external sensors like transformers,
transducers, current clamps or shunts. Figure 5.6 [→59] illustrates how they are connected. All shown
measurement methods are identical concerning the polarity.

Shunt Transformer

U* U* U* U*

U Usensor U Usensor U Usensor U Usensor

L60-CH-xx L60-CH-xx L60-CH-xx L60-CH-xx

I* I* I* I*

Sensor-
Adapter
L60-X-ADSE

I Isensor I Isensor I Isensor I Isensor

Sensor ID Sensor ID Sensor ID Sensor ID

Figure 5.6: Comparing different current measurement techniques

In this example, each of the four channels measure the same current. This current-measurement
principle can be transferred to the previously discussed wirings for one to three channels.
Depending on the output signal they are connected to the current input or to the sensor input of the
current channel. Configuration of the sensor scaling is described in Sensor menu [6.3.8→92].
Which kind of sensors to use depends on the environment. The best uncertainty is achieved with direct
measurement, but this requires that the circuit can be interrupted. Clamps have a worse uncertainty,
but they can be used without interrupting the circuit.
For special Plug’n Play sensors the adaptor L60-X-ADSE is available.

If you use shielded wires and use clamps or similar, please make sure to exclude the shield
current from the measuring.

5.2.5 Wiring using external voltage sensors

Instead of direct voltage measurement, it is also possible to use external transformers or voltage
dividers. How to connect them is shown in Figure 5.7 [→60]. All shown measurement methods are
identical concerning the polarity.
In this example, each of the four channels measures the same voltage. This voltage-measurement
principle can be transferred to the previously discussed wirings for one to three channels.
Depending on the voltage level, use of the jack }USensor (not available with all channel types, see
Power measurement channel L60-CH-A1 [3.5→27]) instead of the jack }U*could result in a
better usage of range and thus in a lower uncertainty. Configuration of the sensor scaling is described
in Sensor menu [6.3.8→92].

[Link] 59/206
 User Manual Instrument Family LMG600

High
Low

PE
U* U* U* U*

U Usensor U Usensor U Usensor U Usensor

L60-CH-xx L60-CH-xx L60-CH-xx L60-CH-xx

I* I* I* I*

I Isensor I Isensor I Isensor I Isensor

Sensor ID Sensor ID Sensor ID Sensor ID

Figure 5.7: Comparing different voltage measurement techniques

The usage of one single high-voltage divider (as shown in the third channel in Figure 5.7 [→60]) is
only possible when “Low” and “PE” are the same potential. If they differ, you have to use two
high-voltage dividers to measure the difference between them. This is shown at the last channel in
Figure 5.7 [→60].

5.3 Star-delta conversion, option L6-OPT-SDC

There are two general ways to measure a three-phase system. One can either measure in the delta
circuit (Δ) or in the star circuit (⅄).
For measuring voltages, the star circuit requires the presence of a fourth wire, usually the neutral
wire N. Each phase is measured against this common wire. If this neutral wire is missing (which is
typically for motors or frequency converters), there is no other choice than to measure in the delta
circuit (i.e. between the phases).
For measuring currents, it is usually only possible to measure the current in each phase by measuring
the star circuit. A measurement of the delta circuit is theoretically possible, but this would require
to open the measurement object which is usually neither desired nor possible.
Usually the measurement takes place on the wires between the power source and the equipment
under test (EUT). Both are usually black boxes. So there is just one possible wiring for the current
measurement and two for the voltage measurement.
Figure 5.4 [→58] shows the wiring U⅄I⅄, Figure 5.5 [→58] shows the wiring UΔI⅄. With both wirings
it is possible to calculate and display U⅄I⅄ and UΔIΔ.
Please keep the following properties of the star-delta conversion in mind:
• While the directly measured voltages and currents in wiring UΔI⅄ are, of course, correct, the
power calculated from this voltage and current does not exist at any component in the circuit.
Either you have the correct voltage of a component but the wrong current or you have the
correct current but the wrong voltage.
It is therefore a phantom value which is rejected to prevent confusion.

60/206 [Link]
 5 Basic concepts

• When having a 4-wire system and a current is flowing in the neutral conductor N, it does not
make sense to convert this circuit into a delta system because a delta system has 3 wires only.

• When converting a voltage which is measured in delta circuit to star circuit, the common
midpoint is assumed to be in the middle of the triangle.
If the real existing midpoint is shifted due to unsymmetrical load, this cannot be recognized
from outside.
The effect with such an unsymmetrical load would be, that the single-phase power would not
meet the real values, but the total power of the system is measured correctly.

The formulas for this calculations are based on sample values and are thus independent from any
asymmetries, in amplitude, as well as in phase angle or harmonic distortion. The indices in the
following formulas relate to the number of the phase:

Star-delta conversion, 3 channels, U⅄ to UΔ and I⅄ to IΔ

u12 (t) = u1 (t) − u2 (t) (5.1)

u23 (t) = u2 (t) − u3 (t) (5.2)
u31 (t) = u3 (t) − u1 (t) (5.3)

i1 (t) − i2 (t)
i12 (t) = (5.4)
3
i2 (t) − i3 (t)
i23 (t) = (5.5)
3
i3 (t) − i1 (t)
i31 (t) = (5.6)
3

Delta-star conversion, 3 channels, UΔ to U⅄

u1 (t) − u3 (t)
u1 (t) = (5.7)
3
u2 (t) − u1 (t)
u2 (t) = (5.8)
3
u3 (t) − u2 (t)
u3 (t) = (5.9)
3

The conversion from current in delta circuit to star circuit is not supported, as it is usually not possible
to measure such currents.

A special feature is the conversion to star or delta, when the measurement was done in Aron circuit:

Conversion to delta, Aron circuit, I⅄ to IΔ

u12 (t) = u12 (t) (5.10)

u23 (t) = −u32 (t) (5.11)
u31 (t) = u32 (t) − u12 (t) (5.12)

2 ∗ i1 (t) + i3 (t)
i12 (t) = (5.13)
3
−i1 (t) − 2 ∗ i3 (t)
i23 (t) = (5.14)
3
−i1 (t) + i3 (t)
i31 (t) = (5.15)
3

[Link] 61/206
 User Manual Instrument Family LMG600

Conversion to star, Aron circuit, UΔ to U⅄

2 ∗ u12 (t) − u32 (t)

u1 (t) = (5.16)
3
−u12 (t) − u32 (t)
u2 (t) = (5.17)
3
−u12 (t) + 2 ∗ u32 (t)
u3 (t) = (5.18)
3

i1 (t) = i1 (t) (5.19)

i2 (t) = −i1 (t) − i3 (t) (5.20)
i3 (t) = i3 (5.21)

5.4 Sum channels

In the sum channel, the values Utrms , Itrms , P , Q, S, and P F are available. The first three are
computed in a different way
√
∑ ( (i) )2
Utrms = Utrms , (5.22)
i
√
∑( (i)
)2
Itrms = Itrms , (5.23)
i

∑
P = P (i) , (5.24)
i
(5.25)

and the others as usually from the first three

S = Utrms · Itrms , (5.26)

√
Q = S2 − P 2, (5.27)
|P |
PF = . (5.28)
S
If the wiring is direct the sum is running over the hardware channels of the group, otherwise over the
wired channels of the group.

5.5 Functional block diagrams

The functional block diagram in Figure 5.8 [→63] shows an overview of a power measurement channel
which consists of a voltage and current measurement section. This overview can be used as an aid to
understand the basic concepts described in the following sections.

5.6 Bandwidth

Especially when measuring drives and frequency converters, it is a frequent task to measure values
of different bandwidths at the same time. For example, one would measure wide bandwidth values
caused by the converter and narrow bandwidth values which are relevant for the mechanical power.
This instrument is the first high end power analyzer on the market which offers DualPath processing
solution. Previously, one was faced with the drawback of having just one analog-digital converter

DualPath
processing
62/206 [Link]
PROC [8.9.117→149]
 5 Basic concepts

Optional, depending on channel type I

Analog Wide Bandwidth Wide Bandwidth
ADC
U*
Filter Sample Values
s

o
Analog Narrow Bandwidth Digital Narrow Bandwidth
Filter ADC Filter Sample Values
l

U a
Digital
|x|
Filter t

i
Narrow Band
Level
Wide Band Hysteresis Sync.

Usensor Full Band

Frequency o
(optional)
Synchronization n

Optional, depending on channel type I

Analog Wide Bandwidth Wide Bandwidth
ADC
I*
Filter Sample Values
s

o
Analog Narrow Bandwidth Digital Narrow Bandwidth
Filter ADC Filter Sample Values
l

I a
Digital
|x|
Filter t

i
Narrow Band
Level
Wide Band Hysteresis Sync.

Isensor Full Band

Frequency o

Synchronization n

Figure 5.8: Functional block diagram of a power measurement channel

(ADC) and had to decide between one of four unfavorable possibilities:

• One could measure with filtering switched on to prevent aliasing when performing an fast Fourier
transform (FFT). However, wide bandwidth values would not be acquired.
• One could measure with filtering switched off to get wide bandwidth values, but one would not
acquire the FFT results.
• One could measure with filtering switched off to get wide bandwidth values, and ignore the risk
of aliasing. Here, the quality of FFT values would be questionable.
• One could switch the filter on and off and measure the currently valid value. This is unfortunately
only possible when one has steady state conditions and takes a lot of time.
In the DualPath solution (as shown in Figure 5.8 [→63]), exists a common signal path from the input
jacks. The input signal is split into two and fed into the narrow bandwidth converter and the wide
bandwidth converter. The signal processing unit calculates the values of both converters in parallel:
Wide bandwidth values (marked with symbol ᚊ) and narrow bandwidth values (marked with symbol
ᚆ). So this technically elaborate solution eliminates the problems listed above which were encountered
in previous generations of instruments. Furthermore, it offers additional advantages over previous
solutions which, while offering wide and narrow bandwidth values in “parallel”, measured usually just
the fundamental of the motor. This new approach allows the user to decide whether only the pure
fundamental of the motor (via FFT) should be calculated or if the motor harmonics by acquiring
narrow bandwidth values should be included.
This innovative feature was mainly developed for drive applications. Many other applications have to
be measured by using just a single bandwidth. Due to this, one can configure the instrument to work
either in single-mode or DualPath processing mode. The capability to work in DualPath processing

[Link] 63/206
 User Manual Instrument Family LMG600

mode is a property of the measurement channel, so this feature is not available in groups which consist
of channels not supporting DualPath.
As most of the applications (except frequency converters) are single-bandwidth applications, single-
bandwidth processing mode is the default setup. When requesting measurement values in this mode,
it does not matter if one requests the wide or narrow bandwidth values, as the instrument delivers
the same correct values for both requests.
For further configuration details, please see Signal settings [6.3.7→88].

5.6.1 Filter

An important difference between C-values [→65] (e.g. Utrms , Itrms or P ) and H-values [→65]
is that the C-values can be filtered by the user. It is useful to configure filters in a way which is
reasonable for the respective application. On the other hand, there are some requirements for the
filter that must be met due to the sampling theorem (i.e. Nyquist-Shannon theorem). Depending on
the sampling rate, a special filter can be required. There can be a contradiction between the users
intention and the required FFT setup of the instrument.
The solution to this dilemma is to let the user decide how to configure the filters:
• Manual
The main goal is the manual selection of a filter which is suitable for an application. So the
user can define filters for this purpose. The FFT, running under this circumstances, has the
following characteristics:
(i) The filter can not be set automatically, so the instrument decides, which harmonic evaluations
are possible with the given filter.
(ii) If its frequency is too high, fewer harmonic values or possibly no harmonic values are
calculated.
(iii) If its frequency is too low, a calculation might be impossible due to aliasing.
• Automatic
Here, the main goal is to calculate as many orders of harmonics as possible. For this purpose,
the bandwidth of the measurement is determined by the automatically configured filter of the
FFT.
Configuration of the filter is related to Bandwidth [5.6→62] and Anti-aliasing [5.6.2→64] and can
be configured as shown in Signal settings [6.3.7→88].

5.6.2 Anti-aliasing

As previously stated, it is necessary to fulfill the criteria of the sampling theorem (i.e., Nyquist-
Shannon theorem). This can be done in two ways:

• Automatic
If the instruments reduces the bandwidth of a signal by using an appropriate filter, it can
guarantee that no aliasing occurs. The drawback is that the harmonics can only be analyzed up
to the cut off frequency of the filter and not up to half the sampling frequency.
This approach is called automatic anti-aliasing, because the instrument guarantees this.
• Custom
If an environment without signal components above the half-sampling frequency in the spectrum
of the signal can be guaranteed, then the signal can be analyzed up to about half the sampling
frequency. The drawback is, that any spectral component greater than half the sampling
frequency will lead to aliasing and such aliasing effects are very difficult to detect!
This behavior is called the custom anti-aliasing, because the customer has to guarantee this.

HAAL [8.9.121→151] Configuration of the anti-aliasing is related to the Bandwidth [5.6→62] and Filter [5.6.1→64] and
can be configured as shown in Signal settings [6.3.7→88].

64/206 [Link]
 5 Basic concepts

5.7 Parallel calculations

By eliminating some restrictions concerning the bandwidth (see Bandwidth [5.6→62]) there is no
longer a need for the user to decide between measuring C-values [→65] (e.g. active power) or H-
values [→65]. With this instrument, it is possible to do both in parallel. However, there are some
physical aspects which should be kept in mind:
For both C-values and H-values, it is necessary to measure over an integer number of periods (see
Synchronization [5.9→70]). The FFT is usually performed over a fixed number of periods (e.g. 10
according to IEC 61000-3-2/EN 61000-3-2) while RMS values and power are usually measured over
a fixed time, the cycle time. This time has to be modified slightly from cycle to cycle to match
exactly an integer number of periods. These two different concepts can raise different results when,
for example, applying a DC signal. While the measurement over a cycle time works without any
issues, the measurement over 10 periods for the FFT will fail, because the 10 periods will never be
finished with DC!
Another point to keep in mind is the measurement principle of an FFT. The frequency resolution of
the calculated bins (in principle the frequency components) is the inverse of the width of the time
window. So when measuring for 200 ms, the frequency resolution of the bins is 5 Hz. When measuring
for 10 s, the frequency resolution is 0.1 Hz. The advantage of a finer resolution is compensated by a
disadvantage: If the instrument can measure 400 harmonics, a measurement window of 200 ms would
allow analysis up to 2 kHz. With a 10 s window, the limit would be 40 Hz. So a 50 Hz fundamental
could not be measured with a 10 s cycle time.
To solve this dilemma the main focus of the analysis can be chosen:
• C-values
Values which are measured over a cycle time
The focal point is the calculation of the power, rms, and related values. A cycle time can
be defined for this purpose. The FFT is running under these circumstances with following
characteristics: The number of periods for the measurement window is calculated as usual (see
Measurement without gaps [5.10→71]).
The harmonic values might be calculated faster or slower than the configured cycle time. Because
the focus is on the calculation of cycle-based values, one gets a set of harmonics with each set
of cycle-based values. If the harmonic values are calculated faster, you get the result of the last
harmonics calculation. If the harmonics values are calculated slower, you might get the same
set of harmonic values with multiple consecutive sets of cycle values.
The cycle values are updated whenever a cycle has finished and are provided with the most
recently calculated harmonic values, as described above.
• H-values
Values which are measured over the time of a harmonic window
The focal point is the calculation of the harmonics of one group (the so called master group).
The number of periods of all groups are set up automatically (see Calculation of harmonics,
option L6-OPT-HRM [5.8→66]). The master group is used to define a virtual cycle time. The
calculation of cycle-based values of all groups is done using this virtual cycle time. The harmonic
values are calculated independently, in the same way as before with cycle-based values.
The consequence for the master group is that the calculation has the following characteristics:
The measurement time is exactly the same as the time window of the FFT; so there is exactly
one set of cycle-based values per set of harmonic values.
If several groups are being measured, there are typically two approaches used for
choosing the master group:
(i) Choose the group with the highest signal frequency. This choice yields the best
time resolution, but also unfortunately there is a lot of repeated data acquired from the
slower groups.
(ii) Choose the group with the lowest signal frequency. Here, the time resolution is
worst, but each set of values consists of non-redundant data.
The configuration of one of these operating modes is combined with the cycle time setting and is
described in Measurement tab [6.3.2→86].

[Link] 65/206
 User Manual Instrument Family LMG600

5.8 Calculation of harmonics, option L6-OPT-HRM

For the calculation of the harmonics, the measurement window has a width of an integer number of
signal periods. The sample values of this window are transformed using an FFT algorithm into the
desired lines or bins. The harmonics are calculated from these bins.

Bins, harmonics and interharmonics

For example when measuring a 50 Hz signal over 10 periods (so you use a 200 ms window),
the FFT will deliver bins in steps of 5 Hz. Each 10th bin is a harmonic related to 50 Hz
and you get 9 interharmonic bins between the harmonics.

The number of calculated harmonics depends on the Filter [5.6.1→64] configuration, the signal
frequency and Anti-aliasing [5.6.2→64]. The sampling frequency, the number of used periods and
thus the FFT size are calculated from these values. This also determines if the harmonics are measured
with or without gaps (see Measurement without gaps [5.10→71]).

BURE [8.9.49→127] In general the instrument can measure up to 2000 bins of a signal as real and imaginary components.
BUIM [8.9.48→126] For the first 400 bins amplitude and phase are caluculated and these 400 values can be displayed in
BUAM [8.9.47→126] the GUI. All of these values can be transferred via interface.
BUPH [8.9.50→127] The number of interharmonics can be set up from 0 to 19. So with 0 (no) interharmonic, analysis up
INTERHARM
to harmonics order 2000 is possible. With 9 interharmonics according IEC 61000-4-7/EN 61000-4-7,
[8.9.122→151]
analysis up to harmonics order 200 is possible and with 19 interharmonics, analysis up to harmonics
order 100 is possible.

These bins can be used for evaluations concerning power quality and EMC according to the standards
of the IEC 61000-4-x/EN 61000-4-x and IEC 61000-3-x/EN 61000-3-x series.

When the set number of periods is not valid under concrete circumstances (e.g. invalid signal frequency
or filter), the harmonics are marked as NaN and displayed as dashes in the GUI.

Automatic filters
If the signal filter is set to auto, the filter setting is determined by the fundamental frequency
FHARM [8.9.29→119] for the harmonics measurement. A high number of harmonics and measurement
without gaps is preferred.

The exact calculation of harmonics depends on different settings (see GROUP menu [6.3.7→88])
like

• single or dual processing (see Bandwidth [5.6→62])

• harmonics auto or custom (see Anti-aliasing [5.6.2→64])

• auto filter on/off, filter settings (see Automatic filters [5.8→66])

• number of interharmonics (see Calculation of harmonics, option L6-OPT-HRM

[5.8→66])

as well as on the applied signal frequency. The following tables give an overview, up to which order or
frequency harmonics can be calculated. Furthermore, these tables provide if the calculation is without
gaps and if it is free of aliasing.

5.8.1 Interharmonics = 0

This section handles the case, if no interharmonics are wanted.

The following tables show the situation for the Power measurement channel L60-CH-A1
[3.5→27]. For the channel types Power measurement channel L60-CH-B1 [3.6→32] and Power
measurement channel L60-CH-C1 [3.7→36] the principle is similar, but due to limited bandwidth
and dual path technology the tables are different and shown in the respective section. The examples
below can easyly be translated for those channels.

66/206 [Link]
 5 Basic concepts

Processing single path, auto filter off

# Filter setting Harmonics Fundamental Gaps Max. Order or

setting frequency frequency
1 <15 kHz no effect 2 - 7.5 Hz no 2000th or filter
frequency
2 <15 kHz no effect 7.5 - 33 Hz no filter frequency
3 <15 kHz no effect 33 Hz - 7.5 kHz yes filter frequency
4 15 kHz no effect 2 - 7.5 Hz no 2000th
5 15 kHz no effect 7.5 - 33 Hz no 15 kHz
6 15 kHz no effect 33 Hz - 7.5 kHz yes 15 kHz
7 150 kHz no effect 20 - 75 Hz yes 2000th
8 150 kHz no effect 75 Hz - 7.5 kHz yes 150 kHz
9 no filter Custom* 20 - 300 Hz yes 2000th
10 no filter Custom* 300 - 7.5 kHz yes 600 kHz
11 no filter Auto — — —
*
Aliasing is not prevented by the instrument, see Anti-aliasing [5.6.2→64]

This table shows for a given setting uniquely which fundamental frequency is processed in which way.
For a particular fundamental frequency you see the different possible settings and can choose that
which is the optimum concerning number of harmonics, gaps and aliasing for the conrete application.

The combination #11 (no filter, harmonics set to auto) is not valid, because without filter there can
be no guarantee for no aliasing. So there no harmonics will be calculated.

Processing single path, auto filter on, auto harmonics

# Filter setting Harmonics Fundamental Gaps Max. Order or

setting frequency frequency
12 Auto on Auto 2 - 7.5 Hz no 2000th
13 Auto on Auto 7.5 - 33 Hz no 15 kHz
14 Auto on Auto 20 - 75 Hz yes 2000th
15 Auto on Auto 75 Hz - 7.5 kHz yes 150 kHz
For this table, the filter is set to auto, so the instrument has the decision, if a 25 Hz signal is measured
with #13 or #14.

Processing single path, auto filter on, custom harmonics

# Filter setting Harmonics Fundamental Gaps Max. Order or

setting frequency frequency
16 Auto on Custom* 2 - 7.5 Hz no 2000th
17 Auto on Custom* 7.5 - 33 Hz no 15 kHz
18 Auto on Custom* 20 - 75 Hz yes 2000th
19 Auto on Custom* 75 Hz - 7.5 kHz yes 600 kHz
*
Aliasing is not prevented by the instrument, see Anti-aliasing [5.6.2→64]

For this table the filter is set to auto, so the instrument has the decision, if a 25 Hz signal is measured
with #17 or #18.

[Link] 67/206
 User Manual Instrument Family LMG600

Processing dual path

# Filter setting Harmonics Fundamental Gaps Max. Order or

setting frequency frequency
20 <15 kHz no effect 2 - 7.5 Hz no 2000th or filter
frequency
21 <15 kHz no effect 7.5 - 33 Hz no filter frequency
22 <15 kHz no effect 33 Hz - 7.5 kHz yes filter frequency
23 15 kHz or auto no effect 2 - 7.5 Hz no 2000th
filter off
24 15 kHz or auto no effect 7.5 - 33 Hz no 15 kHz
filter off
25 15 kHz or auto no effect 33 - 7.5 kHz yes 15 kHz
filter off
This table shows for a given setting uniquely which fundamental frequency is processed in which way.
For one single fundamental frequency you see the different possible settings and can choose that which
is the optimum concerning number of harmonics, gaps and aliasing for the conrete application.

With dual path processing the harmonics are just computed for the small band values. There is no
calculation for wide band values.

Examples

1. Consider single path processing, auto filter and auto harmonics. How many harmonics are
calculated for a 32 Hz signal, and how many for a 34 Hz signal?
For the 34 Hz signal #14 is the correct line and 2000 harmonics will be calculated. For the 32 Hz
signal lines #13 or #14 could apply, and thus also 2000 or 468 harmonics are calculated. (
15 kHz/32 Hz = 468.75. )

2. For an avionic application the harmonics from 400 Hz fundamental up to 150 kHz should be
measured. What to set up?
The probably best solutions are #8 and #15, because they have no potential disadvantages.
#10 and #19 are possible, but have a potential risk of aliasing.

3. If you want the small bandwidth values for a frequency converter application with 25 Hz
fundamental frequency and 1 kHz bandwidth, which setting has to be used? Are there any gaps
in the measurement? Probably, the best solution is #21, because there you get 1 kHz/25 Hz = 40
harmonics beside the dual path advantages without any gaps.
#2 would also be possible but without the dual path advantages.
#5, #7 and #9 could be used, but violate the 1 kHz bandwidth.
#13, #14, #17 and #18 could be used, but the filter is not defined and some have a risk of
aliasing.

5.8.2 Interharmonics = 9

The following tables show the situation for the Power measurement channel L60-CH-A1
[3.5→27]. For the channel types Power measurement channel L60-CH-B1 [3.6→32] and Power
measurement channel L60-CH-C1 [3.7→36] the principle is the same also if they are not shown.

This section handles the case, if 9 interharmonics are wanted. This is typical for measurements
according to IEC 61000-3-2, IEC 61000-3-12, IEC 61000-4-7, EN 61000-3-2, EN 61000-3-12 and
EN 61000-4-7 where a 200 ms window is required for a 50 Hz fundamental frequency. Due to this
10 period window, the fundamental frequencies are multiplied with 10, the number of bins stays
constant and the order or harmonics is divided by 10. Following just the tables for this setting.

68/206 [Link]
 5 Basic concepts

Processing single path, auto filter off

# Filter setting Harmonics Fundamental Gaps Max. Order

setting frequency Harm/Bin or
frequency
1 <15 kHz no effect 20 - 75 Hz no 200th /2000th or
filter frequency
2 <15 kHz no effect 75 - 330 Hz no filter frequency
3 <15 kHz no effect 330 Hz - 7.5 kHz yes filter frequency
4 15 kHz no effect 20 - 75 Hz no 200th /2000th
5 15 kHz no effect 75 - 330 Hz no 15 kHz
6 15 kHz no effect 330 Hz - 7.5 kHz yes 15 kHz
7 150 kHz no effect 200 - 750 Hz yes 2000th
8 150 kHz no effect 750 Hz - 7.5 kHz yes 150 kHz
9 no filter Custom* 200 - 3 kHz yes 2000th
10 no filter Custom* 3 - 7.5 kHz yes 600 kHz
11 no filter Auto — — —
*
Aliasing is not prevented by the instrument, see Anti-aliasing [5.6.2→64]

Processing single path, auto filter on, auto harmonics

# Filter setting Harmonics Fundamental Gaps Max. Order

setting frequency Harm/Bin or
frequency
12 Auto on Auto 20 - 75 Hz no 200th /2000th
13 Auto on Auto 75 - 330 Hz no 15 kHz
14 Auto on Auto 200 - 750 Hz yes 200th /2000th
15 Auto on Auto 750 Hz - 7.5 kHz yes 150 kHz

Processing single path, auto filter on, custom harmonics

# Filter setting Harmonics Fundamental Gaps Max. Order

setting frequency Harm/Bin or
frequency
16 Auto on Custom* 20 - 75 Hz no 200th /2000th
17 Auto on Custom* 75 - 330 Hz no 15 kHz
18 Auto on Custom* 200 - 750 Hz yes 200th /2000th
*
19 Auto on Custom 750 Hz - 7.5 kHz yes 600 kHz
*
Aliasing is not prevented by the instrument, see Anti-aliasing [5.6.2→64]

Processing dual path

# Filter setting Harmonics Fundamental Gaps Max. Order

setting frequency Harm/Bin or
frequency
20 <15 kHz no effect 20 - 75 Hz no 200th /2000th or
filter frequency
21 <15 kHz no effect 75 - 330 Hz no filter frequency
22 <15 kHz no effect 330 Hz - 7.5 kHz yes filter frequency
23 15 kHz or auto no effect 20 - 75 Hz no 200th /2000th
filter off
24 15 kHz or auto no effect 75 - 330 Hz no 15 kHz
filter off
25 15 kHz or auto no effect 330 - 7.5 kHz yes 15 kHz
filter off

[Link] 69/206
 User Manual Instrument Family LMG600

5.9 Synchronization

The usual definitions for C-values [→65] (such as active power and RMS values) use always a
measurement over an integer number of periods. For this reason, it is necessary that the instrument
synchronizes to the applied signal. The synchronization is a common property of all channels within
a group as these will always have the same fundamental frequency. For the synchronization sources,
the following options exist:
Synchronization
• A voltage or current channel of the group
The user can select one of the group’s channels and configure how the frequency is determined
in detail.
If in a three phase system the synchronization is done on the zero crossing of one phase (so from
0 ° of one period to 0 ° of a later period), the two other phases are measured from 120 ° (resp.
-120 °) of one period to 120 ° (resp. -120 °) of the same later period. So the measuring interval
of all three phases is exactly identical!
• Another group
A group can also be synchronized to another group.
• Line
The frequency of the power supply of the instrument is used.
• External
The frequency which is applied to the external synchronization jack is used.
If using a voltage or current channel as a synchronization source, the instrument evaluates by default
the zero crossings of the signal to determine the period duration and thus the frequency. For
distorted or specially modulated signals there are additional settings. One can modify the following
parameters:
• Level and hysteresis of the comparator
By default the level is zero and the hysteresis is 2 %. For noisy signals, one can increase the
hysteresis. For a signal that does not have any zero crossings, the level can be changed.
• Bandwidth
For signals with high-frequency distortions (e.g. at the output of frequency converters), it is
possible to apply a low-pass filter in order to get the fundamental signal.
For example a typical pulse-width modulation inverter with fundamental frequency up to 300 Hz
and a switching frequency of 16 kHz is measured by rejecting the 16 kHz component to get the
300 Hz component. So a filter with a cutoff frequency between these two frequencies would be
used.

This filter is just in the synchronization path of the instrument and does not influence
the sampled measurement values!

Filter position In addition to the low-pass filter, it is also possible to configure a high-pass filter (e.g. to
eliminate a DC component).
• Demodulation
A device using package control has in fact an amplitude modulated current. With the built-in
demodulator, it is possible to demodulate this current and to synchronize to the fundamental of
the modulation instead of the frequency of the supply system.
Except when measuring DC signals (where the exact measurement time does not matter), it is always
important to have a correct synchronization in order to measure an integer number of periods. The best
way to check the correct synchronization is to watch the frequency which is displayed for each group.
If this frequency meets the fundamental frequency of the system, the synchronization is configured
correctly.

For a correct synchronization a sufficient measurement duration is required. If for example

the measurement duration is 1 s, it is not possible to measure a signal with 0.5 Hz (2 s
periodic time) because there is no integer number of periods that fit into this duration.

70/206 [Link]
 5 Basic concepts

5.10 Measurement without gaps

For many applications, it is important to measure continuously (i.e. without gaps). For steady state
signals, there will not be any difference if gaps in the measurement occur. However, with fluctuating
signals, there is a high risk that the interesting part of the signal falls into a gap of the measurement
where it would be disregarded. This can lead to significant errors in the reading of a signal.

As usual, ZES ZIMMER has implemented a way to perform gap-less measurement. The correctness of
the results obtained depends on both, sufficient signal processing power as well as the right choice of
algorithm:

The signal is measured and integrated over full periods, i.e. from zero crossing to zero crossing
(determined by Synchronization [5.9→70]). When a measurement cycle ends, the completed periods
are used to calculate the measurement values such as Utrms , Itrms , and P .

The uncompleted period is used as the starting value for the next coming samples. In other words,
the measurements cover from the last positive zero crossing before the cycle until the last positive zero
crossing within the cycle. With this behavior, it can happen that the real measurement duration is
up to one period shorter or longer than the configured cycle time. In average it is equal to the cycle
time.

Example: If one measures a signal with a periodicity of 20 ms with 50 ms cycle time, the
real measurement duration alternates between 40 ms and 60 ms.

If there is no synchronization signal available (e.g. when measuring DC signals), the measurement
duration always equals the configured cycle time.

5.11 Sample Values

All measured values are based on sample values of voltage and current. There exist several ways to
access the sampled values directly:

• There are 4 oscilloscopes (scopes ) implemented in the instrument. They each have 8 tracks with
2048 values per track. Two of the scopes are reserved for the GUI, two are for remote control.
Each track can display sample values (u, i, or p) of each channel (directly measured) or linked
values. The group of the signal of the first track is the synchronization source of the scope.
The values in this scopes are offered like a usual computed value: Each time a new scope is
calculated (e.a is filled with values) the scope can be requested by the user interface. After this
a new scope is triggered and filled.
The suffix numbers for the GUI scopes are 21 and 22, for the remote controlled scopes 1 and 2,
see SPVAL [8.9.70→134].

• There is one scope which is used to store many sample values in case of an event. This scope has
8 tracks with 8 M values per track. The event is manually given with TRANSIENTSTART [8.9.183→170].
This scope starts recording just if it is triggered. The filling can take a lot of time, so it
is possible to request the state via SPCLEN [8.9.62→131] or SPSTAT [8.9.67→132]. To abort a filling,
TRANSIENTABORT [8.9.182→170] can be used. If the scope is filled, the values can be requested. For this
huge amount of data there is just one shared scope for GUI and remote control. So a setup via
remote control will influence the GUI setting directly and vice versa. The suffix for this scope
is 10.
An example how to do this via remote control can be found in Reading sample values of
an event [8.12.1→192]

Each scope has to be setup with a sample rate (SCSR [8.9.128→153]) and with the signals which are assigned
to the tracks (SCTRAC [8.9.129→153]). The state of the scope can be queried with SPSTAT [8.9.67→132] and
if all values are stored they could be read out by SPVAL [8.9.70→134]. The pretrigger can be set up via
SCPTRS [8.9.126→152] and SCPTRT [8.9.127→152].

[Link] 71/206
 User Manual Instrument Family LMG600

5.12 Measurement uncertainty of measured and calculated values

The uncertainty of the directly measured values Utrms , Itrms and P can be found in Technical data
[3→25]. The following calculations illustrate how to use these tables to calculate the uncertainty of
calculated values.
We will use the following measurement as example:

Utrms = 230.000 V , nominal range 250 V , peak value of range 400 V (5.29)
Itrms = 0.95000 A, nominal range 1.2 A, peak value of range 3.75 A (5.30)
PF = 0.25000 (5.31)
f = 50.0000 Hz (5.32)
P = 54.625 W , nominal range = 250 V ∗ 1.2 A = 300 W, (5.33)
peak value of range = 400 V ∗ 3.75 A = 1500 W

AC coupling mode for the signal.

From the tables with the specifications, the following uncertainties can be calculated directly:

∆Utrms = ±(0.01 % of reading + 0.02 % of upper range value) (5.34)

∆Utrms = ±(0.023 V + 0.08 V ) = ±0.103 V (5.35)
∆Itrms = ±(0.01 % of reading + 0.02 % of upper range value) (5.36)
∆Itrms = ±(0.095 mA + 0.75 mA) = ±0.845 mA (5.37)
∆P = ±(0.015 % of reading + 0.01 % of upper range value) (5.38)
∆P = ±(8.194 mW + 150 mW ) = ±0.158 W (5.39)

Why use the upper range value (peak value) instead of the nominal value for error
calculation?
Analog instruments use the DC or RMS component of a signal to display the true value.
Due to some analog-related characteristics of the working principle (e.g. saturation, non-
linearities of components) of these instruments, it could possibly happen that the reading
of a signal with a small RMS component but a large peak value gets impaired. Therefore,
these instruments had to specify a maximum allowed crest factor (the ratio of peak value to
RMS value) for which they could guarantee a reading inside their specification. However,
there was really no concrete limit for the maximum measurable peak value so the range
used for error calculations was the RMS range for sinusoidal signals.
The world has changed and the signals have become more and more distorted and modern
instruments, like the LMG, use ADC. The range is now defined as the largest value an
ADC can sample. The RMS can be as large as this largest value (e.g. in the case of DC)
or also significantly smaller (e.g. in the case of inrush current). For this reason, the only
range value for an error calculation which could be legitimated physically is the peak value
(i.e. the range of the ADC).
The definition of the RMS value (as well as the no longer necessary crest factor) is rather
arbitrary: A 100 Vpk range can be specified as 70 Arms range with crest factor 1.43 or also
as 5 Vrms range with crest factor 20. In other words, it makes sense to specify the crest
factor for a signal (to select the correct peak range) but it is pointless to specify a crest
factor for a modern digital instrument, since it does not carry meaningful information.
The only important point is that the peak value does not exceed the ADC range!
It is absolutely meaningless to specify am RMS range for error calculations for modern
instruments with ADC sampling. This is the reason why ZES ZIMMERand other companies
use the technically correct peak value of a range, as it represents the true upper limit of
the ADC.

72/206 [Link]
 5 Basic concepts

The power factor is computed as follows:

P P
PF = = (5.40)
S U ∗I

The uncertainty of the power factor is calculated using the total differential:

∂P F ∂P F ∂P F
∆P F = ∆P + ∆U + ∆I (5.41)
∂P ∂U ∂I
∆P P ∗ ∆U P ∗ δI
∆P F = − − 2 (5.42)
U ∗I I ∗U 2 I ∗U
0.158 W 54.625 W ∗ 0.103 V 54.625 W ∗ 0.845 mA
∆P F = − − (5.43)
230 V ∗ 0.95 A 0.95 A ∗ (230 V ) 2 (0.95 A)2 ∗ 230 V
∆P F = 0.00039 (5.44)

This is the maximum uncertainty of the instrument. The typical uncertainty is two to five times
smaller!
These are the uncertainties related to the instrument. For the total uncertainty of the measurement
there are further things to take into account such as:
• The error occurring when reading a digital number is ±0.5 of the last digit.
• Environmental influences like coupling into the measuring wires
• The impact if voltage or current were measured correctly
• etc.
If you use external sensors, please see the ZES ZIMMER Sensors and Accessories Manual for hints on
how to calculate the total uncertainty.

[Link] 73/206
 6 Graphical user interface (GUI)

6 Graphical user interface (GUI)

The graphical user interface (GUI) allows users to control the instrument’s measurement core via the
front panel. By using touchscreen and keys, one can configure the instrument and then view the
measured values on the instrument’s display.

The GUI is internally connected to the measurement core and communicates with it by using the
interface commands as described in Remote control [8→97]. In this manner, the GUI behaves like
any other user application which communicates with the instrument via an interface such as RS232,
LAN, or IEEE488.1.

The commands internally used by the GUI are also of interest to users who are using another interface
to remotely control the instrument. Therefore, the most important commands are marked in the
margin like in the example here. This chapter describes just the general handling but by following IRNG [8.9.103→144]
the link in the margin, one can find the complete documentation for each command.

6.1 General GUI handling

1 3 2

MEASUREMENT
Precision Power Analyzer LMG670 DEFAULT 7 CURRENT 8 VOLTAGE 9

POWER 4 GRAPH 5 CUSTOM 6

APPS 1 ENERGY 2 I/O 3

0 MISC. . -

5 ENTER BACK CANCEL

SETUP
INSTR. GROUP CHANNEL

APPS ACTIONS STORAGE

4
FREEZE EXECUTE HELP

STANDBY TOUCH USB 1 USB 2

Figure 6.1: Elements of the user interface

The user interface consists of the following elements (displayed in Figure 6.1 [→75]):

1. Touchscreen

2. Fixed function keys

3. Soft keys

4. Status bar

5. Menus and dialogs

[Link] 75/206
 User Manual Instrument Family LMG600

Touchscreen
The touchscreen offers the most direct and intuitive handling of the instrument. If for any reason
the touch functionality needs to be deactivated (e.g. a user wants to point at something directly on
the screen without the risk of accidentally activating any function), the [TOUCH] key can be used
to deactivate the touchscreen completely. One can always operate the instrument without using the
touchscreen by using fixed function keys and/or soft keys only.

Fixed function keys

The fixed function keys in the Measurement and Setup blocks have specific functions which are printed
above each key. The brightly illuminated text indicates what action will occur when the key is pressed.
If the text is dark, then this key is deactivated and nothing will happen when it is pressed.

Soft keys
At the right side of the screen, the displayed functions of the soft keys are displayed. Each soft key
has two adjoined physical keys. Pressing either the right or left physical key correlates to pressing
the right/left side of the touchscreen’s soft key. If there are just two choices (like an on/off selection),
it does not matter if one presses the left or right key. If more choices are available, one can scroll
through the list of available settings by pressing either the right or left key.

A symbol in the upper right or left corner of the soft key indicates that an action (illustrated by the
symbol) will be triggered when a long press (i.e. more than 600 ms) occurs on the respective side of
the soft key. There are just a few long-press symbols available:

• Symbol for entering text or a value. A long press on this side of the soft key opens a dialog to
enter/edit a text or numerical value.

• Symbol for selecting an item from a list. A long press on this side of the soft key opens a dialog
where one can select from all available choices.

• Symbol for configuration. A long press on this side of the soft key opens a configuration dialog.

• Symbol for action. A long press on this side of the soft key will perform the action displayed in
the soft key.

The exact meaning and behavior of the soft keys depends on the context. In general, white text
can provide information about the meaning of the soft key or also about a value which can not be
changed. Yellow text always indicates a setting which can be changed by pressing the soft key. There
are just a few general types of soft keys as illustrated in Figure 6.2 [→76], Figure 6.3 [→76], and
Figure 6.4 [→77]. A disabled soft key is shaded to indicate that this soft key cannot be pressed (see
Figure 6.5 [→77]. Nevertheless, this disabled soft key could display the actual state of a value as
described above (see Figure 6.6 [→77]).

Figure 6.2: Soft key displaying a state. The current scaling is 1.0. By pressing the soft key left or
right, one can change this scaling. A long press will open a dialog to edit the scaling value.

Figure 6.3: Soft key to change an entry from a list. The selected value of the list is displayed. By
pressing either the left or right side of the soft key, the previous or next value of the list
is chosen, respectively. In most cases, the selection will be wrapped-around to beginning
once the end of the list is reached. A long press will open a selection dialog.

76/206 [Link]
 6 Graphical user interface (GUI)

Figure 6.4: Soft key to trigger an action. In this example, the triggered action is to edit filter settings.
When this soft key is pressed, a sub-menu is opened which allows users to configure the
filter settings.

Figure 6.5: Soft key which is currently disabled as the key is not applicable in the current context.
Pressing has no effect. Once the context is changed in such a way that this soft key has a
purpose, the soft key will be activated again.

Figure 6.6: A disabled soft key which still displays a state. Although similar to the soft key in
Figure 6.5 [→77], this soft key displays the current setting. This happens usually in
conjunction with automatic functions. In this example, the auto-ranging mechanism
is active, so it is not possible to manually change the range but the soft key provides
information on which range was selected.

Status bar
Located at the bottom of the screen, the status bar provides summarized information about the most
important states of the instrument. One can see information such as which channels belong to which
group and if any channels are over-ranged and the selected ranges. If the signal filter is active, the
synchronization frequency for successful synchronization is displayed.

If the frequency of a group is displayed as dashes, this group is not synchronized to the
measured signal.

Figure 6.7: Status bar which is located at the bottom of the screen

By touching an over range indicator , one opens directly the [CHANNEL] menu to
change the range. If one touches a filter setting , one access the [GROUP] menu where
the filter setting can be configured. Touching the cycle time or average indicator opens
a dialog to configures these values.

While using the status bar to configure the instrument is a fast and an intuitive process,
one can always use the fixed function keys or soft keys to navigate to the applicable menus
and configure the same parameters there.

Menus and dialogs

The remaining screen is reserved for the display of measurement menus, setup menus and setup
dialogs.

By pressing a key from the MEASUREMENT area, one can view any menu displaying measured values.
What is currently displayed in these menus can be modified by the soft keys. The measurement menus
all have a blue color scheme.

To change any instrument setting, one can press any key from the SETUP area. Then the associated
setup menu is displayed on top of the underlying measurement menu. All the relevant settings are

[Link] 77/206
 User Manual Instrument Family LMG600

displayed in the setup menus. Here, one can reach further sub-menus, setup dialogs or directly change
some parameter values. The soft keys will change accordingly.
In the setup menus, one has has the following possibilities:

• Opening setup dialogs by pressing the relevant <soft key> or by touching the relevant element
on the screen.
• The wheel can be used to navigate the dashed selection frame to the setting to be changed. If
a setting has only two possible states (e.g. On/Off) a short wheel press will toggle between
these. If more than two states are available, pressing the wheel shortly will change the dashed
selection to a solid selection. This indicates, that rotating the wheel will change the setting
directly. The solid frame will turn dashed after approx. two seconds after last action. Long
press of the wheel (> 600 ms) while the frame is dashed opens a dialog to display all possible
states as would do the corresponding <soft key>.

• Navigating to a sub-menu by pressing the relevant <soft key> or by touching the relevant
element on the screen.
• Leaving the currently opened sub-menu and returning to parent menu by pressing [BACK].
In the setup dialogs, one has the following possibilities:

• Entering a setting. By pressing the desired element , it is directly selected and the dialog is
immediately closed. For some settings, one can select an element with the wheel and then press
[ENTER] which sets the selection and closes the dialog.
• Canceling the dialog. By pressing the [CANCEL], the dialog’s settings are reverted to the
previous settings.
• Previewing different settings by pressing <Preview>.
• Entering text or numbers. See below for additional information.
The setup menus and dialogs are displayed in a gray color scheme so that they are clearly differentiated
from the MEASUREMENT menus.

Entering values
Pop-up dialogs are provided to change or enter values such as text or numbers. The currently
configured value is provided in the edit field of the dialog. As the value in the edit field is preselected,
indicated by the blue background, the actual value will be replaced completely if one enters any value.
For example, if the old value is 2.0 and the user wants to have a new value of 0.5, then it is faster to
enter the three characters (“0.5”) directly than to edit and modify the former value.
However, it is always possible to edit any existing entry by moving the arrow keys. In this case the
blue selection vanishes and one can change the entry character-by-character. The [BACK] can be
used to backspace and delete the character left of the cursor position.
The scroll wheel is used to navigate through the keys of the virtual on-screen keyboard. The selection
key (located in the middle of the arrow keys) is used to press the currently selected key of the virtual
keyboard. For entering numbers, one can also use the numerical keyboard which uses the keys located
in the Measurement section ([DEFAULT], [CURRENT], etc.).
Unit prefixes are available when entering numerical values. So instead of typing 0.005, one could just
type 5 and then <m>.

Preview mode
When settings are changed, the instrument will process these changes as soon as possible. Many
dialogs offer a preview mode (accessed by <Preview>) that allows one to immediately see the effect
that the changed settings have on the measuring environment. For example, the preview mode can
be used to view the changed waveform directly after the filter frequency has been changed.
The preview mode is not available for all settings as the instrument requires additional time when
setting some parameters. Such parameters are not suitable for swift previewing in the GUI. The group
setting (located in the Measurement tab [6.3.2→86]) is an example of one such instrument setting
where the preview mode is not available.

78/206 [Link]
 6 Graphical user interface (GUI)

Tabs and sticky properties

The contents of most menus are organized into tabs which can either be selected through clicking the
desired tab or by using the ’Tab Keys’ which are located above the soft keys on the front panel, see
Figure 4.1 [→45]. Most tabs are organized so there there is a separate tab for each group. Additionally,
there is often a “Sums” tab which contains overview of the sum values of every group.

In most menus, the active tab can be switched using the ’Arrow Keys’ left/right in addition to the
’Tab Keys’.

The selected group (i.e. active tab) is a sticky property which applies to the GUI. For example, if one
selects “Group 2” tab in the [VOLTAGE] menu and then changes to the [CURRENT] menu, the
“Group 2” tab will also be selected in this menu. Similarly, if one then changes to the [CHANNEL]
menu, one can immediately configure the channels of the second group directly as the “Group 2” tab
is also selected here.

A similar sticky behavior also occurs if one has selected a specific channel, phase, link or transformation
inside a group. If one changes the menu, this selected information will continue to be selected for that
specific group.

For most applications, this sticky behavior is desirable. For example if a user configures a special
voltage view (i.e. a certain channel, phase or transformation of a specific group), it is most likely that
the user will want to see a corresponding view of current values if the user navigates to the current
menu.

Display of values
Measured values are displayed, whenever possible, with 6 digits. If the values directly depend on a
range (i.e. voltage, current, power) the decimal separator is fixed so that is suitable for the selected
range.

Example:
In a 250 mV range, the values of this channel will be displayed with three digits before and
3 digits after the decimal separator: 123.456 mV. If there are smaller values, they are also
displayed with 3 digits after the decimal separator and have the same prefix. This results
in a display where the decimal separators line up correctly which help one to quickly read
and compare the numbers:
Utrms 123.456 mV
Udc 1.234 mV

There are some special displays for particular values:

• ------
This is used to represent invalid values, i.e. values which could not be measured or calculated
for any reason. For example, the frequency is displayed this way if it could not be measured.
This can happen if one, for example, applies a DC signal. This kind of value is also known as
not a number or NaN.

• ^^^^^^
This is used to indicate that a value is outside of the displayable range (i.e. the amount is
bigger than 99.9999*1012 )

• 0.0
If a value is too small to be displayed (i.e. smaller than 1.00000*10-9 ), it is displayed this way.

• 0.00000
If a value is exactly zero, it is displayed this way.

• +Inf./-Inf.
Indicates, that the result of a calculation was too big or small to be represented by the internal
data type. This can happen, if a division by zero takes place.

[Link] 79/206
 User Manual Instrument Family LMG600

In the Standard menus [6.2.1→81] (such as [DEFAULT] and [VOLTAGE]), the instrument
displays only values measured from a unique circuit such as bandwidth star circuit (⅄) or delta circuit
(Δ). In other words, measurements from a star circuit (⅄) or delta circuit (Δ) are never displayed at
the same time. Similarly, when dual processing is enabled, narrow bandwidth (ᚆ) or wide bandwidth
(ᚊ) measurements are never displayed at the same time. Although every value does not have its own
identifier in the standard menus, the exact meaning of a value can be determined through the context
of the table and soft keys.
However, there are also menus (such as the plot, scope and custom menus) where these values can be
mixed (e.g. narrow and wide bandwidth values are simultaneously displayed). In these cases, there
exists a general nomenclature which uniquely identifies each displayed value. This is illustrated in the
following examples:
The example Utrms 3 Gᚆ2 defines the following:
• The value is a Utrms value.
• It is the 3rd value of the 2nd group.
If this second group has 3 channels and the wiring is set to U⅄I⅄or UΔI⅄, this is the
voltage of phase 3 against the star point. So this is a star value (⅄).
If this second group would, for example, have 4 channels and the first group contains
two channels, then this phase would be the fifth physical channel.
• This value is a narrow bandwidth value.
The example Utrms 31 Gᚊ
2 defines the following:

• The value is a Utrms value.

• It is a linked value between phases 3 and 1 of the second group.
For this group, a star-delta conversion is activated and the measured value is the delta
value (Δ) between the phases 3 and 1.
• This value is a wide bandwidth value.
In the Standard menus [6.2.1→81], a subset of the complete identifiers is displayed in table column
headers as other information is already displayed in the soft keys.
Throughout the user interface, the term channel is used to refer to physical channels. The term phase
is used to refer to the corresponding phase within a group and the term link is used for linked values.
E.g. channel four and five are assigned to group 2. Within this group channel four is referred to
as phase one and channel five is referred to as phase two.

6.2 Measurement menus

In the measurement menus, all measured values and other useful information can be accessed.
The different Standard menus [6.2.1→81] are organized according to the kind of values. For example,
current values can be found in the [CURRENT] menu, voltages in the [VOLTAGE] menu, and
power in the [POWER] menu. In the [DEFAULT] menu, an overview of the values (i.e. selected
mix of voltage, current and power values) of a P phase is provided.
Different kinds of graphical representations are available in the [GRAPH] menu: Scopes with sample
values, plot (i.e. trend graphs) with values over a measurement cycle, spectra with harmonic values
and vector diagrams.
In the [CUSTOM] menu, one can define user scripts with formulas to calculate new values from the
measured ones. Furthermore, one can define a menu layout by compiling and arranging specific values
which are required for a user-specific application.
In the [APPS](Measure) menu, measurements which were calculated by the activated apps are
provided. The values presented in this menu are selected and arranged in a way to get an optimized
view of the most important values provided by each app.

80/206 [Link]
 6 Graphical user interface (GUI)

In the [I/O] menu, access to the values of the processing signal interface is provided.

Finally, the [MISC.](Measure) menu offers further information such as serial number and software
version.

6.2.1 Standard menus

The standard menus are [DEFAULT], [CURRENT], [VOLTAGE], [POWER] and [ENERGY].
As the control of each these menus is almost identical, their handling is explained here just once:

Figure 6.8: A standard menu displaying a few values from the first group. This menu shows normal
values in the default menu. The values displayed here are from the first phase of the first
group in star circuit with narrow bandwidth.

The first soft key <Display> allows to toggle between “Normal” (C-values [→65]) and “Harmonics”
(H-values [→65]).

<Transform> allows one to control which transformation of the values is displayed. This is only
possible to change, if the option star-delta transformation is activated and the wiring of the group is
not set to “Direct”.

• ⅄
The values provided are using the star circuit transformation (⅄).

• Δ
The values provided are using the delta circuit (Δ) transformation.

If no transformation is possible, the directly measured values are always displayed (i.e. the values
which apply directly to the phase are displayed).

<Phase/Link> allows one to select which phase/linked value of the group is displayed. This setting
works in cooperation with <Transform>:

• If no transformation is possible, one can select each phase value by choosing the phase number.

• If the transformation is set to ⅄(star circuit), one can select every phase of the star circuit.

• If the transformation is set to Δ(delta circuit), one can select every link of the delta circuit.

With this soft key, one can additionally select “All” or “Σ” to get an overview over all phases of the
group (including their sum) or just the sums, respectively.

[Link] 81/206
 User Manual Instrument Family LMG600

Figure 6.9: Standard menu showing a scrollable list of sum values from each group. This [DEFAULT]
menu shows an overview of normal values. The menu currently displays the wide
bandwidth sum values of all groups. The white scrollbar on the right side of the table
(adjacent to the soft keys) indicates, that this table can be scrolled and which area of the
entire scrollable range is currently being viewed.

C-values display
UTRMS [8.9.86→139] C-values [→65] are, for example, such values as Utrms , Itrms , and P . It is not possible to list here
ITRMS [8.9.27→119] all available values, but the links located in the margin provide a good starting point. Additionally,
P [8.9.53→128] all available values can be found in the “:READ” and “:FETCh” section of SCPI syntax tree.

<Values> allows one choose the number (and often by this the size) of the values to be displayed.
The exact display depends on the number of phases and links being simultaneously displayed (see
<Phase>).

Figure 6.10: A standard menu displaying many values. This [VOLTAGE] menu displays the normal
values of all three links in delta circuit with wide bandwidth plus the sum values of group
1 are currently displayed.

82/206 [Link]
 6 Graphical user interface (GUI)

<Bandwidth> (see Bandwidth [5.6→62]) allows one to choose if the narrow or wide band values
are shown. This is only possible when the group is in dual processing mode; in single processing mode,
this soft key has no effect (see Signal settings [6.3.7→88]).
If the number of values cannot be displayed in the available space, one can either use the rotary knob
or the up/down arrow keys to scroll through the list of values, see Figure 6.9 [→82].

H-values display
One can scroll through the list of harmonic values by using either the rotary knob or the up/down
arrow keys.

Figure 6.11: A standard menu displaying harmonic values. The [CURRENT] menu displays
harmonics of the current. The values of all links of group 1 are currently displayed.

<Harmonics> allows one to toggle between showing either the odd & even harmonics or odd & only.
This is often useful, as the even harmonics are usually uninteresting as they typically have a very low
magnitude.

6.2.2 GRAPH menus

[GRAPH] allows one to navigate to this menu. A variety of graphical representations are provided
in different tabs:
• Scope
Two scopes are available for the GUI. They can be used to display the sampled values of voltage,
current or power.
• Plot
Two plots (sometimes called trend graphs) are available. They are used to display values (e.g.
Utrms , Iac and active power) which are computed over several sampled values (which is typically
a cycle time).
• Harmonics
The two spectra can be used to visualize the results of an harmonic analysis. The information
displayed here is the same as what is presented in the [VOLTAGE] or [CURRENT] menu,
but this graphical representation is useful to get an overview.
• Vector
The vector diagram (sometimes called a Fresnel diagram) is used to get an overview of the
amplitudes and phases of a group. This is useful to see if there are any effects such as non-
symmetry.

[Link] 83/206
 User Manual Instrument Family LMG600

6.2.3 Scope

Two independent oscilloscopes are provided. Each scope can display up to eight signals (i.e. one signal
for each track). As a default trigger, the scopes use the synchronization signal of the first visible track.
The scopes can be used to display pure sample values.

If the same signal is chosen one different tracks, one time with small bandwidth and one
time with wide bandwidth, there will be a time delay between these two signals. This delay
is physically caused by the different bandwidths.

Navigation
All tracks have a common time base which can be changed by <t/div> or with the rotary knob. For
the currently selected track, the up/down arrow keys are used to move the track in the Y-direction
(i.e. changing the Y-offset) and the left/right arrow keys to move the track in the X-direction. By
pressing the center of the arrow keys, the default trigger point is set to the center of the screen and
the tracks are vertically centered.

Setup
SCTRAC One can select the desired track by <Track>. Long pressing this key opens a dialog to configure
[8.9.129→153] the signal for the selected track: <Signal> chooses from one of the available signal types.
<Phase/Link> chooses the desired phase or link of a group. For touchscreen users, these selections
can be be configured by using the scrollable wheel lists. All available choices are provided on a circular
list. If the dual-processing mode is selected, <Bandwidth> allows one to select between narrow or
wide bandwidth for this signal.

<Arrange:> provides a way to fit or split the tracks. Pressing the left or right soft key selects an
action and a long press then executes the selected action.
The fit action causes the selected track (or all tracks) to be displayed as large as possible in the Y-
direction. Additionally, the rotary knob can be pressed and then the track is fitted in the X-direction
so that at least one period of the synchronization signal is displayed.
The split action first divides the Y-axis by the number of active tracks and then scales and shifts each
track so that they do not overlap. This is done by changing y/div and/or the Y-offset.

If a track with a valid signal is selected, <y/div> and <Y-Offset> show the actual scaling and
offset of the signal. The values can be decreased or increased by pressing the left or right soft keys,
respectively. A long press opens a dialog where one can enter a specific value.

Data cursors can be used to mark and measure in the scope. Pressing <Cursors> turns the display
of all cursors on/off. A long press opens a sub-menu where one can configure the cursors. When
the display of cursors is switched on, information on the cursors is displayed below the graph. In
addition to the time and amplitude position of both cursors, the time and amplitude differences are
also presented. These differences are always displayed as positive values. The reciprocal value of the
time difference (i.e. frequency) is also provided.

Time information is specially formatted in order to improve readability. For example, a

time of 1.234567 s would be displayed as 1.234’567 s. The apostrophe is used as a separator
between milliseconds and microseconds.

With <Cursor A> or <Cursor B>, one can select which track each the data cursor is assigned to
(i.e. the values of which track are displayed for that cursor’s position). <Scroll> allows one select
the action of the horizontal arrow keys:

• Time allows one to move the view of the tracks in the X-direction. Cursors are unaffected.

• Cursor x allows one to scroll the respective cursor in the X-direction. If a cursor reaches any
border, the displayed view is also translated. If the cursor was outside the visible range before
moving, the immediately jumps to the appropriate border.

• Both cursors are moved in the X-direction.

84/206 [Link]
 6 Graphical user interface (GUI)

These actions are only valid while the cursor sub-menu is active.

<Snap to value> allows one to control how the cursors are scrolled. When disabled (i.e. off), the
cursors are scrolled pixel-by-pixel through a scope. If a cursor is located at a pixel position which lies
between two real sample values, the displayed value is interpolated. When enabled, the cursor can
only be placed on real sample value positions. Especially when the time resolution is very low, this
can cause the cursor to jump several pixels at once when it is scrolled.

6.2.4 Plot

Two independent plotters are provided. Each plotter can display up to eight values (i.e. one value per
track). The plotters are used to display values (e.g. Utrms, Iac and active power) which are computed
over several sampled values (which is typically a cycle time).
The interface of the plots is very similar to the interface of the scopes (see Scope [6.2.3→84]). The
main difference lies in how the values to be plotted are selected. By long pressing <Track>, a dialog
is opened where one can configure the value to be plotted:
<Enabled> allows one to disable or enable the display of the plotted value.
With <Type>, one can control the values which are displayed under “Symbol”. If “All” is selected,
all values which can be plotted are displayed under “Symbol”. This list can be very long. However,
for example, by selecting “Voltage”, the list of symbols becomes more manageable as it now contains
only voltage-related symbols.
<Symbol> defines the symbol of the value to be plotted. This symbol is identical to what is displayed
in the measurement menus.
<Phase/Link> defines from which phase or calculation the symbol should be used. For example,
the trms value of the voltage can be configured to be from the second phase in group 3 (i.e. 2 G3 ),
from the linked value between phases 1 and 2 of group 1 (i.e. 12 G1 ), the sum of group 2 (i.e. Σ G2 ),
etc.
When the number before the “G” is a single digit, it defines the phase of the group. When the number
has two digits, it defines the linkage between phases inside the group. The Σ-symbol stands for the
sum values of a group.
The number after the “G” defines the number of the group.
When dual-processing mode is active, the <Bandwidth> is used to select the narrow or wide
bandwidth value.
For some symbols which represent lists, it is necessary to specify an <Index>. For harmonics (such
as BUAM and BIAM), the index is used to select which order of the harmonic should be plotted. BUAM [8.9.47→126]
BIAM [8.9.30→120]

6.2.5 Harmonics

The two spectra can be used to visualize the results of a harmonic analysis. While the source
information is identical to what is presented in the tables located in the [VOLTAGE] or
[CURRENT] menu, the graphical representation provides users a useful overview of the harmonic
analysis.
By long pressing <Track>, a dialog is opened where one can configure the value to be plotted. The
usage is similar to the corresponding dialog of the Scopes. See Scope [6.2.3→84]).
<Zoom> changes the number of displayed bars.
When <Odd Only> is activated, only the odd-numbered harmonics are displayed.
<Split> enables/disables the split view of multiple tracks.
<Arrange> Fits either the selected track or all tracks.
<Range> shows and sets the displayed range of the y-axis of selected track.

[Link] 85/206
 User Manual Instrument Family LMG600

6.2.6 Vector

The vector diagram (sometimes called a Fresnel diagram) is used to get an overview of the amplitudes
and phases of a group. This is useful to analyze for effects such as non-symmetry.

Navigation
The rotary knob and the arrow keys have no effect in this menu.

Setup
<Track> selects one of the three possible tracks. For each track followings settings are possible:
<Group> defines the group which should be displayed in this track. All phases of of the group are
displayed. With <Harmonic>, one selects what fundamental should be displayed (i.e. Harmonic
= 1) or any other harmonic. By using <Scale U> or <Scale I>, one can change the size of the
displayed vectors.

6.2.7 Misc. menu (measurement)

[MISC.](Measure) allows one to navigate to this menu where information about the installed software
is provided. <Licenses> opens the license information.

6.3 Setup menus

In the setup menus, one has access to all settings which define the measurement environment. The most
important things to configure are grouping, the synchronization parameters and the ranges. Because
the most important menus are used so frequently, they each have their own button ([INSTR.],
[GROUP] and [CHANNEL]).
The menus are described in INST. menu [6.3.1→86], GROUP menu [6.3.7→88] and CHANNEL
menu [6.3.8→90]. Background information concerning these settings can be found in Basic concepts
[5→55].

6.3.1 INST. menu

The instrument menu (accessed by clicking [INSTR.]) contains the global settings which apply for
the whole instrument.

6.3.2 Measurement tab

With <Cycle>, one can configure the main time interval for updating the data and thus for the
average measurement duration. Long pressing <Cycle> opens a dialog where one can select the
CYCLMOD cycle mode. If the cycle mode is set to fixed interval, it is possible to configure a cycle time . In
[8.9.131→154] addition to the two command references, further information is located in Parallel calculations
CYCL [8.9.132→154] [5.7→65].
Left/right pressing of <Cycle> allows one to change the cycle time if the cycle mode is set to fixed
interval.

AVER [8.9.93→141]
<Average> allows one to configure the average which is the number of measuring cycles over which
the sliding average is calculated. This applies to (C-values [→65]) only and does not affect other
values such as harmonics, flicker, and samples. Harmonics and flicker values have unique averaging
algorithms, which are implemented in the appropriate analysis software.
GROUP [8.9.120→150] <Grouping> allows one to configure which channel(s) belongs to each group. The configuration is
performed in a dialog which can also be reached by touching ^ , →+ or +← .
In this dialog, one can use the arrow keys or the rotary knob to select one of the split or grow symbols.
To activate the symbol, one can press the selection key, press the rotary knob or simply touch the
symbol directly. These changes only take place once the [ENTER] is pressed.

86/206 [Link]
 6 Graphical user interface (GUI)

Figure 6.12: Menu to configure global measurement settings.

6.3.3 General tab

<Date> is used to set the system date and time. This time is used for example for the time stamp SYSDATE
of a measurement or for the date of a stored file. [8.9.159→164]

<Time Zone> opens a dialog which allows the setup of the appropriate time zone. TZONE [8.9.179→169]

The display brightness can be adjusted with <Brightness>. DISB [8.9.17→115]

When connecting an external keyboard, one can use <Keyboard> to select the keyboard layout.
The instrument can be configured to display small values, which are close to zero, as zero in order to ZSUP [8.9.144→158]
remove unwanted noise (e.g if no signal is applied). This function can be enabled or disabled by using
<Zero rejection>.

6.3.4 Interface tab

To configure an interface for remote control, please use <Selected Interface>. Following interfaces
are available for remote controlling the instrument:
• LAN
The first decision to make here (by using <DHCP>) is whether the instrument acquires its IP IPDHCP
address and other information from a DHCP server or if these settings must be manually set. [8.9.171→167]
To find a DHCP server can take up to 1 min. If DHCP is disabled, then one has to manually
specify the <IP Address> and the <Netmask> which is in most cases [Link] in a IPADDR
class C network. [8.9.169→167]
Only if one needs access to a wider network or the internet via a gateway would one need to IPMASK
specify the address of the <Gateway>. [8.9.176→168]
IPGATE
By using <Advanced> additional LAN settings like MAC address or DNS server can be [8.9.174→168]
accessed and edited.
• RS232
Beside the <Baud> rate, there are two additional parameters to be configured: The hardware COMBD [8.9.166→166]
<Flow Control (RTS/CTS))> can be used to temporarily interrupt the data transfer if, for COMHFC
example, the PC cannot receive the data in real time. This is recommended in order to prevent [8.9.168→166]
the loss of data.
For testing purposes, one can test commands by using a terminal program or by testing both data COMECHO
[8.9.167→166]

[Link] 87/206
 User Manual Instrument Family LMG600

directions through activating/deactivating character echoing ( <Echo>). For remote controlling

this parameter is usually deactivated.
Common to all interfaces is the possibility to set the connection back to the local operating mode by
GTL [8.9.88→139] using <Goto Local>. By default, an active connection sets the GUI to “Remote” so that it is not
possible to disturb an external program by changing something in the GUI. If this external program
abruptly crashes, it is useful to have the ability for the GUI to regain control over the instrument.

6.3.5 Options/Key tab

This menu shows the installed options. The options consist of both hardware-based and software-
based options. It is possible to enable and/or disable the software-based options by entering a key
provided by ZES ZIMMER .

File method
<Export key> gives one the ability to store the actual key as a file (e.g. on an external USB memory
stick). The file can be sent as an email attachment to ZES ZIMMER . ZES ZIMMER will then provide
a new key with the enabled/disabled options. This new key can be entered into the instrument by
using <Import key>. The new options will be active once the instrument reboots.

Manual method
It is also possible to send the displayed key to ZES ZIMMER by email, fax, etc.
Also, in this case, ZES ZIMMER will then provide a new key which has to be entered using <Key>.
The disadvantage of the manual method is that a mistake could easily be made when manually
reading/writing a key. Therefore, the file method is the recommended way to enter the options’
key.

6.3.6 Touchscreen tab

This tab displays when the touchscreen was last adjusted. To adjust the touchscreen, press <Adjust
Now>.

6.3.7 GROUP menu

[GROUP] allows one to navigate to this menu. Alternatively, one can also press the channel number
or frequency in the status bar to edit the group settings directly. Each group has its own tab.
There are two tables displayed: one for the signal settings and one for the synchronization settings.
The displayed soft keys correspond to the table which is selected by <Selected Table>.

Signal settings
The settings in this table are valid for all channels in this group. They influence only the measured
values and not the synchronization.
WIRE [8.9.130→153] <Wiring> is used to provide the instrument with information on how the EUT (equipment under
test) is connected. This is important because a star-delta conversion has to know this in order to
use the correct algorithm. For further details concerning possible wirings, please see Connection
[5.2→56]. If no conversion is required, one should choose direct wiring. The list of possible wiring
GROUP [8.9.120→150] depends on the setting. For example an aron wiring can only be set up if the group has exactly 2
channels.
SCPL [8.9.92→140] <Signal Coupling> defines if the signal should be measured with or without the DC component.
Note: This feature can not be used to measure in a lower range. If for example one has
a 10 A DC signal with an 0.1 A AC signal superimposed, one can select ’AC’ coupling to
reject the DC component in the display. However, one can not switch to a 0.1 A range,
because the TRMS current of about 10 A is still flowing and would overload the 0.1 A range.
The intention of this feature is to reject DC noise if there is no DC component in the signal
(e.g. when measuring with current transformers).

88/206 [Link]
 6 Graphical user interface (GUI)

Figure 6.13: Menu to configure a specific group.

<Harmonics> allows one to select between two harmonic settings: HAAL [8.9.121→151]

• Auto
Here the instrument ensures that no aliasing occurs. To fulfill the sampling theorem, either
another filter is selected or the number of harmonics is reduced.

• Custom
Here, it is possible to measure up to half of the sampling rate, but with the risk of aliasing.
It is the user’s responsibility to guarantee that the environment is free from unwanted signal
components which could be present in the analyzed range.

For further details please see Anti-aliasing [5.6.2→64].

<Processing> allows one select the appropriate processing mode. For details, please see Bandwidth PROC [8.9.117→149]
[5.6→62] and the description of the interface command.

There is a small difference between single-processing and dual-processing mode. In single-processing

mode, one can just configure the desired filter (i.e. the bandwidth). The instrument decides then
automatically how to get the desired data. In dual-processing mode, one has to configure the
bandwidth for narrow and wide bandwidth independently.
In both cases, an overview on how the filters are configured is displayed in this menu. By pressing
<Filter>, one can enter a sub-menu where additional filter settings can be configured.

Signal filter setting single processing

<Auto Filter> allows one decide if the filter are set manually by the user or automatically by the FAUTO [8.9.105→145]
instrument. In the second case, the filter settings are optimized for the harmonic analysis, see Filter
[5.6.1→64]. The other settings are still displayed while in the automatic mode so the user can see
what is being automatically configured by the instrument.

<LP State> allows one to choose between full bandwidth (when switched off), a fixed bandwidth or LPFILT
a user-defined bandwidth. In the last case, one can select a filter type with <LP Type> and cutoff [8.9.109→146]
frequency with <LP Freq>. LPTYP [8.9.110→147]
LPCOF [8.9.108→146]
Similar settings are valid for the high-pass filter: It is activated with <HP State>, and the cutoff HPFILT
frequency with <HP Freq>. The high-pass filter can only be activated, when the low-pass state is [8.9.107→146]
set to “Custom” or “15 kHz”. HPCOF [8.9.106→145]

Finally, one can leave this sub-menu using [BACK].

[Link] 89/206
 User Manual Instrument Family LMG600

Signal filter setting dual processing

<Filter> changes between the narrowband and wideband filter table.

FAUTO [8.9.105→145] <Auto Filter> allows one decide if the filter is set manually by the user or automatically by
WFAUTO the instrument. In the last case, the filter settings are optimized for the harmonic analysis, see
[8.9.118→150] Calculation of harmonics, option L6-OPT-HRM [5.8→66]. While in automatic mode, the
other settings are still displayed so the user can see what is being automatically configured by the
instrument.

LPFILT <LP State> allows one to choose between full bandwidth (when switched off), a fixed bandwidth or
[8.9.109→146] a user-defined bandwidth. In the last case, one can select a filter type with <LP Type> and cutoff
WLPFILT frequency with <LP Freq>.
[8.9.119→150]
LPTYP [8.9.110→147]
Similar settings are valid for the high-pass filter. It is activated with <HP State> and the cutoff
LPCOF [8.9.108→146]
frequency is configured with <HP Freq>.
HPFILT
[8.9.107→146] Finally, one can leave this sub-menu using [BACK].
HPCOF [8.9.106→145]

Sync settings

The settings located in this table are valid for all channels in this group and influence only the
synchronization. These settings do not influence the measured signal directly. The measured values
could only be affected indirectly by changing a different measurement time.

At the top of the synchronization table, the currently measured frequency of this group is displayed.
This is helpful when optimizing the synchronization settings, because a correct frequency indicates
correct settings. For background information concerning synchronization, see Synchronization
[5.9→70].

SYNC [8.9.191→173] <Source> allows one to configure the synchronization source. One can choose any voltage or current
channel from the current group, line (the frequency of the instrument’s power supply), extern or also
any other group. When the synchronization source is set to a channel of the current group, there are
additional configuration settings:

SYNCBW <Bandwidth> defines the exact path of the synchronization of the selected channel, see
[8.9.184→170] Synchronization [5.9→70]. When the setting is set to “Narrow” or “Wide”, the following settings
are also possible:
TLEV [8.9.188→172] <Level> allows one to set the trigger level, <Hysteresis> is for a range around this.
THYS [8.9.187→172] With bandwidth set to “Narrow” one can additionally configure the <Low-pass> filter, the <High-
TLPCOF pass> filter and the <Demodulation> for the signal.
[8.9.189→172]
THPCOF
[8.9.186→171]
TDEM [8.9.185→171] 6.3.8 CHANNEL menu

Use [CHANNEL] to enter this menu (see Figure 6.14 [→91]) where one can configure parameters
related to correct range selection. Alternatively, one can press one of the channel indicators in the
status bar to navigate directly to a specific channel in this menu.

Navigation

With <Modify>, it is possible to select whether the modifications will effect only one channel or the
whole group (i.e. all channels of a group). This is very useful as one usually has similar signals on all
channels of a group. One can select the desired channel with <Channel>. To switch between the
voltage or current channel settings, one has to use <Select U/I>. In addition these two soft keys, it
is also possible to use the arrow keys to navigate between all input elements.

90/206 [Link]
 6 Graphical user interface (GUI)

Figure 6.14: Menu to configure range-related parameters for each channel.

Setup
The first thing to configure is the <Jack> which is used to connect the signal. The current channels UJACK [8.9.135→155]
and several voltage channels have different input jacks. They are used to connect sensors with small IJACK [8.9.96→142]
signals to the instrument. Depending on this jack, one can select a relevant range from the list of
available ranges <Range> . If a sensor is connected, each range entry in the list consists of two URNG [8.9.142→158]
values: The first value specifies the range which physically exists in the instrument. The optional IRNG [8.9.103→144]
second value (which is presented in parenthesis) is the range which is constructed by the sensor. This
second value is constructed from the information which are obtained from ZES ZIMMERsensors with
the Sensor ID connector (see Channel plug-in modules [4.3.2→48]) and from the scaling factor of
the channel. Scaling is usually used in conjunction with the external sensors.
Using <Auto Range>, one can switch between automatic range selection and manual range selection UAUTO [8.9.137→156]
. IAUTO [8.9.98→142]

With automatic range selection, there are some possible drawbacks due to how an automatic
range selection works:
When the sample values are larger than the maximum allowed peak value of a range, the
Automatic
sample values are clipped which causes measurement errors. This situation is detected and
range selection
a change into the next higher range is activated. Such a change requires some time as the
analog hardware has to settle as well as the digital filters. Due to the time required for
such changes, a gap with invalid values occurs. For switching down into a lower range,
the situation is even more complex: Let us assume that the signal’s amplitude decreases in
the middle of a measurement cycle. The instrument cannot know at this point if this is a
periodic behavior of the signal or a transient one. Therefore, the instrument cannot switch
down in the middle of the measurement cycle. Instead, the instrument must wait until the
end of the next measurement cycle to be sure if the signal was small enough to suffice a
range change. Of course, a gap of invalid values occurs again due to settling times.
This measurement gap (consisting of invalid values) are usually not displayed by the
instrument’s GUI and should also be discarded by user applications.
In particular, the following should be regarded when using automatic range selection:
• If one wants to measure a single peak value, do not use the automatic range selection
as there is such a strong chance that this peak will be clipped or will fall into a
range-change gap.
• If one requires that the measurement contains no gaps containing invalid values (for
example during harmonics, flicker, and energy measurements), one needs to use the

[Link] 91/206
 User Manual Instrument Family LMG600

manual range selection. This is the only way to avoid the situation of having gaps
containing invalid values in the measurement.

• When performing any uncertainty calculations, automatic-range selection requires one

to not only know the measurement but also the actual range which was used during
the measurement.

Sensor menu

Finally, it is possible to configure external sensors with <Sensor>. In this sub-menu, two parameters
can be configured.

The first column shows information about the connected sensor, if this sensor has a connection to the
Sensor ID jack at the back of the instrument.

USCA [8.9.143→158] The scaling factor <Scale U>/ <Scale I> for this sensor is useful if one, for example, has a current
ISCA [8.9.104→145] or voltage transformer with a fixed ratio between the primary and secondary signal (e.g. 100 A:1 A or
3000 V:1.5 V). In such a case, one can enter the appropriate ratio (e.g. 100 or 2000) and the instrument
displays all voltages, currents, power and derived values correctly. The currently measured voltage
and current are shown in the next column. This scaling factor could also be used to correct the
uncertainty of a connected sensor.

Note: It is possible to enter negative scaling factors. This is useful if, for any optimization
purposes, a channel was inversely connected. With a negative scale factor, each sample
value gets the opposite sign and the measurement is corrected.

UDLY [8.9.133→155] The (group) delay ( <Delay U> and <Delay I>) of this sensor is useful if the group delay is know
IDLY [8.9.94→141] or can be determined (i.e. through measurement). For this reason, the last column shows currently
measured active power and power factor as one of these values is often used to determine the group
delay time.

6.3.9 ACTIONS menu

Use [ACTIONS] navigates to this menu where one can execute and configure various actions.

A List list of available actions is provided. One can either use the <Action>, the up/down arrow
keys, or the wheel to navigate the list of actions. Actions can be performed immediately by pressing
<Execute Now> or pressing the wheel. By pressing <Map To Execute Key>, the action will be
mapped to [EXECUTE] and will be executed in any menu whenever [EXECUTE] is pressed. The
action which is currently mapped to the [EXECUTE] is displayed on top of the menu. The mapping
of the execute key can be removed using <Remove Mapping>. Whenever an action is mapped, the
[EXECUTE] the will be illuminated.

Some actions have additional setting parameters. For such actions, <Settings> opens sub-menu
where the settings of a specific action can be configured.

6.3.10 STORAGE menu

[STORAGE] allows one enter this menu. Here, one can log measured values to internal or external
memory, manage files and generate a status report.

92/206 [Link]
 6 Graphical user interface (GUI)

6.3.11 Log tab

In this tab, one can define which values should be logged to a mass storage device. <File> is used to
define the location and name of the file where the values should be stored: If there are multiple drives
available, they can be selected by using the up/down cursor keys. The wheel can be used to navigate
in the right-hand side file and folder list. The left cursor key changes back into the parent directory.
On the instrument, the internal memory and external USB memory sicks are presented as a separate
drives. <Copy>, <Paste>, <Rename>, <Remove> and <Add folder> are used to manipulate
files and directories.
With <Comment>, one can enter a comment concerning this measurement which is also stored
along with the logged data in the file. Finally <Configure Values> is used to define which values
should be recorded:

With <Type>, one can control the values which are displayed under “Symbol”. If “All” is selected, all
values are displayed under “Symbol”. This list can be very long. However, for example, by selecting
“Voltage”, the list of symbols becomes more manageable as it now contains only voltage-related
symbols.
<Symbol> defines the symbol of the value to be logged. This symbol is identical to what is displayed
in the measurement menus.
<Phase/Link> defines, from which phase or calculation the symbol should be used. For example,
the trms value of the voltage can be from the second phase in group 3 (i.e. 2 G4 ), from the linked
value between phases 1 and 2 of group 1 (i.e. 12 G1 ), the sum of group 2 (i.e. Σ G2 ), etc.
When the number before the “G” is a single digit, it defines the phase of the group. When the number
has two digits, it defines the linkage between phases inside the group. The Σ-symbol stands for the
sum values of a group.
The number after the “G” defines the number of the group.
When dual-processing mode is active, the <Bandwidth> is used to select the narrow or wide
bandwidth value.
A newly selected value can be added to the list of selected values using <Add>. To remove an item
from the list, use <Remove>.
After one has chosen values to log, <Create & Start> can be pressed to create the log file and
immediately start the recording. Alternatively, one can take the individual steps of creating the file
and starting the logging by pressing <Create> then <Start/Continue>. <Pause> will pause the
logging. <Once> logs the current valid values.
<Change Setup> allows one to change the current logging setup.
<Export> provides a way to export the actual logged file. This file has a special binary format which
is useful due to its smaller file size. However, the file needs to be exported into another format in oder
for the values to be read by other software programs.

Exporting from a recorded binary file instead of recording directly into the export format has
big advantages: By this it is possible to export many times just parts of a file or to export
to multiple formats. By this it is possible to test different formats and subsets without
loosing any data.

This menu provides a list of the available logged values and a list containing the values which should
be exported. The lists are selected by <Active List>. The values are added and removed from the
export list by using <Add> and <Remove>, respectively.
The data are exported as comma separated values (csv). The values from one point of time are printed
in one row. <Split on rows> allows to split the exported file based on the number of rows (which
can be configure by long pressing this key).
This is useful for spread sheet programs which can typically only handle up to 32767 rows.
<Range of rows> allows one to select which time interval of the whole file should be exported. A
step of 1 will export each row, 2 will export each second and so on.

[Link] 93/206
 User Manual Instrument Family LMG600

6.3.12 Files tab

This menu works like a file manager where one can browse, copy, paste, rename and remove files.
If there are multiple drives available, they can be selected by using the up/down cursor keys. The
wheel can be used to navigate in the right-hand side file and folder list. The left cursor key changes
back into the parent directory. On the instrument, the internal memory and external USB memory
sicks are presented as a separate drives. <Copy>, <Paste>, <Rename>, <Remove> and <Add
folder> are used to manipulate files and directories.

6.3.13 Status report tab

The status report is a PDF document where all settings and most measured values are stored. It is
ensured that the printed measured values were measured with the printed settings.
With <Edit>, users can add additional information such as contact person, address and an error
description. <Directory> allows one to choose the directory where the status report is written to.
To create a report, the instrument must be frozen. There are two ways to do this: If one sees suspicious
values, press [FREEZE] and change to this menu to then create a report. Alternatively, one can press
<Create report> and then one will be prompted to freeze the current values. Before creating a
report, the description field is shown for editing (or confirming).
A successfully created report can be viewed using <View>.

94/206 [Link]
 7 PC software

7 PC software

The instrument is delivered with PC software and user manuals as PDF. They are always delivered
together with the instrument’s firmware. To get them go to the [STORAGE] menu and there to
the Files tab [6.3.12→94]. Choose the ”Library” drive. In the ”documentation” folder you find the
manuals, in the ”tools” folder you find the PC software. Copy them to a USB stick and then on you
PC.
By this concept you always get the correct PC software version which matches to the instrument’s
firmware.
All software which is optional will run in a demo mode. This mode does usually not allow to transfer
data from an instrument but to test all functions with example files.

[Link] 95/206
 8 Remote control

8 Remote control

8.1 General

The instrument is built around a measurement and calculation core which provides several
communication interfaces. The built-in Graphical user interface (GUI) [6→75] is connected
to one of these interfaces. The other interfaces (e.g. LAN, RS232) are available for user applications.
Via these interfaces, the core can be configured and all the measurements can be requested. Core

Due to this system design, the GUI is in principle only a special application software which runs inside
the instrument and communicates with the core. Each of the commands the GUI uses to communicate
with the core can also be similarly used by customers to program their own application.

8.2 Interface Languages

The LMG600 series understands different languages with which the device can be remotely controlled.
Remote control works by connecting to the device using one of the given interfaces (LAN, RS232).

• SCPI (Standard Commands for Programmable Instruments) is a language defined by the IEEE
and a standard language for measurement devices.

• Short is a ZES ZIMMER specific language for LMG instruments, which uses the same syntax as
SCPI, but shorter mnemonic command names.

After a system startup, as well as after a reset of the interface, (Interfaces [8.8→108]) the device is
in the SCPI language. One can change the language - from any language - using the command *ZLANG [8.9.15→115]
 
1 *ZLANG␣ language
 

where language can be either scpi or short. For example

 
1 *ZLANG␣ s h o r t
 

switches to the short language.

The *ZLANG? queries the active language. The advantage of *ZLANG versus the official SCPI
command is that the query works for all languages. When using LANG, one has to know the current LANG [8.9.177→169]
language in order to query it.

8.2.1 Asterisk Commands (IEEE488.1)

The IEEE488.1 standard defines a series of commands that begin with an asterisk (*). These
commands are called star commands. The star commands are available in every language

The syntax of a star command is the same as that of a short command except that it starts with an
asterisk, which is considered to be a part of the command name. Besides the commands defined in
IEEE488.1, additional star commands have been introduced by ZES ZIMMER . These commands all
start with a *Z.

[Link] 97/206
 User Manual Instrument Family LMG600

8.2.2 Syntax overview with short commands

There are query and no-query commands. Query commands are used to query measurement values,
configuration settings or device states. No-query commands are used to change configuration settings
or to trigger actions.
Query commands have the general syntax <command␣name><optional␣suffix>?:
 
1 UTRMS?
2 UTRMS4?
 
The suffix is optional. If it is missing,a suffix of 1 (one) is assumed. The question mark is mandatory
and marks the command as a query. Please note that there are no spaces allowed before the suffix
and before the question mark.
Some commands expect an additional list parameter (see also List Syntax [8.3.1→102]):
 
1 BUAM?␣ ( 1 : 3 )
 
A non-query command does not have a question mark. The general syntax is
<command␣name><optional␣suffix>␣<parameter␣list>:
 
1 COMBD␣9600
 
The previous command sets the baud rate of the serial interface to 9600. Note that there is no space
allowed before the suffix. However, a space in front of the parameter(s) is mandatory.
Some commands do not have a parameter.
 
1 *CLS
 
While other commands have more than one parameter (which are separated by commas).
 
1 CONT␣ON, ” f o o ”
 
Commands are case insensitive: UTRMS, utrms and UtRmS both refer to the same command.
A line may contain several commands separated by a semicolon.
 
1 UTRMS?␣ ; ␣UTRMS2? ;UTRMS3?
 
Spaces before or after a semicolon (like before UTRMS2? in the previous example) are ignored.

8.2.3 SCPI-Command Names

SCPI uses the same syntax as short. However, the command names have a different structure. The
name is composed of several parts separated by a colon:
 
1 :FETCH:SCALAR:VOLTAGE:TRMS?
 
This command can be abbreviated:
 
1 :FETC:SCAL:VOLT:TRMS?
 
In the command reference (see UTRMS [8.9.86→139]) in this manual, the mandatory parts of the
name are written in capital letters while the optional parts are written in small letters (e.g.
:FETCh:SCALar:VOLTage:TRMS). For some commands, whole parts of the name can be skipped. Thus
the following commands
 
1 :FETCH:SCALAR:VOLT?
2 :FETCH:SCAL:TRMS?
3 :FETCH:VOLT:TRMS?
4 :FETCH:VOLT?
5 :FETCH?
 

98/206 [Link]
 8 Remote control

all refer to the same command. In the command reference, the optional name parts are written in
brackets: :FETCh[:SCALar][:VOLTage][:TRMS].
If there are more than one command in a line, the beginning (“path”) of a second command can be
left out, if it is identical to the previous command (in the same line!):
 
1 :FETCH:VOLT:TRMS? ;RECT? ;PPEAK?
 

is identical to
 
1 :FETCH:VOLT:TRMS? ; :FETCH:VOLT:RECT? ; :FETCH:VOLT:PPEAK?
 

A leading colon before a command indicates that the command includes the complete path. Therefore,
no leading colon allowed before RECT? and PPEAK?.
However, the following command
 
1 :FETCH:VOLT:TRMS? ; ␣ :FETCH:CURRENT:TRMS?
 

cannot be abbreviated by
 
1 :FETCH:VOLT:TRMS? ; ␣CURRENT:TRMS?
 

The latter one would be interpreted as :FETCH:VOLT:CURRENT:TRMS?, which does not exist.
The leading colon of the first command of a line is optional as the complete path must always be
specified there.
SCPI commands might have optional suffixes as well. These follow immediately the command name.
 
1 :FETCH:VOLT:TRMS4?
 

8.2.4 Suffixes

For some commands, a suffix is expected. If the suffix is omitted, a suffix of 1 (one) is assumed. The
meaning of the suffix depends on the command. It can be either the channel number (physical or
logical), the group number, the scope number, the PSI channel or the number of the error queue.
Physical channel numbers (1,2…7) indicate the channels in the order they are inserted into the
instrument.
Logical channel numbers (used only for measurement values not for settings) are composed of 4 digits.
They are explained in detail below.
Group suffixes are enumerated by 1,2,…7.
For measurement and configuration commands concerning scopes, the suffix describes the scope
number, see SPVAL [8.9.70→134]. Possible scope suffixes are
1 First scope with 8 traces and 2048 samples per trace.
2 The second scope with 8 traces and 2048 samples per trace.
9 The trigger view scope with only one trace.
10 The transient scope. The transient recorder is accessed like any other scope, even if it is “shot”
only once, and does not run periodically.
The scopes 21, 22 and 29 are reserved for the GUI, and should not be used directly.
The commands ERR [8.9.163→165], ERRALL [8.9.161→164] and ERRCNT [8.9.162→165] have a suffix indicating the
error queue. The numbers have the following meaning:
1 is the default error queue (it contains a copy of errors from other queues. By default from queue
2 and 4).
2 contains the errors occurred in the own interface.

[Link] 99/206
 User Manual Instrument Family LMG600

3 contains the errors occurred in other interfaces.

4 contains device errors (e.g. hardware faults).
5 contains errors produced by apps.
6 contains errors produced by formula editor scripts.
Logical Suffixes
As described in Basic concepts [5→55] in this manual, you have several possibilities to calculate
values in parallel such as narrow and wide bandwidth values or also star and delta values. Additionally,
there are several channels organized in different groups which also have sum values.
The SCPI standard was not written for instruments containing such complexity. It introduced the
suffix concept which briefly states that the number of the desired channel can be directly appended
to the command. FOO2 would apply command FOO to the second channel. For additional details,
please see the exact syntax description in Syntax overview with short commands [8.2.2→98].
This basic suffix concept was extended by ZES ZIMMER to get access to all the various calculated
values. In addition to the simple numbers for each measurement channel (which is a physical channel),
we have introduced a 4-digit suffix which specifies exactly which value you want to access.

GCBT

G The first digit represents the number of the group, starting with ’1’.
C The second digit stands for the phase or channel inside the group.
B The third digit represents the bandwidth:
’1’ for narrow bandwidth
’2’ for wide bandwidth.
T The fourth digit stands for the transformation of values:
’0’ No transformation, only allowed with sum values, not with directly measured values
’1’ No transformation, only allowed with directly measured values, not with sum values
’2’ The values in star circuit (if available)
’3’ The values in delta circuit (if available)
In addition to the above, the following conventions have been used:
• Channel 0 stands for the sum values of a group.
• For suffixes specified with just 1-digit, you get always the wide bandwidth values of the channel.
• If a requested values is not available, a NaN (Not a Number) instead of a value is provided.
• For values which do not have a narrow/wide bandwidth difference (like harmonics), you can use
both values and you will get the same results in both cases.
Suffixes of groups with 3 channels
Let us assume, we configured the instrument to have the measuring channels 4, 5 and 6 inside the
second group. Then, the following suffixes are valid (for this group):
• 4, 5, 6
The wide bandwidth values of the measuring channels 4, 5 and 6
• 2010
The narrow bandwidth sum values of group 2
• 2111 , 2211, 2311
The untransformed narrow bandwidth values of the phases 1, 2 and 3 of group 2 (which are the
narrow bandwidth values of measuring channel 4, 5 and 6)
• 2112, 2212, 2312
The star transformation narrow bandwidth values of the phases 1, 2 and 3 of group 2
• 2113, 2213, 2313
The delta transformation narrow bandwidth values of the phases 1, 2 and 3 of group 2

100/206 [Link]
 8 Remote control

• 2020
The wide bandwidth sum values of group 2
• 2121, 2221, 2321
The untransformed wide bandwidth values of the phases 1, 2 and 3 of group 2 (which are the
wide bandwidth values of measuring channel 4, 5 and 6)
• 2122, 2222, 2322
The star transformation wide bandwidth values of the phases 1, 2 and 3 of group 2
• 2123, 2223, 2323
The delta transformation wide bandwidth values of the phases 1, 2 and 3 of group 2

This is the general scheme for any 3-phase system. Thus, it is a very simple and most importantly a
logical way to describe the desired measurement values. By using phase numbers instead of channel
numbers, one can easily address the channels within the group.

Suffixes of groups with 2 channels

Groups with 2 channels in an Aron circuit have similar suffixes: Let us assume that we configured the
instrument to have the measuring channels 4 and 5 inside the third group. Then following suffixes are
valid (for this group):

• 4, 5
The wide bandwidth values of the measuring channels 4 and 5
• 3010
The narrow bandwidth sum values of group 3
• 3111 , 3211, 3311
The untransformed narrow bandwidth values of the phases 1, 2 and 3 of group 3 (which are the
narrow bandwidth values of measuring channel 4 and 5 as well as the calculated 3rd channel)
• 3112, 3212, 3312
The star transformation narrow bandwidth values of the phases 1, 2 and 3 of group 3
• 3113, 3213, 3313
The delta transformation narrow bandwidth values of the phases 1, 2 and 3 of group 3
• 3020
The wide bandwidth sum values of group 3
• 3121, 3221, 3321
The untransformed wide bandwidth values of the phases 1, 2 and 3 of group 3 (which are the
wide bandwidth values of measuring channel 4 and 5 as well as the calculated 3rd channel)
• 3122, 3222, 3322
The star transformation wide bandwidth values of the phases 1, 2 and 3 of group 3
• 3123, 3223, 3323
The delta transformation wide bandwidth values of the phases 1, 2 and 3 of group 3

Suffixes of groups with 1, 4, 5, 6 or 7 channels

A star-to-delta transformation does not exist for groups containing 1, 4, 5, 6 or 7 channels. For such
groups, there are just a few valid suffixes. For example, the following suffixes are valid for group 1
(where x represents the channel number(s) and y the phase number(s)).

• x
The wide bandwidth values of the measuring channel x
• 1010
The narrow bandwidth sum values of group 1
• 1y11
The untransformed narrow bandwidth values of the phase y (which are the narrow bandwidth
values of a measuring channel x)

[Link] 101/206
 User Manual Instrument Family LMG600

• 1020
The wide bandwidth sum values of group 1
• 1y21
The untransformed wide bandwidth values of the phases y

8.3 Input format

The commands can have parameters of different type. The format of these parameters is described
below.
The default input format is ASCII. To be precise, the input is in UTF-8 encoded, also if the usage of
non-ASCII characters is rare.
• Boolean (<Boolean>) are expected as decimal numbers 0 resp. 1.
• Integers (<NRi>) are expected as decimal numbers. Negative numbers are prefixed by a minus
sign.
• Float values (<NRf>) are expexted as usual float numbers, e.g. (-)[Link] or in scientific style:
(-)[Link]±yy (e.g. 3.14159E+00).
• Strings (<string␣program␣data>) are quoted with double quotes (e.g. ”Hello␣World”). Double quotes
inside a string are quoted by an extra double quote (e.g. ”My␣name␣is␣””Frank”””).
• Dates (<Date>) are expected in the Form
<year>:<month>:<day>D<hour>:<minute>:<second>.<fraction>, e.g.
[Link].123456789.

• Times (<Time>) are written as float values (<NRf>) in seconds or as

[[<hour>:]<minute>:]<second>.<fraction>, where each statement in [] is optional. Example:
1:20.123456789 stands for 1 minute and 20.123456789 seconds.

8.3.1 List Syntax

Some commands return a list of values. For example, the command BUAM [8.9.47→126] without parameter
returns 401 values (the DC part and the first 400 harmonics) of the voltage amplitude. It is possible
to request only a part of these values using a list parameter (in the command description marked with
<list> ):
 
1 BUAM?␣ ( 3 )
 
returns the value of the third harmonics.
 
1 BUAM?␣ ( 3 , 5 , 7 )
 
returns the value of the third, fifth and seventh harmonics.
To specify ranges:
 
1 BUAM?␣ ( 1 : 4 )
 
returns the first to the fourth harmonics.
 
1 BUAM?␣ ( 0 , 1 : 4 0 0 : 2 )
 
returns the DC value and all odd (1,3,…399) harmonics. The :2 following the range indicates the
step.
Some configuration settings are lists, too. ([Link] [8.9.129→153]). One can query them in the same
manner that ones queries the measurement values. Setting these values requires a list parameter.
 
1 SCTRAC2␣ ( 0 ) , ” u1111”
 

102/206 [Link]
 8 Remote control

sets the trace zero of the second scope to “u1111” (the direct measured narrow band voltage of the
first channel of the first group). One can set several values with one command. E.g:
 
1 SCTRAC2␣ ( 0 : 2 ) ,” u1111 ” , ” i1111 ” , ” p1111”
 

sets all scope traces to the empty string and thus deactivates all traces.

8.4 Output Format

The instrument only provides output when requested. The format of these answers is described
below.

8.4.1 ASCII

The default output format is ASCII. To be precise, the output is in UTF-8 encoded. The output of
non-ASCII characters is rare.

• Boolean (<Boolean>) are printed as decimal numbers 0 resp. 1.

• Integers (<NRi>) are printed as decimal numbers. Negative numbers are prefixed by a minus
sign.

• Float values (<NRf>) are written in scientific style with a precision of 6 digits: (-)[Link]±yy
(e.g. 3.14159E+00).

• Infinity is printed as 9.9E+37 and negative infinity as −9.9E+37.

• NaNs are represented as 9.91E+37.

• Strings (<string␣program␣data>) are quoted with double quotes (e.g. ”Hello␣World”). Double quotes
inside a string are quoted by an extra double quote (e.g. ”My␣name␣is␣””Frank”””).

• Dates (<Date>) are printed in the Form

<year>:<month>:<day>D<hour>:<minute>:<second>.<fraction>,
e.g. [Link].123456789. The fraction part has a resolution of nanoseconds.

• Times (<Time>) are written as <second>.<fraction>, e.g. 120.123456789.

If several values are printed as a result of one query (e.g. the output of lists) the values are separated
by commas.
 
1 BUAM?␣ ( 1 : 3 )
 

results in something like that:

 
1 1.21732E+01 ,1.12873E−01 ,8.85671E+00
 

If the output is a result of several queries separated by a semicolon, the output is separated by
semicolons as well:
 
1 UTRMS? ; ␣ITRMS?␣␣␣=>␣␣ 2.30139E+02;1.09134E+01
 

A line is terminated by a line feed character (\n, ASCII 0x0a).

[Link] 103/206
 User Manual Instrument Family LMG600

8.4.2 Binary Output

The LMG600 series supports a little endian binary output format.

The 32 bit refers only to float values. Integer values are encoded always as 64-bit signed integers (this
is also applies to dates, times and duration information).

• Integer values are encoded as 64-bit signed integer.

• Float values are encoded according to IEEE-754 with single precision (32 bit). NaN and infinity
are real NaN and infinity values according to the IEEE standard.
Most measurement values are floats. By using 32-bit instead of 64-bit precision,
significant bandwidth and/or memory capacity is saved. 32-bit precision is completely
sufficient to represent all measurement values.
• Dates are encoded as 64-bit signed integers, representing the nanoseconds since 1970 (January,
1st 1970 0:0 GMT). Dividing these values by 109 results in the usual unix time.
• Times are encoded as 64-bit signed integers, representing nanoseconds.
• Strings are prefixed with the string length in byte (64-bit signed integer). The string itself is
UTF-8 encoded, not quoted and 0-terminated.

The output of lists (e.g. BUAM?␣1:200) is prefixed with the list length (i.e. the number of values in the
list). The list prefix is a 64 Bit signed integer that is followed by the values in the format as described
above. List of tuples have an extra 64 bit signed integer indicating the number of elements within the
tuple (e.g.: ERRALL [8.9.161→164]).
Finally the binary output is prefixed with a ASCII-Header. This always starts with a number sign
(#) followed by one digit (ASCII encoded) which is the length of the following header bytes, which
then represents the number (ASCII encoded) of binary data following the header. For example \#3124
means, that 124 bytes of binary data will follow. \#6000124 has the same meaning, the header is
followed by 124 bytes of binary data.
The output of one line might be split in several chunks. Each chunk has its own ASCII header. The
line then is terminated by a single line feed character (\n, ASCII 0x0a) without the ASCII header.
Thus it is necessary to read all chunks up to the line feed character, strip the ASCII headers and
concatenate the chunks. That results in the complete answer.

Examples
The following examplary listings describe the binary format.
 
1 UTRMS?␣=>
2 23␣36␣30␣30␣30␣30␣30␣34␣␣33␣8a␣aa␣43␣0a
 

• 23 36 30 30 30 30 30 34 is the ASCII header: “#6000004”, which translates into:

– 0x23 → ASCII pound sign. Introduces the binary header.
– 0x36 → ASCII character 6 (six). Therefore, the next six characters tell the length of the
binary output.
– 0x30 30 30 30 30 34 → ASCII string 000004. This means, four bytes binary data belong to
this header.
• 0x33 8a aa 43 → float value of UTRMS: 341.08
• 0a → Line feed.

For the sake of readability, the description of the ASCII header is omitted in the following examples.
 
1 UTRMS? ;ITRMS?␣=>
2 23␣36␣30␣30␣30␣30␣30␣38␣␣33␣8a␣aa␣43␣90␣8 f ␣19␣3 f
3 0a
 

• 23 36 30 30 30 30 30 38 → ASCII header: “#6000008”. 8 bytes of binary data incoming.

104/206 [Link]
 8 Remote control

• 33 8a aa 43 → float value of UTRMS: 341.08

• 90 8f 19 3f → float value of ITRMS: 0.599847
• 0a → Line feed.
 
1 BUAM?␣ ( 0 : 4 ) ␣=>
2 23␣36␣30␣30␣30␣30␣32␣38␣␣05␣00␣00␣00␣00␣00␣00␣00
3 33␣a4␣36␣3e␣3c␣33␣50␣43␣␣e1␣d7␣1c␣3e␣b6␣d0␣2e␣40
4 5d␣a2␣2d␣3d␣0a
 

• 23 36 30 30 30 30 32 38 → ASCII header: “#6000028”. 28 bytes of binary data incoming.

• 05 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 → List header: This list contains 5 elements.
• 33 a4 36 3e → Result of BUAM? (0): 0.178361
• 3c 33 50 43 → Result of BUAM? (1): 208.2
• e1 d7 1c 3e → Result of BUAM? (2): 0.153167
• b6 d0 2e 40 → Result of BUAM? (3): 2.73149
• 5d a2 2d 3d → Result of BUAM? (4): 0.0423912
• 0a: Line feed
 
1 e r r a l l ?␣=>
2 23␣36␣30␣30␣30␣30␣34␣31␣␣01␣00␣00␣00␣00␣00␣00␣00
3 02␣00␣00␣00␣00␣00␣00␣00␣␣00␣00␣00␣00␣00␣00␣00␣00
4 09␣00␣00␣00␣00␣00␣00␣00␣␣4e␣6 f ␣20␣65␣72␣72␣6 f ␣72
5 00␣0a
 

• 23 36 30 30 30 30 34 31 → ASCII header: #6000041. 41 bytes of binary data incoming.

• 01 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 → List header: This list contains one element.
• 02 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 → Tuple header: This tuple contains two elements.
• 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 → <NrI>-portion from the error message. Error code: 0.
• 09 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 → <String>-portion from the error message contains 9 bytes.
• 4e 6f 20 65 72 72 6f 72 00 → <String>:“No error” (incl. 0x00 byte at the end).
• 0a: Line feed

8.5 Timing Behavior

8.5.1 Parallel vs. sequential configuration

If several values are queried, the output occurs always in the same order as they are requested:
 
1 UTMRS? ;ITRMS?
 

first returns UTRMS and then ITRMS.

The behavior is different when values are set. They are set in parallel and thus in arbitrary order:
 
1 USCA␣ 1 ;ISCA␣ 2 ;USCA␣2
 

This sets ISCA to 2. USCA is set to 1 and to 2 in the same command line. However the order of
configuration is not defined, and thus the result is undefined, too. USCA might have the value of 1
or 2.
The order can be influenced by inserting the command *OPC [8.9.7→112]: This can only be executed, if
all commands preceding it have been executed completely.

[Link] 105/206
 User Manual Instrument Family LMG600

 
1 USCA␣ 1 ;ISCA␣ 2 ; *OPC;USCA␣2
 

This guarantees that USCA is set to 2 after the first two commands are finished.

At the end of each line an implicit *OPC is executed. The above result can thus also be achieved by
sending the following two lines:
 
1 USCA␣ 1 ;ISCA␣2
2 USCA␣2
 

If the same value is set and queried in the same line, the query always returns the old value. This,
too can be serialized using *OPC.
 
1 USCA␣ 1 ; *OPC;USCA␣ 2 ;USCA?
 

Also if this line sets USCA to 2, it returns a 1! To read the value of 2 correctly, the query has to be
done in a second line.

The advantage of parallel configuration is the speed. For example setting ranges can take
some time. If ranges for several channels are set sequentially, the time is summed up. If
they are sent in a single line, the configuration is in parallel and therefore much faster.

*OPC?
*OPC [8.9.7→112] (operation complete) waits for all commands to be finished before continuing with other
commands. *OPC? does the same but, after all commands have been finished a 1 (a single ASCII
character 0x31) is printed. This way one gets a feedback, when the execution has been finished.

ESR Register
A *OPC after being finished sets the bit 0 in the ESR register (*ESR [8.9.4→111]). A *OPC? as well as the
implicit OPC at the end of a line does not set this bit.

*ACK?
*ACK [8.9.1→111] *ACK? prints (similarly to *OPC?) a 1 but it does not wait.

*WAI
*WAI [8.9.14→114] After a *OPC it is guaranteed, that all settings have been made, and that the instrument measures
according to the new settings. However, for the duration of up to two measurement cycles, it is possible
that one still might read values measured with the old settings. A *OPC;INIM does not necessarily give
the desired result. *WAI however does wait until measurement values can be read that are recorded
with the new settings:
 
1 URNG␣ 250;*WAI; INIM ;UTRMS?
 

This guarantees that the returned UTRMS value was measured in the 250 V range.

*WAI?
*WAI [8.9.14→114] Depending on the configured measurement cycle, *WAI might take a long time (up to several minutes).
Users need to take that in consideration when choosing timeouts in the own program. As an
alternative, one can use *WAI?. This prints a 0 (ASCII 0x30) every second until the *WAI is finished,
then a 1 (ASCII 0x31) is printed. This resolves any possible problems associated with the long timeout.
However, the program must read all zeros until a 1 is received.

106/206 [Link]
 8 Remote control

8.6 INIM, :READ and :FETCh

waits for the actual measurement cycle to finish before updating the local buffer from
INIM [8.9.91→140]
which the measurement values are read.
 
1 INIM ;UTRMS? ; INIM ;ITRMS?
 

reads UTRMS and ITRMS values from two different but consecutive cycles. Note that these values
were not measured over the same interval! This is identical to
 
1 INIM ;UTRMS?
2 INIM ;ITRMS?
 
 
1 INIM ;UTRMS? ;ITRMS?
 

reads UTRMS and ITRMS values from the same cycle. Those values were measured exactly over the
same interval! This is identical to
 
1 INIM ;UTRMS?
2 ITRMS?
 

In SCPI there are two possible ways to get values: Either via the :READ or the :FETCh path of the tree.
The short commands are equal to the :FETCh commands (which means there is no INIM performed!).
The :READ path always has an implicit INIM included. So if you want to perform the last example
with SCPI commands you have to enter:
 
1 :READ:VOLTAGE:TRMS?
2 :FETC:CURRENT:TRMS?
 

The example
 
1 :READ:VOLTAGE:TRMS? ; :READ:CURRENT:TRMS?
 

is equal to
 
1 INIM ;UTRMS? ; INIM ;ITRMS?
 

The INIM command takes an optional parameter which is used to specify specify on which event the
INIM shall wait for before updating the buffer. Possible events to wait for are:

”now” Does not wait, but updates the buffer immediately with the most recent available values.

”mc” Waits for the next measurement cycle. That is the default behavior, if no parameter is given.

”harm.x” Waits for the harmonic calculation of group x (1 to 7) to finish.

”scope.x” Waits that scope x is triggered and thus can be accessed.

”energy.x” Waits for the energy measurement of group x (1 to 7) to finish.

”wai” Waits until the measurement values correspond to the last configuration change. Thus
INIM␣”WAI” is identical to *WAI;INIM␣”NOW”.

[Link] 107/206
 User Manual Instrument Family LMG600

8.7 Cont On

The instrument allows values to be outputted continuously. Therefore one must give the action
ACTN [8.9.180→169] command to specify what shall be the output. For example
 
1 ACTN;UTRMS? ;ITRMS? ;UTRMS2? ;ITRMS2?
 
defines to output Utrms and Itrms of channel 1 and 2 after each measurement cycle. The next step is
to activate the Cont On. This is done using the command
 
1 CONT␣ON
 
The continuous output can be switched off using the command CONT␣OFF.

It is possible to define more than one Cont-On at a time. Therefore the ACTN command takes an
optional parameter, the name of the Cont On.
 
1 ACTN␣”chan1 ” ;UTRMS? ;ITRMS?
2 ACTN␣”chan2 ” ;UTRMS2? ;UTRMS2?
 
The command
 
1 CONT␣ON, ” chan1”
 
then switches on the desired Cont On. If the name is omitted, the implicit name “cont” is used.
The CONT␣OFF command switches off all running Cont Ons independent of their names. Due to
buffer effects there can be several regular answers after this command. After the last buffer a ”1” is
returned to indicate this last buffer.
The Cont On command has a third, optional parameter. This specifies on which event the Cont On
shall trigger. For example
 
1 CONT␣ON, ” cont ” , ”harm . 1 ”
 
triggers every time the harmonics of group 1 are finished. Apart of “now” and “wai” any event
can be used that is accepted by the INIM [8.9.91→140] command. See INIM, :READ and :FETCh
[8.6→107].

8.7.1 Timing Behavior

One should note that depending on the configuration settings and the signal frequency, the harmonics
are calculated faster or slower than the measurement cycle, and thus the normal measurement values.
Therefore, configuring a Cont On to trigger whenever the harmonic analysis is completed can result
in normal measurement values being skipped or doubled (depending on which is faster). The same
also applies when one triggers on measurement cycle (mc) event, a scope events, etc.
One should always trigger on the event which corresponds to the measurement values which are most
important for the desired measurement; see Parallel calculations [5.7→65].

8.8 Interfaces

The LMG has several interfaces to access the device.

Although it is possible to use several interfaces at the same time, users are strongly
recommended to use just one interface at a time in order to prevent collisions between
the interfaces.
Every time the instrument starts, each interface has the following initial properties:
• The language is always set to SCPI.

108/206 [Link]
 8 Remote control

• The output format is always ASCII.

• The continuous output is always deactivated.

• All in and out buffers are empty and there are no commands for processing.

These properties can be changed during use of the instrument. Therefore, it is recommended that
interface be reseted to these default properties. How to reset a specific interface is provided in the
interface descriptions below.

8.8.1 LAN Access

This section describes the LAN interface (a gigabit Ethernet interface).

Activating the LAN

In order to use this interface, the device requires an IP address (IPv4). This can be obtained by
DHCP, which is the default behavior of the LMG. If there is no DHCP server (e.g. using a point-
to-point connection to the PC), the LMG will use an IP address of the address block [Link]/16
(zeroconf). Otherwise the IP address, the netmask and (if a connection to the internet or beyond the
edge of routers is desired) the gateway address can be manually configured. This can be done using
the keypad of the device or using another interface, see Interface tab [6.3.4→87]. To find a DHCP
server can take up to 1 min. zeroconf is just performed if no DHCP server could be found.

The LMG behaves purely passive being connected to the net. That is, it does not connect
to any other server or automatically receives updates over the internet without being asked
to do.

Once the LAN interface has been configured, one can connect to the device using the TCP port 5025.
Only one connection at a time is allowed. If one tries to establish a second connection, the LMG
accepts and immediately closes the connection.
If a connection is terminated and reopened, the interface is in the state as it was before. Cont Ons
are still running (unless they were stopped due to buffer overruns). The connection retains the old
previous state of properties (e.g. interface language, output formats etc.) as though the connection
was never interrupted. Here the behavior of a RS232 interface is emulated, where it is not possible to
terminate a connection.

Resetting the Interface

To bring the interface into a defined start state, one must reset it. Using RS232, one would send a
Break. A similar technique is also available for the LAN interface. A connection to the TCP port 5026
needs to be established and the command dcl (terminated by a newline character \n, 0x0a) should be
sent to that port. This causes the LAN port (i.e. 5025) of the LMG to be reseted.

This reset just applies to the LAN interface. Other interfaces and the instrument itself are
not affected.

The dcl command does not return a value. Alternatively there is the command break. This command
is similar to dcl but it returns a 0␣ok on successful execution of the reset. In the rare case that an error
occurs, an error code is returned (e.g. −8␣System␣Error). When the return value has been received, the
interface has been reseted successfully. Now, one can continue working.

8.8.2 RS232 Access

This section describes the RS232 interface.

[Link] 109/206
 User Manual Instrument Family LMG600

Activating the RS232

To make use of this interface, a baud rate, a flow control and the echo must be configured in the
instrument. This can be done by using either another interface or using the keypad of the device, see
Interface tab [6.3.4→87].
Once the RS232 interface has been configured, one can connect to the device. If a connection is reused
without rebooting the device, the interface is in the state as it was before. Cont Ons are still running
(unless they were stopped due to buffer overruns). The interface properties such as language and
output formats remain in the old state

Resetting the Interface

To bring the interface into a defined state, one must reset it. For the RS232 interface, one has to send
a break to do that.
A break is not a string with these letters but a special signal timing which can usually
reached by an API function
The reset just applies to the RS232 interface. Other interfaces and the instrument itself
are not affected.

8.9 Remote commands

In the following sections, one can find a description of all available commands. The commands are
sorted according to the SCPI tree structure. The layout of the description follows a unique scheme:
• Most commands start with a brief description.
• The different kinds of formal command description follow:
– Short command
The short-form of the command. These short commands are only allowed if one has
LANG [8.9.177→169] switched to the short command language!
– SCPI command
As the SCPI commands are built in a hierarchical tree structure, the last part of the branch
is displayed here in order to provide a a concise representation.
– Full SCPI command
Here, the full SCPI branch is provided. For all measurement commands, it is possible to
use the FETCh or READ structure. Therefore, both branches are described. They are
separated by a logical OR sign (|).
• Display ID
The ID of the value which is displayed in the GUI.
• Unit
The physical unit of the value.
• Return value
The kind of value that is returned (if the command returns a value at all).
• Suffix
A suffix specifies which value is meant, if there is a choice of several available:
n/a No suffix must be specified
p Specified the number of the power measurement channel
l A channel number according to the GCBT system, see Logical Suffixes [8.2.4→100]
g Specifies a group number
• [*RST Default value]
If this command sets any value, this is the value which is set when the command *RST [8.9.9→113]
is given to reset the instrument.
A detailed description of the commands and parameters is given below

110/206 [Link]
 8 Remote control

8.9.1 *ACK

Acknowledge
Short command *ACK? /qonly/
SCPI command *ACK? /qonly/
SCPI path *ACK? /qonly/
Display ID n/a Unit n/a Return value <NRi>
Suffix n/a [*RST default value] n/a

Description
Returns a 1. Otherwise does nothing

8.9.2 *CLS

Clear status
Short command *CLS/nquery/
SCPI command *CLS/nquery/
SCPI path *CLS/nquery/
Display ID n/a Unit n/a Return value n/a
Suffix n/a [*RST default value] n/a

Description
Clears
• the event registers of all state data structures
• the error/event queue.

8.9.3 *ESE

Event status enable register

Short command *ESE <NRi>
SCPI command *ESE <NRi>
SCPI path *ESE <NRi>
Display ID n/a Unit n/a Return value <NRi>
Suffix n/a [*RST default value] n/a

Allowed values
0..255

Description
Used to set up or read out the Event Status Enable register.

8.9.4 *ESR

Event status register

Short command *ESR? /qonly/
SCPI command *ESR? /qonly/
SCPI path *ESR? /qonly/
Display ID n/a Unit n/a Return value <NRi>
Suffix n/a [*RST default value] n/a

[Link] 111/206
 User Manual Instrument Family LMG600

Allowed values
The bits in the bitfield, starting with bit 0, have following meaning:

0: Operation Complete
1: Request Control
2: Querry Error
3: Device Dependend Error
4: Execution Error
5: Command Error
6: User Request
7: Power On

Description
Reads out and clears the Event Status register.

8.9.5 *IDN

Human-readable instrument indentification

Short command *IDN? /qonly/
SCPI command *IDN? /qonly/
SCPI path *IDN? /qonly/
Display ID n/a Unit n/a Return value <string program
data>
Suffix n/a [*RST default value] n/a

Description
Identifies the instrument by a string of 4 comma-separated fields:
• Manufacturer
• Model
• Serial Number
• Software Version

8.9.6 *IST

Individual status query

Short command *IST? /qonly/
SCPI command *IST? /qonly/
SCPI path *IST? /qonly/
Display ID n/a Unit n/a Return value <Boolean>
Suffix n/a [*RST default value] n/a

Description
This returns the status of the ’ist’ local message in the device.

8.9.7 *OPC

Operation complete
Short command *OPC
SCPI command *OPC
SCPI path *OPC
Display ID n/a Unit n/a Return value <string program
data>
Suffix n/a [*RST default value] n/a

112/206 [Link]
 8 Remote control

Description
Waits for all operations to be completed and causes the device to set the operation complete bit in the
Standard Event Status Register, when all pending selected device operations have been finished.

8.9.8 *PRE

Parallel poll register enable

Short command *PRE <NRi>
SCPI command *PRE <NRi>
SCPI path *PRE <NRi>
Display ID n/a Unit n/a Return value <NRi>
Suffix n/a [*RST default value] n/a

Allowed values
0..65535

Description
Set or read the Parallel Poll Enable Register.

8.9.9 *RST

Reset
Short command *RST/nquery/
SCPI command *RST/nquery/
SCPI path *RST/nquery/
Display ID n/a Unit n/a Return value n/a
Suffix n/a [*RST default value] n/a

Description
This performs a device reset. The internal settings of the instrument itself (like ranges,
synchronization, ...) are reset to default values, but not the interface! These default values can be
found under [*RST default value] within the command description. All time dependant measurements
like energy are stopped. The interfaces and their parameters are not reset! If you want to reset them,
please use a BREAK for RS232 or a ’device clear’ for IEEE488 interface.

8.9.10 *SRE

Service request enable register

Short command *SRE <NRi>
SCPI command *SRE <NRi>
SCPI path *SRE <NRi>
Display ID n/a Unit n/a Return value <NRi>
Suffix n/a [*RST default value] n/a

Allowed values
0..255

Description
Sets or queries the Service Request Enable register.

[Link] 113/206
 User Manual Instrument Family LMG600

8.9.11 *STB

Status byte register

Short command *STB? /qonly/
SCPI command *STB? /qonly/
SCPI path *STB? /qonly/
Display ID n/a Unit n/a Return value <NRi>
Suffix n/a [*RST default value] n/a

Allowed values
0..255

Description
Sets or queries the Status Byte Register. This command is identical to :STATus:REGister
(STB [8.9.153→162])

8.9.12 *TRG

Trigger
Short command *TRG/nquery/
SCPI command *TRG/nquery/
SCPI path *TRG/nquery/
Display ID n/a Unit n/a Return value n/a
Suffix n/a [*RST default value] n/a

Description
Triggers the execute action defined by EXECACTN.

8.9.13 *TST

Self test
Short command *TST? /qonly/ <NRi>
SCPI command *TST? /qonly/ <NRi>
SCPI path *TST? /qonly/ <NRi>
Display ID n/a Unit n/a Return value <NRi>
Suffix n/a [*RST default value] n/a

Description
returns 1, otherwise does nothing

8.9.14 *WAI

Wait All Intructions

Short command *WAI
SCPI command *WAI
SCPI path *WAI
Display ID n/a Unit n/a Return value <string program
data>
Suffix n/a [*RST default value] n/a

Description
Waits for all pending operations to be completed and until an INIM causes to read measurement
values recorded with the new settings.

114/206 [Link]
 8 Remote control

8.9.15 *ZLANG

Interface language setting

Short command *ZLANG <string program data>
SCPI command *ZLANG <string program data>
SCPI path *ZLANG <string program data>
Display ID n/a Unit n/a Return value <string program
data>
Suffix n/a [*RST default value] n/a

Description
Changes the interface language. Available languages are SCPI and Short. The parameter is an
unquoted string, which must be one of scpi or short, e.g. *zlang short. This command can be queried,
too.

8.9.16 *ZSRST

Interface reset
Short command *ZSRST/nquery/
SCPI command *ZSRST/nquery/
SCPI path *ZSRST/nquery/
Display ID n/a Unit n/a Return value n/a
Suffix n/a [*RST default value] n/a

Description
Resets the interface, and is almost identical in sending a break to the interface. The interface then
switches to SCPI language, the format settings are set back to default. Cont-ons are removed from
the system.

8.9.17 DISB, :BRIGhtness

Display brightness
Short command DISB <NRf>
SCPI command :BRIGhtness <NRf>
SCPI path :DISPlay:BRIGhtness <NRf>
Display ID Brightness Unit % Return value <NRf>
Suffix n/a [*RST default value] 100.0

Allowed values
82.0..100.0

Description
Sets the front panel display brightness.

8.9.18 IAC, :AC

AC Value of I
Short command IAC? /qonly/
SCPI command :AC? /qonly/
SCPI path :FETCh[:SCALar]:CURRent:AC? /qonly/ |
:READ[:SCALar]:CURRent:AC? /qonly/
Display ID Iac Unit A Return value <NRf>
Suffix l [*RST default value] n/a

[Link] 115/206
 User Manual Instrument Family LMG600

Description
This command reads IAC , the AC value of the current defined by
√
2
IAC := Itrms − IDC
2 ,

where Itrms is the root mean square ITRMS [8.9.27→119] and IDC the DC value IDC [8.9.20→116] of the
current.

8.9.19 ICF, :CFACtor

Crest Factor of I
Short command ICF? /qonly/
SCPI command :CFACtor? /qonly/
SCPI path :FETCh[:SCALar]:CURRent:CFACtor? /qonly/ |
:READ[:SCALar]:CURRent:CFACtor? /qonly/
Display ID Icf Unit n/a Return value <NRf>
Suffix l [*RST default value] n/a

Description
This command reads ICF , the crest factor of the current defined by
Ipeak
ICF := ,
Itrms
where Itrms is the root mean square value of the voltage ITRMS [8.9.27→119] and Ipeak is the maximum
absolute sample value of the voltage occuring during the time interval given by TSNORM [8.9.75→135] and
DURNORM [8.9.74→135]. This can be expressed in an other way as

Ipeak = max{IMax , |IMin |}

with IMax the biggest sample IMAX [8.9.23→117] value and |IMin | the modulus of the smallest sample
IMIN [8.9.24→118]value.

8.9.20 IDC, :DC

DC Value of I
Short command IDC? /qonly/
SCPI command :DC? /qonly/
SCPI path :FETCh[:SCALar]:CURRent:DC? /qonly/ |
:READ[:SCALar]:CURRent:DC? /qonly/
Display ID Idc Unit A Return value <NRf>
Suffix l [*RST default value] n/a

Description
This command reads the DC value of the current IDC . defined by
t∫
1 +T
1
IDC := i(t) dt,
T
t1

where T is the duration DURNORM [8.9.74→135] and t1 the starting time point TSNORM [8.9.75→135] of the
measurement.

116/206 [Link]
 8 Remote control

8.9.21 IFF, :FFACtor

Form Factor of I
Short command IFF? /qonly/
SCPI command :FFACtor? /qonly/
SCPI path :FETCh[:SCALar]:CURRent:FFACtor? /qonly/ |
:READ[:SCALar]:CURRent:FFACtor? /qonly/
Display ID Iff Unit n/a Return value <NRf>
Suffix l [*RST default value] n/a

Description
This command reads Iff , the form factor of the current defined by
Itrms
Iff := ,
Irect
where Itrms is the root mean square ITRMS [8.9.27→119] and Irect the rectified value IREC [8.9.26→118] of the
voltage.

8.9.22 IINR, :INRush

Inrush Current
Short command IINR? /qonly/
SCPI command :INRush? /qonly/
SCPI path :FETCh[:SCALar]:CURRent:INRush? /qonly/ |
:READ[:SCALar]:CURRent:INRush? /qonly/
Display ID Iinr Unit A Return value <NRf>
Suffix l [*RST default value] n/a

Description
This command reads Iinr , the value of the inrush current defined by

Iinr := max|i(t)|,

to be the maximum of the momentary current i(t) since the start of the power meter, respectively the
last reset by IINC [8.9.181→170] of the inrush current, until now.

8.9.23 IMAX, :MAXPk

Max. Current in Interval

Short command IMAX? /qonly/
SCPI command :MAXPk? /qonly/
SCPI path :FETCh[:SCALar]:CURRent:MAXPk? /qonly/ |
:READ[:SCALar]:CURRent:MAXPk? /qonly/
Display ID Ipkp Unit A Return value <NRf>
Suffix l [*RST default value] n/a

Description
This command reads IMax , the biggest sample value of the current occuring during the time interval
given by TSNORM [8.9.75→135] and DURNORM [8.9.74→135].

[Link] 117/206
 User Manual Instrument Family LMG600

8.9.24 IMIN, :MINPk

Min. Current in Interval

Short command IMIN? /qonly/
SCPI command :MINPk? /qonly/
SCPI path :FETCh[:SCALar]:CURRent:MINPk? /qonly/ |
:READ[:SCALar]:CURRent:MINPk? /qonly/
Display ID Ipkn Unit A Return value <NRf>
Suffix l [*RST default value] n/a

Description
This command reads IMin , the smallest sample value of the current occuring during the time interval
given by TSNORM [8.9.75→135] and DURNORM [8.9.74→135].

8.9.25 IPP, :PPEak

Peak to Peak Value of I

Short command IPP? /qonly/
SCPI command :PPEak? /qonly/
SCPI path :FETCh[:SCALar]:CURRent:PPEak? /qonly/ |
:READ[:SCALar]:CURRent:PPEak? /qonly/
Display ID Ipp Unit A Return value <NRf>
Suffix l [*RST default value] n/a

Description
This command reads IPP , the peak to peak value of the current defined by

IPP := IMax − IMin ,

where IMax is the biggest IMAX [8.9.23→117] and IMin the smallest IMIN [8.9.24→118] sample value of the
current.

8.9.26 IREC, :RECTify

Rectified Value of I
Short command IREC? /qonly/
SCPI command :RECTify? /qonly/
SCPI path :FETCh[:SCALar]:CURRent:RECTify? /qonly/ |
:READ[:SCALar]:CURRent:RECTify? /qonly/
Display ID Irect Unit A Return value <NRf>
Suffix l [*RST default value] n/a

Description
This command reads Irect , the rectified value of the current defined by
T∫+t1
1
Irect := |i(t)| dt,
T
T

where T is the duration DURNORM [8.9.74→135] and t1 the starting time point TSNORM [8.9.75→135] of the
measurement.

118/206 [Link]
 8 Remote control

8.9.27 ITRMS, [:TRMS]

RMS of I
Short command ITRMS? /qonly/
SCPI command [:TRMS]? /qonly/
SCPI path :FETCh[:SCALar]:CURRent[:TRMS]? /qonly/ |
:READ[:SCALar]:CURRent[:TRMS]? /qonly/
Display ID Itrms Unit A Return value <NRf>
Suffix l [*RST default value] n/a

Description
This command reads Itrms , the root mean square value of the current defined by
v
u t∫
u 1 +T
u1
Itrms := t i(t)2 dt,
T
t1

where T is the duration DURNORM [8.9.74→135] and t1 the starting time point TSNORM [8.9.75→135] of the
measurement.

8.9.28 FCYC, [:CYCLe]

Cycle Frequency
Short command FCYC? /qonly/
SCPI command [:CYCLe]? /qonly/
SCPI path :FETCh[:SCALar]:FREQuency[:CYCLe]? /qonly/ |
:READ[:SCALar]:FREQuency[:CYCLe]? /qonly/
Display ID fcycle Unit Hz Return value <NRf>
Suffix l [*RST default value] n/a

Description
This command reads fcyc , the cycle frequency. It is determined during the time interval given by
TSNORM [8.9.75→135] and DURNORM [8.9.74→135].

8.9.29 FHARM, :HARMonics

Frequency in Harm. Interval

Short command FHARM? /qonly/
SCPI command :HARMonics? /qonly/
SCPI path :FETCh[:SCALar]:FREQuency:HARMonics? /qonly/ |
:READ[:SCALar]:FREQuency:HARMonics? /qonly/
Display ID f1 Unit Hz Return value <NRf>
Suffix l [*RST default value] n/a

Description
This command reads fharm , the frequency determined during the time intervall of the harmonics
analysis with starting point TSHARM [8.9.73→135] and duration DURHARM [8.9.72→134].

[Link] 119/206
 User Manual Instrument Family LMG600

8.9.30 BIAM, :AMPLitude

Amplitude of I of Harm.
Short command BIAM? /qonly/ [<list>]
SCPI command :AMPLitude? /qonly/ [<list>]
SCPI path :FETCh[:SCALar]:HARMonics:CURRent:AMPLitude? /qonly/
[<list>] |
:READ[:SCALar]:HARMonics:CURRent:AMPLitude? /qonly/
[<list>]
Display ID Ih Unit A Return value List of <NRf>
Suffix l [*RST default value] n/a

List
401 Elements. Valid numbers are from 0 to 401-1
order

Description
This command reads Ik , the amplitude of the current of the k-th harmonics.

8.9.31 BIIM, :BIMaginary

Short command BIIM? /qonly/ [<list>]

SCPI command :BIMaginary? /qonly/ [<list>]
SCPI path :FETCh[:SCALar]:HARMonics:CURRent:BIMaginary? /qonly/
[<list>] |
:READ[:SCALar]:HARMonics:CURRent:BIMaginary? /qonly/
[<list>]
Display ID n/a Unit A Return value List of <NRf>
Suffix l [*RST default value] n/a

List
2001 Elements. Valid numbers are from 0 to 2001-1
order

Description
This command reads the imaginary part of the current of the k-th harmonics bin.

8.9.32 BIRE, :BREal

Short command BIRE? /qonly/ [<list>]

SCPI command :BREal? /qonly/ [<list>]
SCPI path :FETCh[:SCALar]:HARMonics:CURRent:BREal? /qonly/ [<list>] |
:READ[:SCALar]:HARMonics:CURRent:BREal? /qonly/ [<list>]
Display ID n/a Unit A Return value List of <NRf>
Suffix l [*RST default value] n/a

List
2001 Elements. Valid numbers are from 0 to 2001-1
order

Description
This command reads the real part of the current of the k-th harmonics bin.

120/206 [Link]
 8 Remote control

8.9.33 BIPH, :PHASe

Phase of I of Harm.
Short command BIPH? /qonly/ [<list>]
SCPI command :PHASe? /qonly/ [<list>]
SCPI path :FETCh[:SCALar]:HARMonics:CURRent:PHASe? /qonly/ [<list>] |
:READ[:SCALar]:HARMonics:CURRent:PHASe? /qonly/ [<list>]
Display ID IP Unit ° Return value List of <NRf>
Suffix l [*RST default value] n/a

List
401 Elements. Valid numbers are from 0 to 401-1
order

Description
This command reads ϕIk , the phase angle of the current of the k-th harmonic.

8.9.34 IHRMS, :RMS

RMS of I of Harm.
Short command IHRMS? /qonly/
SCPI command :RMS? /qonly/
SCPI path :FETCh[:SCALar]:HARMonics:CURRent:RMS? /qonly/ |
:READ[:SCALar]:HARMonics:CURRent:RMS? /qonly/
Display ID Ihrms Unit A Return value <NRf>
Suffix l [*RST default value] n/a

Description
Summation of the effective current of all valid harmonics.

This command reads the root mean square value of the current of the harmonics defined by
√
Ihrms := I02 + I12 + · · · + IN
2 ,

where N is the number of harmonics available HNUM [8.9.40→123], and I0 , I1 · · · are the harmonic
amplitudes of the current BIAM [8.9.30→120].

8.9.35 HIHD, :THDistort

Total Harm. Distortion of I

Short command HIHD? /qonly/
SCPI command :THDistort? /qonly/
SCPI path :FETCh[:SCALar]:HARMonics:CURRent:THDistort? /qonly/ |
:READ[:SCALar]:HARMonics:CURRent:THDistort? /qonly/
Display ID Ithd Unit % Return value <NRf>
Suffix l [*RST default value] n/a

Description
This command reads the total harmonics distortion ITHD of the current defined by
√
1
ITHD := I22 + · · · IN
2 ,
I1
where N is the number of harmonics available HNUM [8.9.40→123] and I1 , I2 · · · are the harmonic
amplitudes of the current BIAM [8.9.30→120].

[Link] 121/206
 User Manual Instrument Family LMG600

8.9.36 BPAM, :ACTive

Active Power of Harmonic

Short command BPAM? /qonly/ [<list>]
SCPI command :ACTive? /qonly/ [<list>]
SCPI path :FETCh[:SCALar]:HARMonics:POWer:ACTive? /qonly/ [<list>] |
:READ[:SCALar]:HARMonics:POWer:ACTive? /qonly/ [<list>]
Display ID Ph Unit W Return value List of <NRf>
Suffix l [*RST default value] n/a

List
401 Elements. Valid numbers are from 0 to 401-1
order

Description
This command reads the active power Pk of the k-th harmonics defined by

Pk = Uk · Ik · cos(ϕUk − ϕIk ).

In this definition, Uk is the amplitude of the voltage BUAM [8.9.47→126], Ik the amplitude of the current
BIAM [8.9.30→120], ϕUk the phase of the voltage BUPH [8.9.50→127], and ϕIk the phase of the current
BIPH [8.9.33→121]. All these values are with respect to the k-th harmonic.

8.9.37 BSAM, :APParent

Apparent Power of n-th Harm.

Short command BSAM? /qonly/ [<list>]
SCPI command :APParent? /qonly/ [<list>]
SCPI path :FETCh[:SCALar]:HARMonics:POWer:APParent? /qonly/ [<list>] |
:READ[:SCALar]:HARMonics:POWer:APParent? /qonly/ [<list>]
Display ID Sh Unit VA Return value List of <NRf>
Suffix l [*RST default value] n/a

List
401 Elements. Valid numbers are from 0 to 401-1
order

Description
This command reads √
Pk2 + Q2k ,
where Pk is the active BPAM [8.9.36→122] and Qk the reactive power BQAM [8.9.42→124] of the k-th
harmonic.

8.9.38 D, :DISTortion

Distortion Power
Short command D? /qonly/
SCPI command :DISTortion? /qonly/
SCPI path :FETCh[:SCALar]:HARMonics:POWer:PERiod:DISTortion? /qonly/
|
:READ[:SCALar]:HARMonics:POWer:PERiod:DISTortion? /qonly/
Display ID D Unit var Return value <NRf>
Suffix l [*RST default value] n/a

122/206 [Link]
 8 Remote control

Description

This command reads the distortion power D defined by

√
D := Sh2 − Ph2 − Q2h ,

where
Sh := Uhrms · Ihrms
√
is the apparent power of the harmonics
√ SHARM [8.9.44→125] with Uhrms := U02 + · · · + UN
2 and I
hrms :=
I02 + · · · + IN
2 . Moreover,

∑
N
Ph := Uk · Ik · cos(ϕUk − ϕIk )
k=0

is the active power of the harmonics PHARM [8.9.43→124],

∑
N
Qh := Uk · Ik · sin(ϕUk − ϕIk )
k=0

the reactive power of the harmonics QHARM [8.9.45→125], and N the number of harmonics available
HNUM [8.9.40→123].

8.9.39 HPERLEN, :LENGth

Short command HPERLEN? /qonly/

SCPI command :LENGth? /qonly/
SCPI path :FETCh[:SCALar]:HARMonics:POWer:PERiod:LENGth? /qonly/ |
:READ[:SCALar]:HARMonics:POWer:PERiod:LENGth? /qonly/
Display ID n/a Unit s Return value <NRf>
Suffix l [*RST default value] n/a

Description

This command reads the harmonics period length. This is the time intervall of one signal period
averaged over the duration of the harmonics analysis. Note that DURHARM [8.9.72→134] = HPERLEN [8.9.39→123]
* HPERNUM [8.9.41→124] is fulfilled.

8.9.40 HNUM, :NUM

Number of available Harmonics

Short command HNUM? /qonly/
SCPI command :NUM? /qonly/
SCPI path :FETCh[:SCALar]:HARMonics:POWer:PERiod:NUM? /qonly/ |
:READ[:SCALar]:HARMonics:POWer:PERiod:NUM? /qonly/
Display ID N1 Unit n/a Return value <NRi>
Suffix l [*RST default value] n/a

Description

This command reads the number N of harmonics available.

[Link] 123/206
 User Manual Instrument Family LMG600

8.9.41 HPERNUM, :PNUMber

Short command HPERNUM? /qonly/

SCPI command :PNUMber? /qonly/
SCPI path :FETCh[:SCALar]:HARMonics:POWer:PERiod:PNUMber? /qonly/
|
:READ[:SCALar]:HARMonics:POWer:PERiod:PNUMber? /qonly/
Display ID n/a Unit n/a Return value <NRf>
Suffix l [*RST default value] n/a

Description

This command reads the harmonics periods number. This is the number of periods within the time
intervall of the harmonics analysis. The harmonics analysis is performed over an integer number of
periods. Note that DURHARM [8.9.72→134] = HPERLEN [8.9.39→123] * HPERNUM [8.9.41→124] is fulfilled.

8.9.42 BQAM, :REACtive

Reactive Power of Harmonics

Short command BQAM? /qonly/ [<list>]
SCPI command :REACtive? /qonly/ [<list>]
SCPI path :FETCh[:SCALar]:HARMonics:POWer:REACtive? /qonly/ [<list>]
|
:READ[:SCALar]:HARMonics:POWer:REACtive? /qonly/ [<list>]
Display ID Qh Unit var Return value List of <NRf>
Suffix l [*RST default value] n/a

List

401 Elements. Valid numbers are from 0 to 401-1

order

Description

This command reads the reactive power Qk of the k-th harmonics defined by

Qk := Uk · Ik · sin(ϕUk − ϕIk ).

In this definition, Uk is the amplitude of the voltage BUAM [8.9.47→126], Ik the amplitude of the current
BIAM [8.9.30→120], and ϕUk − ϕIk the difference between the phase of the voltage BUPH [8.9.50→127] and the
phase of the current BIPH [8.9.33→121]. All these values are with respect to the k-th harmonics. Note
that Qk can be negative.

8.9.43 PHARM, :ACTive

Active Power of Harmonics

Short command PHARM? /qonly/
SCPI command :ACTive? /qonly/
SCPI path :FETCh[:SCALar]:HARMonics:POWer:SUM:ACTive? /qonly/ |
:READ[:SCALar]:HARMonics:POWer:SUM:ACTive? /qonly/
Display ID Ph Unit W Return value <NRf>
Suffix l [*RST default value] n/a

124/206 [Link]
 8 Remote control

Description
This command reads the active power Ph of the harmonics defined by

∑
N
Ph := Pk ,
k=0

where
Pk = Uk · Ik · cos(ϕUk − ϕIk )
is the active power of the k-th harmonics BPAM [8.9.36→122] and N the number of harmonics available
HNUM [8.9.40→123].

8.9.44 SHARM, :APParent

Apparent Power of Harmonics

Short command SHARM? /qonly/
SCPI command :APParent? /qonly/
SCPI path :FETCh[:SCALar]:HARMonics:POWer:SUM:APParent? /qonly/ |
:READ[:SCALar]:HARMonics:POWer:SUM:APParent? /qonly/
Display ID Sh Unit VA Return value <NRf>
Suffix l [*RST default value] n/a

Description
This command reads the apparent power Sh of the harmonics defined by

Sh := Uhrms · Ihrms ,

where √
Uhrms := U02 + U12 + · · · + UN
2

is the root mean square value of the voltage of the harmonics UHRMS [8.9.51→127] and
√
Ihrms := I02 + I12 + · · · + IN
2 ,

the corresponding current IHRMS [8.9.34→121] and N the number of harmonics available HNUM [8.9.40→123].

8.9.45 QHARM, :REACtive

Reactive Power of Harmonics

Short command QHARM? /qonly/
SCPI command :REACtive? /qonly/
SCPI path :FETCh[:SCALar]:HARMonics:POWer:SUM:REACtive? /qonly/ |
:READ[:SCALar]:HARMonics:POWer:SUM:REACtive? /qonly/
Display ID Qh Unit var Return value <NRf>
Suffix l [*RST default value] n/a

Description
This command reads the reactive power Qh of the harmonics by Budeanu, defined to be

∑
N
Qh := Qk ,
k=0

where
Qk = Uk · Ik · sin(ϕUk − ϕIk )
is the reactive power of the k-th harmonics BQAM [8.9.42→124] and N the number of harmonics available
HNUM [8.9.40→123]. Note that Qh can be negative.

[Link] 125/206
 User Manual Instrument Family LMG600

8.9.46 QTOT, :TOTReactive

Total Reactive Power of Harm.

Short command QTOT? /qonly/
SCPI command :TOTReactive? /qonly/
SCPI path :FETCh[:SCALar]:HARMonics:POWer:SUM:TOTReactive? /qonly/
|
:READ[:SCALar]:HARMonics:POWer:SUM:TOTReactive? /qonly/
Display ID Qtot Unit var Return value <NRf>
Suffix l [*RST default value] n/a

Description
This command reads the total reactive power Qtot of the harmonics by Budeanu, defined to be
√
Qtot := D2 + Q2h ,

where D is the distortion power D [8.9.38→122] and Qh reactive power of the harmonics by Budeanu
QHARM [8.9.45→125].

8.9.47 BUAM, :AMPLitude

Amplitude of U of Harmonics
Short command BUAM? /qonly/ [<list>]
SCPI command :AMPLitude? /qonly/ [<list>]
SCPI path :FETCh[:SCALar]:HARMonics[:VOLTage]:AMPLitude? /qonly/
[<list>] |
:READ[:SCALar]:HARMonics[:VOLTage]:AMPLitude? /qonly/
[<list>]
Display ID Uh Unit V Return value List of <NRf>
Suffix l [*RST default value] n/a

List
401 Elements. Valid numbers are from 0 to 401-1
order

Description
This command reads Uk , the amplitude of the voltage of the k-th harmonics.

8.9.48 BUIM, :BIMaginary

Short command BUIM? /qonly/ [<list>]

SCPI command :BIMaginary? /qonly/ [<list>]
SCPI path :FETCh[:SCALar]:HARMonics[:VOLTage]:BIMaginary? /qonly/
[<list>] |
:READ[:SCALar]:HARMonics[:VOLTage]:BIMaginary? /qonly/
[<list>]
Display ID n/a Unit V Return value List of <NRf>
Suffix l [*RST default value] n/a

List
2001 Elements. Valid numbers are from 0 to 2001-1
order

Description
This command reads the imaginary part of the voltage of the k-th harmonics bin.

126/206 [Link]
 8 Remote control

8.9.49 BURE, :BREal

Short command BURE? /qonly/ [<list>]

SCPI command :BREal? /qonly/ [<list>]
SCPI path :FETCh[:SCALar]:HARMonics[:VOLTage]:BREal? /qonly/ [<list>] |
:READ[:SCALar]:HARMonics[:VOLTage]:BREal? /qonly/ [<list>]
Display ID n/a Unit V Return value List of <NRf>
Suffix l [*RST default value] n/a

List
2001 Elements. Valid numbers are from 0 to 2001-1
order

Description
This command reads the real part of the voltage of the k-th harmonics bin.

8.9.50 BUPH, :PHASe

Phase of U of Harmonics
Short command BUPH? /qonly/ [<list>]
SCPI command :PHASe? /qonly/ [<list>]
SCPI path :FETCh[:SCALar]:HARMonics[:VOLTage]:PHASe? /qonly/ [<list>]
|
:READ[:SCALar]:HARMonics[:VOLTage]:PHASe? /qonly/ [<list>]
Display ID UP Unit ° Return value List of <NRf>
Suffix l [*RST default value] n/a

List
401 Elements. Valid numbers are from 0 to 401-1
order

Description
This command reads ϕUk , the phase of the voltage of the k-th harmonic.

8.9.51 UHRMS, :RMS

RMS of U of Harm.
Short command UHRMS? /qonly/
SCPI command :RMS? /qonly/
SCPI path :FETCh[:SCALar]:HARMonics[:VOLTage]:RMS? /qonly/ |
:READ[:SCALar]:HARMonics[:VOLTage]:RMS? /qonly/
Display ID Uhrms Unit V Return value <NRf>
Suffix l [*RST default value] n/a

Description
Summation of Utrms of all valid harmonics.

This command reads the root mean square value of the voltage of the harmonics defined by
√
Uhrms := U02 + U12 + · · · + UN
2,

where N is the number of harmonics available HNUM [8.9.40→123], and U0 , U1 · · · are the harmonics
amplitudes of the voltage BUAM [8.9.47→126].

[Link] 127/206
 User Manual Instrument Family LMG600

8.9.52 HUHD, :THDistort

Total Harm. Distortion of U

Short command HUHD? /qonly/
SCPI command :THDistort? /qonly/
SCPI path :FETCh[:SCALar]:HARMonics[:VOLTage]:THDistort? /qonly/ |
:READ[:SCALar]:HARMonics[:VOLTage]:THDistort? /qonly/
Display ID Uthd Unit % Return value <NRf>
Suffix l [*RST default value] n/a

Description
This command reads the total harmonics distortion UTHD of the voltage defined by
√
1
UTHD = U22 + · · · UN
2,
U1
where N is the number of harmonics available HNUM [8.9.40→123] and U1 , U2 · · · are the harmonics
amplitudes of the voltage BUAM [8.9.47→126]].

8.9.53 P, [:ACTive]

Active Power
Short command P? /qonly/
SCPI command [:ACTive]? /qonly/
SCPI path :FETCh[:SCALar]:POWer[:ACTive]? /qonly/ |
:READ[:SCALar]:POWer[:ACTive]? /qonly/
Display ID P Unit W Return value <NRf>
Suffix l [*RST default value] n/a

Description
This command reads P , the active power defined by
t∫
1 +T
1
P := u(t) · i(t) dt
T
t1

where T is the duration DURNORM [8.9.74→135] and t1 the starting time point TSNORM [8.9.75→135] of the
measurement.

8.9.54 S, :APParent

Apparent Power
Short command S? /qonly/
SCPI command :APParent? /qonly/
SCPI path :FETCh[:SCALar]:POWer:APParent? /qonly/ |
:READ[:SCALar]:POWer:APParent? /qonly/
Display ID S Unit VA Return value <NRf>
Suffix l [*RST default value] n/a

Description
This command reads S, the apparent power defined by

S := Utrms · Itrms ,

where Utrms and Itrms are the root mean square values of the voltage UTRMS [8.9.86→139] and current
ITRMS [8.9.27→119].

128/206 [Link]
 8 Remote control

8.9.55 PF, :FPACtor

Power Factor
Short command PF? /qonly/
SCPI command :FPACtor? /qonly/
SCPI path :FETCh[:SCALar]:POWer:FPACtor? /qonly/ |
:READ[:SCALar]:POWer:FPACtor? /qonly/
Display ID PF Unit n/a Return value <NRf>
Suffix l [*RST default value] n/a

Description
This command reads λ, the power factor defined by

|P |
λ := ,
S
where P ist the active P [8.9.53→128] and S the apparent S [8.9.54→128] power.

8.9.56 INCA, :ICAPacity

Inductive/Capacitive Flag
Short command INCA? /qonly/
SCPI command :ICAPacity? /qonly/
SCPI path :FETCh[:SCALar]:POWer:ICAPacity? /qonly/ |
:READ[:SCALar]:POWer:ICAPacity? /qonly/
Display ID Inca Unit n/a Return value <NRi>
Suffix l [*RST default value] n/a

Allowed values
Following values can be returned:
-1: Capacitive behaviour
0: Undefined behaviour
+1: Inductive behaviour

Description
This command reads the inductive capacitive flag. Its value is determined by Φ, the phase difference
between the current and the voltage of the first harmonics PHI [8.9.57→129]. It returns 1 for the inductive
case where Φ is between 1 and 179◦ , and it returns -1 for the capacitive case where Φ is between -179
and −1◦ . In any other cases the INCA flag is 0.

8.9.57 PHI, :PHASe

Phase Difference between I and U of the fundamental frequency

Short command PHI? /qonly/
SCPI command :PHASe? /qonly/
SCPI path :FETCh[:SCALar]:POWer:PHASe? /qonly/ |
:READ[:SCALar]:POWer:PHASe? /qonly/
Display ID �fund Unit ° Return value <NRf>
Suffix l [*RST default value] n/a

Description
This command reads Φ, the phase difference between the current ϕI1 and the voltage ϕU1 of the
fundamental frequency. This can be written in a formula by

Φ := ϕU1 − ϕI1 .

[Link] 129/206
 User Manual Instrument Family LMG600

8.9.58 Q, :REACtive

Reactive Power
Short command Q? /qonly/
SCPI command :REACtive? /qonly/
SCPI path :FETCh[:SCALar]:POWer:REACtive? /qonly/ |
:READ[:SCALar]:POWer:REACtive? /qonly/
Display ID Q Unit var Return value <NRf>
Suffix l [*RST default value] n/a

Description
This command reads Q, the reactive power defined by
√
Q := S 2 − P 2 ,

where S ist the apparent S [8.9.54→128] and P the active P [8.9.53→128] power.

8.9.59 RSER, :ASResist

Active Serial Resistance

Short command RSER? /qonly/
SCPI command :ASResist? /qonly/
SCPI path :FETCh[:SCALar]:RESistance:ASResist? /qonly/ |
:READ[:SCALar]:RESistance:ASResist? /qonly/
Display ID Rser Unit Ω Return value <NRf>
Suffix l [*RST default value] n/a

Description
This command reads Rser , the active serial resistance defined by
P
Rser := 2 ,
Itrms

where P ist the active power P [8.9.53→128] and Itrms the root mean square value of the current
ITRMS [8.9.27→119].

8.9.60 Z, :IMPedance

Impendance
Short command Z? /qonly/
SCPI command :IMPedance? /qonly/
SCPI path :FETCh[:SCALar]:RESistance:IMPedance? /qonly/ |
:READ[:SCALar]:RESistance:IMPedance? /qonly/
Display ID Z Unit Ω Return value <NRf>
Suffix l [*RST default value] n/a

Description
This command reads the impedance Z defined by
Utrms
Z := ,
Itrms
where Utrms and Itrms are the root mean square values of the voltage UTRMS [8.9.86→139] and current
ITRMS [8.9.27→119].

130/206 [Link]
 8 Remote control

8.9.61 XSER, :RSIMpedance

Reactive Serial Resistance

Short command XSER? /qonly/
SCPI command :RSIMpedance? /qonly/
SCPI path :FETCh[:SCALar]:RESistance:RSIMpedance? /qonly/ |
:READ[:SCALar]:RESistance:RSIMpedance? /qonly/
Display ID Xser Unit Ω Return value <NRf>
Suffix l [*RST default value] n/a

Description
This command reads Xser , the reactive serial resistance defined by
Q
Xser := 2 ,
Itrms

where Q ist the reactive power Q [8.9.58→130] and Itrms the root mean square value of the current
ITRMS [8.9.27→119].

8.9.62 SPCLEN, :CLENgth

Written Samples of the Scope

Short command SPCLEN? /qonly/
SCPI command :CLENgth? /qonly/
SCPI path :FETCh[:SCALar]:SCOPe:CLENgth? /qonly/ |
:READ[:SCALar]:SCOPe:CLENgth? /qonly/
Display ID n/a Unit n/a Return value <NRi>
Suffix 1, 2, 9, 10, 21, [*RST default value] n/a
22, 29

Invalid value
An invalid value is indicated by a value of -1

Description
This command reads the number of samples, which were written in scope until now.

8.9.63 SPNTR, :NTRacks

Number of Tracks for the Scope

Short command SPNTR? /qonly/
SCPI command :NTRacks? /qonly/
SCPI path :FETCh[:SCALar]:SCOPe:NTRacks? /qonly/ |
:READ[:SCALar]:SCOPe:NTRacks? /qonly/
Display ID n/a Unit n/a Return value <NRi>
Suffix 1, 2, 9, 10, 21, [*RST default value] n/a
22, 29

Invalid value
An invalid value is indicated by a value of -1

Description
This command reads the number of tracks of the scope, that are available.

[Link] 131/206
 User Manual Instrument Family LMG600

8.9.64 SPPTRS, :SAMPles

Pretrigger Length in Samples

Short command SPPTRS? /qonly/
SCPI command :SAMPles? /qonly/
SCPI path :FETCh[:SCALar]:SCOPe:PTRigger:SAMPles? /qonly/ |
:READ[:SCALar]:SCOPe:PTRigger:SAMPles? /qonly/
Display ID n/a Unit n/a Return value <NRi>
Suffix 1, 2, 9, 10, 21, [*RST default value] n/a
22, 29

Description
The same as SCPTRS [8.9.126→152], but this is the value the scope was recorded with.

8.9.65 SPPTRT, [:TIMe]

Pretrigger Length in Time

Short command SPPTRT? /qonly/
SCPI command [:TIMe]? /qonly/
SCPI path :FETCh[:SCALar]:SCOPe:PTRigger[:TIMe]? /qonly/ |
:READ[:SCALar]:SCOPe:PTRigger[:TIMe]? /qonly/
Display ID n/a Unit n/a Return value <Time>
Suffix 1, 2, 9, 10, 21, [*RST default value] n/a
22, 29

Description
The same as SCPTRT [8.9.127→152], but this is the value the scope was recorded with.

8.9.66 SPSR, :SRATe

Scope Sampling Rate

Short command SPSR? /qonly/
SCPI command :SRATe? /qonly/
SCPI path :FETCh[:SCALar]:SCOPe:SRATe? /qonly/ |
:READ[:SCALar]:SCOPe:SRATe? /qonly/
Display ID n/a Unit n/a Return value <NRf>
Suffix 1, 2, 9, 10, 21, [*RST default value] n/a
22, 29

Description
The same as SCSR [8.9.128→153], but this is the value the scope was recorded with.

8.9.67 SPSTAT, :STATus

Short command SPSTAT? /qonly/

SCPI command :STATus? /qonly/
SCPI path :FETCh[:SCALar]:SCOPe:STATus? /qonly/ |
:READ[:SCALar]:SCOPe:STATus? /qonly/
Display ID n/a Unit n/a Return value <NRi>
Suffix 1, 2, 9, 10, 21, [*RST default value] n/a
22, 29

132/206 [Link]
 8 Remote control

Allowed values
Following values can be returned:
0 or ’invalid’: The scope is invalid.
1 or ’loading’: It is loading the presamples.
2 or ’search’: It is searching for the trigger.
3 or ’pretriggered’: The scope is triggered, but stil no sample is recorded, because the pretrigger is
negative.
4 or ’triggered’: The scope is triggered and samples are recording.
5 or ’finish’: All samples are recorded.
6 or ’aborted’: The scope is aborted.

Invalid value
An invalid value is indicated by a value of 0

Description
This command reads the status of the scope.

8.9.68 SPTLEN, :TLENgth

Number of All Samples

Short command SPTLEN? /qonly/
SCPI command :TLENgth? /qonly/
SCPI path :FETCh[:SCALar]:SCOPe:TLENgth? /qonly/ |
:READ[:SCALar]:SCOPe:TLENgth? /qonly/
Display ID n/a Unit n/a Return value <NRi>
Suffix 1, 2, 9, 10, 21, [*RST default value] n/a
22, 29

Invalid value
An invalid value is indicated by a value of -1

Description
This command reads the number of all samples to be written. This is he case when the scope status
SPSTAT [8.9.67→132] indicates finish.

8.9.69 SPTPOS, :TPOSition

Trigger Position
Short command SPTPOS? /qonly/
SCPI command :TPOSition? /qonly/
SCPI path :FETCh[:SCALar]:SCOPe:TPOSition? /qonly/ |
:READ[:SCALar]:SCOPe:TPOSition? /qonly/
Display ID n/a Unit n/a Return value <NRi>
Suffix 1, 2, 9, 10, 21, [*RST default value] n/a
22, 29

Invalid value
An invalid value is indicated by a value of 0

Description
This command reads the index of the sample, that was recorded when the trigger occured.

[Link] 133/206
 User Manual Instrument Family LMG600

8.9.70 SPVAL, :VALues

Short command SPVAL? /qonly/ <NRi>,<list>

SCPI command :VALues? /qonly/ <NRi>,<list>
SCPI path :FETCh[:SCALar]:SCOPe:VALues? /qonly/ <NRi>,<list> |
:READ[:SCALar]:SCOPe:VALues? /qonly/ <NRi>,<list>
Display ID n/a Unit n/a Return value List of <NRf>
Suffix 1, 2, 9, 10, 21, [*RST default value] n/a
22, 29

Lists, tracks and suffixes

Scope Suffixes Tracks Size
Trigger scope 9, 29 1 2*1024
Signal scope 1, 2, 21, 22 8 16*1024
Transient scope 10 8 64*1024*1024

Description
This command reads the samples of the scope. The size value specifies the number of sample values
which can be stored for one scope. The tracks value specifies the number of tracks which are available
for one scope. For the transient scope this is the maximum number of tracks. So each track can have
a maximum number of sample values which is calculated by size/tracks. The list parameter specifies,
which sample values are wanted. The smalles list index is 0, the biggest one is calculated like above
minus 1. Each scope can be identified with a number which you can find in the suffixes row. The
number of the track is the <NRi> parameter in front of the list.

8.9.71 TSCFG, :TIMestamp

Short command TSCFG? /qonly/

SCPI command :TIMestamp? /qonly/
SCPI path :FETCh[:SCALar]:SLOTs:CONFig:TIMestamp? /qonly/ |
:READ[:SCALar]:SLOTs:CONFig:TIMestamp? /qonly/
Display ID n/a Unit n/a Return value <Date>
Suffix l [*RST default value] n/a

Invalid value
An invalid value is indicated by a value of 0

Description
The timestamp of the last configuration change.

8.9.72 DURHARM, :DURation

Duration of the Harmonic Analysis

Short command DURHARM? /qonly/
SCPI command :DURation? /qonly/
SCPI path :FETCh[:SCALar]:SLOTs:HARMonics:DURation? /qonly/ |
:READ[:SCALar]:SLOTs:HARMonics:DURation? /qonly/
Display ID Δtharm Unit s Return value <Time>
Suffix l [*RST default value] n/a

Invalid value
An invalid value is indicated by a value of -1

Description
This command reads the duration of the harmonics analysis. Note that DURHARM [8.9.72→134] =
HPERLEN [8.9.39→123] * HPERNUM [8.9.41→124] is fulfilled.

134/206 [Link]
 8 Remote control

8.9.73 TSHARM, :TIMestamp

Start Time of the Harmonic Analysis

Short command TSHARM? /qonly/
SCPI command :TIMestamp? /qonly/
SCPI path :FETCh[:SCALar]:SLOTs:HARMonics:TIMestamp? /qonly/ |
:READ[:SCALar]:SLOTs:HARMonics:TIMestamp? /qonly/
Display ID tsharm Unit n/a Return value <Date>
Suffix l [*RST default value] n/a

Invalid value
An invalid value is indicated by a value of 0

Description
This command reads the start time of the harmonics analysis.

8.9.74 DURNORM, :DURation

Duration of Norm. Analysis

Short command DURNORM? /qonly/
SCPI command :DURation? /qonly/
SCPI path :FETCh[:SCALar]:SLOTs:NORMal:DURation? /qonly/ |
:READ[:SCALar]:SLOTs:NORMal:DURation? /qonly/
Display ID Δtnorm Unit s Return value <Time>
Suffix l [*RST default value] n/a

Invalid value
An invalid value is indicated by a value of -1

Description
This command reads the duration of measurement interval for the normal values.

8.9.75 TSNORM, :TIMestamp

Start Time of Norm. Analysis

Short command TSNORM? /qonly/
SCPI command :TIMestamp? /qonly/
SCPI path :FETCh[:SCALar]:SLOTs:NORMal:TIMestamp? /qonly/ |
:READ[:SCALar]:SLOTs:NORMal:TIMestamp? /qonly/
Display ID tsnorm Unit n/a Return value <Date>
Suffix l [*RST default value] n/a

Invalid value
An invalid value is indicated by a value of 0

Description
This command reads the starting point of measurement interval for the normal values.

[Link] 135/206
 User Manual Instrument Family LMG600

8.9.76 DURSP, :DURation

Duration of the Scope

Short command DURSP? /qonly/
SCPI command :DURation? /qonly/
SCPI path :FETCh[:SCALar]:SLOTs:SCOPe:DURation? /qonly/ |
:READ[:SCALar]:SLOTs:SCOPe:DURation? /qonly/
Display ID Δtsp Unit s Return value <Time>
Suffix 1, 2, 9, 10, 21, [*RST default value] n/a
22, 29

Invalid value
An invalid value is indicated by a value of -1

Description
This command reads the duration of the recorded samples by the scope.

8.9.77 TSSP, :TIMestamp

Time of the First Sample

Short command TSSP? /qonly/
SCPI command :TIMestamp? /qonly/
SCPI path :FETCh[:SCALar]:SLOTs:SCOPe:TIMestamp? /qonly/ |
:READ[:SCALar]:SLOTs:SCOPe:TIMestamp? /qonly/
Display ID tssp Unit n/a Return value <Date>
Suffix 1, 2, 9, 10, 21, [*RST default value] n/a
22, 29

Description
This command reads the point in time of the first sample in the scope.

8.9.78 UAC, :AC

AC Value of U
Short command UAC? /qonly/
SCPI command :AC? /qonly/
SCPI path :FETCh[:SCALar][:VOLTage]:AC? /qonly/ |
:READ[:SCALar][:VOLTage]:AC? /qonly/
Display ID Uac Unit V Return value <NRf>
Suffix l [*RST default value] n/a

Description
This command reads UAC , the AC value of the voltage defined by
√
UAC := Utrms 2 − UDC
2 .

See UTRMS [8.9.86→139] and UDC [8.9.80→137] for Utrms and UDC .

8.9.79 UCF, :CFACtor

Crest Factor of U
Short command UCF? /qonly/
SCPI command :CFACtor? /qonly/
SCPI path :FETCh[:SCALar][:VOLTage]:CFACtor? /qonly/ |
:READ[:SCALar][:VOLTage]:CFACtor? /qonly/
Display ID Ucf Unit n/a Return value <NRf>
Suffix l [*RST default value] n/a

136/206 [Link]
 8 Remote control

Description
This command reads UCF , the crest factor of the voltage defined by
Upeak
UCF := ,
Utrms
where Utrms is the root mean square value of the voltage UTRMS [8.9.86→139] and Upeak is the biggest
absolute sample value of the voltage occuring during the time interval given by TSNORM [8.9.75→135] and
DURNORM [8.9.74→135]. This can be expressed in an other way as

Upeak = max{UMax , |UMin |}

with UMax the biggest sample UMAX [8.9.82→138] value and |UMin | the modulus of the smallest sample
UMIN [8.9.83→138] value.

8.9.80 UDC, :DC

DC Value of U
Short command UDC? /qonly/
SCPI command :DC? /qonly/
SCPI path :FETCh[:SCALar][:VOLTage]:DC? /qonly/ |
:READ[:SCALar][:VOLTage]:DC? /qonly/
Display ID Udc Unit V Return value <NRf>
Suffix l [*RST default value] n/a

Description
This command reads the DC value of the voltage UDC defined by
t∫
1 +T
1
UDC := u(t) dt,
T
t1

where T is the duration DURNORM [8.9.74→135] and t1 the starting time TSNORM [8.9.75→135] of the
measurement.

8.9.81 UFF, :FFACtor

Form Factor of U
Short command UFF? /qonly/
SCPI command :FFACtor? /qonly/
SCPI path :FETCh[:SCALar][:VOLTage]:FFACtor? /qonly/ |
:READ[:SCALar][:VOLTage]:FFACtor? /qonly/
Display ID Uff Unit n/a Return value <NRf>
Suffix l [*RST default value] n/a

Description
This command reads Uff , the form factor of the voltage defined by
Utrms
Uff := ,
Urect
where Utrms is the root mean square UTRMS [8.9.86→139] and Urect the rectified value UREC [8.9.85→138] of
the voltage.

[Link] 137/206
 User Manual Instrument Family LMG600

8.9.82 UMAX, :MAXPk

Max. Voltage in Interval

Short command UMAX? /qonly/
SCPI command :MAXPk? /qonly/
SCPI path :FETCh[:SCALar][:VOLTage]:MAXPk? /qonly/ |
:READ[:SCALar][:VOLTage]:MAXPk? /qonly/
Display ID Upkp Unit V Return value <NRf>
Suffix l [*RST default value] n/a

Description
This command reads UMax , the biggest sample value of the voltage occuring during the time interval
given by TSNORM [8.9.75→135] and DURNORM [8.9.74→135].

8.9.83 UMIN, :MINPk

Min. Voltage in Interval

Short command UMIN? /qonly/
SCPI command :MINPk? /qonly/
SCPI path :FETCh[:SCALar][:VOLTage]:MINPk? /qonly/ |
:READ[:SCALar][:VOLTage]:MINPk? /qonly/
Display ID Upkn Unit V Return value <NRf>
Suffix l [*RST default value] n/a

Description
This command reads UMin , the smallest sample value of the voltage occuring during the time interval
given by TSNORM [8.9.75→135] and DURNORM [8.9.74→135].

8.9.84 UPP, :PPEak

Peak to Peak of U
Short command UPP? /qonly/
SCPI command :PPEak? /qonly/
SCPI path :FETCh[:SCALar][:VOLTage]:PPEak? /qonly/ |
:READ[:SCALar][:VOLTage]:PPEak? /qonly/
Display ID Upp Unit V Return value <NRf>
Suffix l [*RST default value] n/a

Description
This command reads UPP , the peak to peak value of the voltage defined by

UPP := UMax − UMin ,

where UMax is the biggest UMAX [8.9.82→138] and UMin the smallest UMIN [8.9.83→138] sample value of the
voltage.

8.9.85 UREC, :RECTify

Rectified Value of U
Short command UREC? /qonly/
SCPI command :RECTify? /qonly/
SCPI path :FETCh[:SCALar][:VOLTage]:RECTify? /qonly/ |
:READ[:SCALar][:VOLTage]:RECTify? /qonly/
Display ID Urect Unit V Return value <NRf>
Suffix l [*RST default value] n/a

138/206 [Link]
 8 Remote control

Description
This command reads Urect , the rectified value of the voltage defined by
t∫
1 +T
1
Urect := |u(t)| dt,
T
t1

where T is the duration DURNORM [8.9.74→135] and t1 the starting time point TSNORM [8.9.75→135] of the
measurement.

8.9.86 UTRMS, [:TRMS]

RMS of U
Short command UTRMS? /qonly/
SCPI command [:TRMS]? /qonly/
SCPI path :FETCh[:SCALar][:VOLTage][:TRMS]? /qonly/ |
:READ[:SCALar][:VOLTage][:TRMS]? /qonly/
Display ID Utrms Unit V Return value <NRf>
Suffix l [*RST default value] n/a

Description
This command reads Utrms , the root mean square value of the voltage defined by
v
u t∫
u 1 +T
u1
Utrms := t u(t)2 dt,
T
t1

where T is the duration DURNORM [8.9.74→135] and t1 the starting time point TSNORM [8.9.75→135] of the
measurement.

8.9.87 FRMT, :DATa

Short command FRMT <NRi>

SCPI command :DATa <NRi>
SCPI path :FORMat:DATa <NRi>
Display ID n/a Unit n/a Return value <NRi>
Suffix n/a [*RST default value] n/a

Allowed values
Following values can be assigned or returned:
0 or ’ASCii’: Switches to ASCII output format which is default after a reset of the interface.
1 or ’PACKed’: Switches to a packed, binary format (32 bit little endian) for the output.

8.9.88 GTL, :GTL

Go to local handling
Short command GTL/nquery/
SCPI command :GTL/nquery/
SCPI path :GTL/nquery/
Display ID n/a Unit n/a Return value n/a
Suffix n/a [*RST default value] n/a

Description
If a device is remote controlled it is in a remote mode. In this mode it cannot be controlled by the
front panel. This command sets the device back to local mode. Thus it can be controlled by the front
panel of the device again. This command should be the last one when finishing remote control.

[Link] 139/206
 User Manual Instrument Family LMG600

8.9.89 CONT, :CONTinuous

Cont-On control
Short command CONT/nquery/ <string program data>[,<string program
data>[,<string program data>]]
SCPI command :CONTinuous/nquery/ <string program data>[,<string program
data>[,<string program data>]]
SCPI path :INITiate:CONTinuous/nquery/ <string program data>[,<string
program data>[,<string program data>]]
Display ID n/a Unit n/a Return value n/a
Suffix n/a [*RST default value] n/a

Description
This command switches on/off a cont-on or deletes it from the system. The first parameter can be
on (switches it on), off (switches it off), del (deletes it). The second parameter is the name of the
cont-on. In case the first parameter is ’on’, there is an optional third parameter which is for internal
debugging purposes only and should not be used.

8.9.90 COPY, :COPY

Immediate reload measurement values

Short command COPY/nquery/ <string program data>
SCPI command :COPY/nquery/ <string program data>
SCPI path :INITiate:COPY/nquery/ <string program data>
Display ID n/a Unit n/a Return value n/a
Suffix n/a [*RST default value] n/a

Description
Immediately refreshes the read buffer for the measurement values. This command is identical to INIM
”NOW”

8.9.91 INIM, :IMMediate

Reload measurement values

Short command INIM/nquery/ <string program data>
SCPI command :IMMediate/nquery/ <string program data>
SCPI path :INITiate:IMMediate/nquery/ <string program data>
Display ID n/a Unit n/a Return value n/a
Suffix n/a [*RST default value] n/a

Description
Waits for the next measurement cycle or the event given by its first parameter, and then actualize
the read buffer for the measurement values. If no parameter is given, ”mc” is assumed. See INIM,
:READ and :FETCh [8.6→107] for a detailed command reference.

8.9.92 SCPL, :COUPling

Signal coupling
Short command SCPL <NRi>
SCPI command :COUPling <NRi>
SCPI path :INPut:COUPling <NRi>
Display ID Coupling Unit n/a Return value <NRi>
Suffix g [*RST default value] 0

140/206 [Link]
 8 Remote control

Allowed values
Following values can be assigned or returned:
0 or ’ACDC’: AC+DC coupling
1 or ’AC’: AC coupling, that is DC components are rejected

Description
Specifies a group’s signal coupling.

8.9.93 AVER, :COUNt

Average Setting
Short command AVER <NRi>
SCPI command :COUNt <NRi>
SCPI path :SENSe:AVERage:COUNt <NRi>
Display ID Average Unit n/a Return value <NRi>
Suffix n/a [*RST default value] 1

Allowed values
1..999

Description
This command configures the number of Cycle to average over. Only the normal values are affected.

8.9.94 IDLY, :DELay

I channel DeLaY correction

Short command IDLY <Time>
SCPI command :DELay <Time>
SCPI path :SENSe:CURRent:DELay <Time>
Display ID I Delay Unit s Return value <Time>
Suffix p [*RST default value] 0

Allowed values
-5.5e-6..5.5e-6

Description
Configures a (positive or negative!) correction time to compensate for external delays in the signal
path, e.g. due to a sensor. Note that delay compensation for compatible ZES sensors is done
automatically by the device (using data stored in the sensor’s nonvolatile memory). Gain correction
is configured via ISCA [8.9.104→145].

8.9.95 IDNI, :IDENtify

Human-readable I sensor identification

Short command IDNI? /qonly/
SCPI command :IDENtify? /qonly/
SCPI path :SENSe:CURRent:IDENtify? /qonly/
Display ID n/a Unit n/a Return value <string program
data>
Suffix p [*RST default value] n/a

[Link] 141/206
 User Manual Instrument Family LMG600

Description
If no sensor is attached to the channel the string is empty. Otherwise its value consists of 3 comma-
separated fields identifying the sensor:

• Manufacturer

• Model

• Serial Number

8.9.96 IJACK, :JACK

I channel jack
Short command IJACK <NRi>
SCPI command :JACK <NRi>
SCPI path :SENSe:CURRent:JACK <NRi>
Display ID I Jack Unit n/a Return value <NRi>
Suffix p [*RST default value] 0

Allowed values
Following values can be assigned or returned:
0 or ’ISTar’: I* jack
1 or ’ISENsor’: I sensor jack

Description
Selects an I channel jack. IJLS [8.9.97→142] provides a list of all currently available jacks or more precisely,
their numeric IDs.

8.9.97 IJLS, :LJACk

I channel jack list

Short command IJLS? /qonly/ [<list>]
SCPI command :LJACk? /qonly/ [<list>]
SCPI path :SENSe:CURRent:LJACk? /qonly/ [<list>]
Display ID n/a Unit n/a Return value List of <NRi>
Suffix p [*RST default value] n/a

List
The size of this list is not constant and depends on the actual context.

Description
Specifies the currently available I channel jacks or more precisely, their numeric IDs. See the
documentation for IJACK [8.9.96→142] to decode the values; use IJACK with one of the values to select
the appropriate jack.

8.9.98 IAUTO, :AUTo

I channel auto range

Short command IAUTO <Boolean>
SCPI command :AUTo <Boolean>
SCPI path :SENSe:CURRent:RANGe:AUTo <Boolean>
Display ID I Auto Range Unit n/a Return value <Boolean>
Suffix p [*RST default value] 1

142/206 [Link]
 8 Remote control

Description
In manual mode the configured range, if valid, is taken as given and stays fixed until changed by a
configuration command, for instance explicitly by IRNG [8.9.103→144] or implicitly by IJACK [8.9.96→142].
With auto range enabled, the instrument monitors the range usage and if necessary automatically
selects an appropriate smaller or larger range in order to best measure the signal applied to the
selected jack, with the same set of ranges available as in manual mode (see IRNLS [8.9.99→143]).

8.9.99 IRNLS, :LNOMinal

List of I channel nominal ranges

Short command IRNLS? /qonly/ [<list>]
SCPI command :LNOMinal? /qonly/ [<list>]
SCPI path :SENSe:CURRent:RANGe:LNOMinal? /qonly/ [<list>]
Display ID n/a Unit n/a Return value List of <NRf>
Suffix p [*RST default value] n/a

List
The size of this list is not constant and depends on the actual context.

Description
Specifies the currently available I channel measuring ranges or more precisely, their nominal values. In
general, this list changes when a different jack is selected (via IJACK [8.9.96→142] or a sensor is connected
to the channel, etc. Use IRNG [8.9.103→144] with one of the values to select the appropriate range.

8.9.100 IRSLS, :LSCaled

List of I channel scaled ranges

Short command IRSLS? /qonly/ [<list>]
SCPI command :LSCaled? /qonly/ [<list>]
SCPI path :SENSe:CURRent:RANGe:LSCaled? /qonly/ [<list>]
Display ID n/a Unit n/a Return value List of <NRf>
Suffix p [*RST default value] n/a

List
The size of this list is not constant and depends on the actual context.

Description
Specifies the currently available I channel measuring ranges including custom (ISCA [8.9.104→145]) and
possibly sensor scaling. In general, this list changes when ISCA changes, a different jack is selected
(IJACK [8.9.96→142]) or a sensor is connected to the channel, etc. Be aware that when using one of
these scaled values to select a range via IRNG [8.9.103→144], a match with a nominal range value takes
precedence. To unambiguously select a range, use its nominal value (see IRNLS [8.9.99→143]).

8.9.101 IRNULS, :LUNominal

List of units of I channel nominal ranges

Short command IRNULS? /qonly/ [<list>]
SCPI command :LUNominal? /qonly/ [<list>]
SCPI path :SENSe:CURRent:RANGe:LUNominal? /qonly/ [<list>]
Display ID n/a Unit n/a Return value List of <string
program data>
Suffix p [*RST default value] n/a

List
The size of this list is not constant and depends on the actual context.

[Link] 143/206
 User Manual Instrument Family LMG600

Description
Specifies the unit of each currently available I channel nominal measuring range (as given by
IRNLS [8.9.99→143]):

• ”A” (Ampere)

• ”V” (Volt)

In general, this list changes whenever IRNLS changes.

8.9.102 IRSULS, :LUSCaled

List of units of I channel scaled ranges

Short command IRSULS? /qonly/ [<list>]
SCPI command :LUSCaled? /qonly/ [<list>]
SCPI path :SENSe:CURRent:RANGe:LUSCaled? /qonly/ [<list>]
Display ID n/a Unit n/a Return value List of <string
program data>
Suffix p [*RST default value] n/a

List
The size of this list is not constant and depends on the actual context.

Description
Specifies the unit of each currently available I channel scaled measuring range (as given by
IRSLS [8.9.100→143]):

• ”A” (Ampere)

• ”Apk” (Ampere peak)

In general, this list changes whenever IRSLS changes.

8.9.103 IRNG, [:UPPer]

I channel measuring range

Short command IRNG <NRf>
SCPI command [:UPPer] <NRf>
SCPI path :SENSe:CURRent:RANGe[:UPPer] <NRf>
Display ID I Range Unit A Return value <NRf>
Suffix p [*RST default value] n/a

Description
Specifies the selected I channel measuring range. A query always returns the nominal range value.
When setting the range, either the nominal or the scaled value may be used, where the scaled value
includes custom (ISCA [8.9.104→145]) and possibly sensor scaling. If the given (nominal or scaled!) value
matches the nominal value of an available range, that one is selected; otherwise, if the given value
matches the scaled value of an available range, that one is selected. A matching nominal value thus
takes precedence over a matching scaled value. IRNLS [8.9.99→143] provides a list of currently available I
channel ranges or more precisely, their nominal values; IRSLS [8.9.100→143] has the corresponding scaled
values. The user manual includes detailed technical data for each range.

144/206 [Link]
 8 Remote control

8.9.104 ISCA, :SCALe

I channel scaling
Short command ISCA <NRf>
SCPI command :SCALe <NRf>
SCPI path :SENSe:CURRent:SCALe <NRf>
Display ID I Scale Unit n/a Return value <NRf>
Suffix p [*RST default value] 1

Allowed values
-1e6..1e6

Description
Specifies a custom I channel scaling factor. Delay correction is configured via IDLY [8.9.94→141].

A scaling value of zero is not permitted.

8.9.105 FAUTO, :AUTo

Signal filter automatic mode

Short command FAUTO <Boolean>
SCPI command :AUTo <Boolean>
SCPI path :SENSe:FILTer:AUTo <Boolean>
Display ID Auto Filter Unit n/a Return value <Boolean>
Suffix g [*RST default value] 0

Description
If auto filter is enabled, the instrument takes care of selecting appropriate signal filter settings to
adapt to the measured signal. In manual mode (that is FAUTO disabled), the signal filters must
be set up and adapted manually. This setting only takes effect when single path processing is
selected (PROC [8.9.117→149]); the corresponding settings for dual path processing are NFAUTO [8.9.111→147]
and WFAUTO [8.9.118→150].

8.9.106 HPCOF, [:COFRequency]

High pass cutoff frequency

Short command HPCOF <NRf>
SCPI command [:COFRequency] <NRf>
SCPI path :SENSe:FILTer:HPASs[:COFRequency] <NRf>
Display ID High Pass Cut Unit Hz Return value <NRf>
Off
Suffix g [*RST default value] 0.0

Allowed values
0.1..15000

Description
This command sets the cutoff frequency of the highpass filter for single path processing PROC [8.9.117→149].
This setting only takes effect if custom HPFILT [8.9.107→146] is selected with single path processing
(PROC [8.9.117→149]).

[Link] 145/206
 User Manual Instrument Family LMG600

8.9.107 HPFILT, :FSTate

High-pass filter mode

Short command HPFILT <NRi>
SCPI command :FSTate <NRi>
SCPI path :SENSe:FILTer:HPASs:FSTate <NRi>
Display ID High Pass Filter Unit n/a Return value <NRi>
Mode
Suffix g [*RST default value] 0

Allowed values
Following values can be assigned or returned:
0 or ’OFF’: Filter off
1 or ’CUSTom’: Custom digital filter settings

Description
Sets the high-pass filter mode when working with single path processing PROC [8.9.117→149].

8.9.108 LPCOF, [:COFRequency]

Low-pass cutoff frequency

Short command LPCOF <NRf>
SCPI command [:COFRequency] <NRf>
SCPI path :SENSe:FILTer:LPASs[:COFRequency] <NRf>
Display ID Low Pass Cut Unit Hz Return value <NRf>
Off
Suffix g [*RST default value] 2000

Allowed values
0.1..15000

Description
Sets the low-pass filter cutoff frequency when working with single path processing PROC [8.9.117→149].
This setting only takes effect if custom LPFILT [8.9.109→146] is selected with single path processing
(PROC [8.9.117→149]).

8.9.109 LPFILT, :FSTate

Low-pass filter mode

Short command LPFILT <NRi>
SCPI command :FSTate <NRi>
SCPI path :SENSe:FILTer:LPASs:FSTate <NRi>
Display ID Low Pass Filter Unit n/a Return value <NRi>
Mode
Suffix g [*RST default value] 0

Allowed values
Following values can be assigned or returned:
0 or ’OFF’: Filter off
1 or ’WIDe’: Wideband converter
2 or ’NARRow’: Narrowband converter
3 or ’CUSTom’: Custom digital filter settings

Description
Sets the low-pass filter mode when working with single path processing PROC [8.9.117→149].

146/206 [Link]
 8 Remote control

8.9.110 LPTYP, :TYPe

Low Pass Filter Type

Short command LPTYP <NRi>
SCPI command :TYPe <NRi>
SCPI path :SENSe:FILTer:LPASs:TYPe <NRi>
Display ID Low-pass filter Unit n/a Return value <NRi>
type
Suffix g [*RST default value] 1

Allowed values
Following values can be assigned or returned:
1 or ’BESSel’: Bessel filter
2 or ’BUTTerworth’: Butterworth filter
3 or ’CHEByshev’: Chebyshev filter

Description
Sets the low-pass filter type when working with single path processing PROC [8.9.117→149]. This setting
only takes effect if custom LPFILT [8.9.109→146] is selected with single path processing (PROC [8.9.117→149]).

8.9.111 NFAUTO, :AUTo

Narrowband signal filter automatic mode

Short command NFAUTO <Boolean>
SCPI command :AUTo <Boolean>
SCPI path :SENSe:FILTer:NARROWband:AUTo <Boolean>
Display ID Narrow Auto Unit n/a Return value <Boolean>
Filter
Suffix g [*RST default value] 0

Description
If narrow bandwidth auto filter is enabled, the instrument takes care of selecting appropriate narrow
bandwidth signal filter settings to adapt to the measured signal. With auto filter disabled, the
narrow bandwidth filters must be set up and adapted manually. Wide bandwidth auto filter is
configured via WFAUTO [8.9.118→150]. These settings only take effect when dual path processing is selected
PROC [8.9.117→149]; the corresponding setting for single path processing is FAUTO [8.9.105→145].

8.9.112 NHPCOF, [:COFRequency]

High-pass cutoff frequency

Short command NHPCOF <NRf>
SCPI command [:COFRequency] <NRf>
SCPI path :SENSe:FILTer:NARROWband:HPASs[:COFRequency] <NRf>
Display ID Narrow HP Cut Unit Hz Return value <NRf>
Off
Suffix g [*RST default value] 1

Allowed values
0.1..15000

Description
This command sets the cutoff frequency of the highpass filter for the narrowband in dual path
processing (see also PROC [8.9.117→149]). This setting only takes effect if custom NHPFILT [8.9.113→148] is
selected with dual path processing (PROC [8.9.117→149]).

[Link] 147/206
 User Manual Instrument Family LMG600

8.9.113 NHPFILT, :FSTate

Narrow HP Filter Mode

Short command NHPFILT <NRi>
SCPI command :FSTate <NRi>
SCPI path :SENSe:FILTer:NARROWband:HPASs:FSTate <NRi>
Display ID Narrow HP Unit n/a Return value <NRi>
Filter Mode
Suffix g [*RST default value] 0

Allowed values
Following values can be assigned or returned:
0 or ’OFF’: Filter off
1 or ’CUSTom’: Custom digital filter settings

Description
This command sets the highpass filter mode for the narrowband in dual path processing (see also
PROC [8.9.117→149]).

8.9.114 NLPCOF, [:COFRequency]

low pass cut off frequency

Short command NLPCOF <NRf>
SCPI command [:COFRequency] <NRf>
SCPI path :SENSe:FILTer:NARROWband:LPASs[:COFRequency] <NRf>
Display ID Narrow LP Cut Unit Hz Return value <NRf>
Off
Suffix g [*RST default value] 2000

Allowed values
0.1..15000

Description
This command sets the cutoff frequency of the lowpass filter for the narrow band of dual processing.
This setting only takes effect if custom NLPFILT [8.9.115→148] is selected with dual path processing
(PROC [8.9.117→149]).

8.9.115 NLPFILT, :FSTate

Narrowband low-pass filter mode

Short command NLPFILT <NRi>
SCPI command :FSTate <NRi>
SCPI path :SENSe:FILTer:NARROWband:LPASs:FSTate <NRi>
Display ID Narrow LP Unit n/a Return value <NRi>
Filter Mode
Suffix g [*RST default value] 2

Allowed values
Following values can be assigned or returned:
2 or ’NARRow’: Analog filter only
3 or ’CUSTom’: Custom digital filter settings

Description
This command sets the lowpass filter mode for the narrowband in dual path processing (see also
PROC [8.9.117→149]).

148/206 [Link]
 8 Remote control

8.9.116 NLPTYP, :TYPe

Narrow LP Filter Type

Short command NLPTYP <NRi>
SCPI command :TYPe <NRi>
SCPI path :SENSe:FILTer:NARROWband:LPASs:TYPe <NRi>
Display ID Narrowband Unit n/a Return value <NRi>
low-pass filter
type
Suffix g [*RST default value] 1

Allowed values
Following values can be assigned or returned:
1 or ’BESSel’: Bessel filter
2 or ’BUTTerworth’: Butterworth filter
3 or ’CHEByshev’: Chebyshev filter

Description
This command sets the lowpass filter type for the narrowband in dual path processing (see also
PROC [8.9.117→149]). This setting only takes effect if custom NLPFILT [8.9.115→148] is selected with dual path
processing (PROC [8.9.117→149]).

8.9.117 PROC, :PROCessing

Processing mode
Short command PROC <NRi>
SCPI command :PROCessing <NRi>
SCPI path :SENSe:FILTer:PROCessing <NRi>
Display ID Bandwidth Unit n/a Return value <NRi>
Mode
Suffix g [*RST default value] 0

Allowed values
Following values can be assigned or returned:
0 or ’SINGle’: Use a single (narrow or wide bandwidth) converter only
1 or ’DUAL’: Use both narrow and wide bandwidth converters simultaneously

Description
Specifies the processing mode for a group, which provides basic principles as to how signals are sampled
and measurement values are then computed. The valid settings are given by PROCLS [8.9.123→151]. Single
path processing is the default and always available; the availability of dual path processing depends on
the channel type and hardware. When single path operation is selected, only one A/D converter (per
U/I channel) is used at a time and the instrument automatically selects the one that best matches
the given filter settings. As a consequence, there is only a single set of measurement values which (for
convencience) is accessible using both narrowband and wideband suffixes, that is the bandwidth part
of the suffix does not matter. With dual path operation two A/D converters are used simultaneously,
producing two separate sets of measurement values. Each bandwidth can be configured individually
and the measured values may possibly differ depending on the respective settings. Thus the bandwidth
part of the suffix does matter here. See Bandwidth [5.6→62] for an explanation of the underlying
basic concepts.

[Link] 149/206
 User Manual Instrument Family LMG600

8.9.118 WFAUTO, :AUTo

Wideband signal filter automatic mode

Short command WFAUTO <Boolean>
SCPI command :AUTo <Boolean>
SCPI path :SENSe:FILTer:WIDeband:AUTo <Boolean>
Display ID Wide Auto Unit n/a Return value <Boolean>
Filter
Suffix g [*RST default value] 0

Description
If wide bandwidth auto filter is enabled, the instrument takes care of selecting appropriate wide
bandwidth signal filter settings to adapt to the measured signal. With auto filter disabled, the
wide bandwidth filters must be set up and adapted manually. Narrow bandwidth auto filter is
configured via NFAUTO [8.9.111→147]. These settings only take effect when dual path processing is selected
PROC [8.9.117→149]; the corresponding setting for single path processing is FAUTO [8.9.105→145].

8.9.119 WLPFILT, :FSTate

Wideband filter mode

Short command WLPFILT <NRi>
SCPI command :FSTate <NRi>
SCPI path :SENSe:FILTer:WIDeband:LPASs:FSTate <NRi>
Display ID Wide Filter Unit n/a Return value <NRi>
Mode
Suffix g [*RST default value] 0

Allowed values
Following values can be assigned or returned:
0 or ’OFF’: Filter off
1 or ’WIDe’: Wideband converter

Description
This command sets the lowpass filter mode for the wideband in dual path processing (see also
PROC [8.9.117→149]).

8.9.120 GROUP, [:LIST]

Partitioning of power channels into groups

Short command GROUP <NRi>,...
SCPI command [:LIST] <NRi>,...
SCPI path :SENSe:GROuping[:LIST] <NRi>,...
Display ID n/a Unit n/a Return value <NRi>,...
Suffix n/a [*RST default value] n/a

Description
Specifies how the instrument’s power channels are partitioned into groups. Only P channels of the
same type may be grouped together in a single group. Two P channels are of the same type if their
respective CTYP [8.9.124→152] strings are equal. The grouping is specified as a string of comma-separated
positive integers, for instance ”3,3” specifies 2 groups of 3 P channels each for an instrument with 6
P channels in total. Each integer specifies, from left to right, the number of P channels in the group
whose suffix is given by the position of that integer in the string: The first integer specifies the size
of group 1, the second integer specifies the size of group 2, and so forth. P channels are grouped
starting at P channel 1. Every grouping must be complete, that is all P channels must be explicitly
grouped; therefore, the sum of the numbers in a given valid argument string must always be equal to
the number of P channels installed in the instrument. PSI channels cannot be grouped. In general, a
change in the instrument’s grouping will affect many other settings that depend on the number of P

150/206 [Link]
 8 Remote control

channels in a group, their types etc. It is thus advisable to carefully verify all relevant settings after a
grouping has been configured and make sure that they still apply to the measurement task at hand.

8.9.121 HAAL, :AALiasing

Harmonics Anti-Aliasing
Short command HAAL <NRi>
SCPI command :AALiasing <NRi>
SCPI path :SENSe:HARMonics:AALiasing <NRi>
Display ID Aliasing Unit n/a Return value <NRi>
Suffix g [*RST default value] 0

Allowed values
Following values can be assigned or returned:
0 or ’AUTo’: Aliasing is prevented automatically.
1 or ’CUSTom’: Aliasing must be considered/prevented externally by the instrument’s operator.

Description
Determines wether aliasing is prevented automatically or must be taken care of externally by the
instrument’s operator.

8.9.122 INTERHARM, :INTerharm

Number Of Proper Inter harmonics.

Short command INTERHARM <NRi>
SCPI command :INTerharm <NRi>
SCPI path :SENSe:HARMonics:INTerharm <NRi>
Display ID n/a Unit n/a Return value <NRi>
Suffix g [*RST default value] 0

Allowed values
0..19

Description
This command sets the number of proper inter harmonics.

8.9.123 PROCLS, :LPRocessing

List of available processing modes

Short command PROCLS? /qonly/ [<list>]
SCPI command :LPRocessing? /qonly/ [<list>]
SCPI path :SENSe:LPRocessing? /qonly/ [<list>]
Display ID n/a Unit n/a Return value List of <NRi>
Suffix g [*RST default value] n/a

List
The size of this list is not constant and depends on the actual context.

Description
Specifies the available processing modes for a group, depending on the type of its P channel members.
Each element holds a value equal to one of the processing modes specified by PROC [8.9.117→149], which
is also used to set the respective mode for a group. The type of a P channel can be accessed via
CTYP [8.9.124→152]. Single path processing is supported by all P channel types. See Technical data
[3→25] for whether a certain P channel type also supports dual path processing. An explanation of
the underlying basic concepts can be found in Bandwidth [5.6→62].

[Link] 151/206
 User Manual Instrument Family LMG600

8.9.124 CTYP, :TYPe

Channel type
Short command CTYP? /qonly/
SCPI command :TYPe? /qonly/
SCPI path :SENSe:POWer[:CHANnel]:TYPe? /qonly/
Display ID n/a Unit n/a Return value <string program
data>
Suffix p [*RST default value] n/a

Description
Specifies the channel type as a human-readable string. An empty string means that the channel is
not available.

8.9.125 SCNTR, :NTRacks

Number of scope tracks.

Short command SCNTR <NRi>
SCPI command :NTRacks <NRi>
SCPI path :SENSe:SCOPe:NTRacks <NRi>
Display ID n/a Unit n/a Return value <NRi>
Suffix 1, 2, 9, 10, 21, [*RST default value] 1
22, 29

Allowed values
1..8

Description
In general the number of tracks is query only, except for transient scopes where the (variable) number
of tracks affects the available total number of samples per track: the fewer tracks, the more samples
per track.

8.9.126 SCPTRS, :SAMPles

Pretrigger length in samples

Short command SCPTRS <NRi>
SCPI command :SAMPles <NRi>
SCPI path :SENSe:SCOPe:PTRigger:SAMPles <NRi>
Display ID n/a Unit n/a Return value <NRi>
Suffix 1, 2, 9, 10, 21, [*RST default value] 0
22, 29

Description
This command sets the number of samples that are recorded before the trigger event. This is added
to SCPTRT [8.9.127→152].

8.9.127 SCPTRT, [:TIMe]

Pretrigger length in time

Short command SCPTRT <Time>
SCPI command [:TIMe] <Time>
SCPI path :SENSe:SCOPe:PTRigger[:TIMe] <Time>
Display ID n/a Unit s Return value <Time>
Suffix 1, 2, 9, 10, 21, [*RST default value] 0.0
22, 29

152/206 [Link]
 8 Remote control

Description
This command sets the time interval to record samples before the trigger event. This is added to
SCPTRS [8.9.126→152].

8.9.128 SCSR, :SRATe

Scope sampling rate

Short command SCSR <NRf>
SCPI command :SRATe <NRf>
SCPI path :SENSe:SCOPe:SRATe <NRf>
Display ID n/a Unit Hz Return value <NRf>
Suffix 1, 2, 9, 10, 21, [*RST default value] 8000
22, 29

Description
This command sets te sample of a particular scope. If the desired sample rate is not available, the
next higher one is applied, if possible.

8.9.129 SCTRAC, :TRACk

Tracks’ signal sources

Short command SCTRAC <list>,<string program data>
SCPI command :TRACk <list>,<string program data>
SCPI path :SENSe:SCOPe:TRACk <list>,<string program data>
Display ID n/a Unit n/a Return value List of <string
program data>
Suffix 1, 2, 9, 10, 21, [*RST default value] ””
22, 29

Parameter hint
Depending on the suffix, only different strings are allowed.
Suffixes Allowed strings
9, 29 ”a”, ”d”, ”h”, ”i”, ”p”, ”t”, ”u”
1, 2, 10, 21, 22 ”a”, ”d”, ”h”, ”i”, ”p”, ”t”, ”u”

List
8 Elements. Valid numbers are from 0 to 8-1
The range lasts from 0 to number tracks (SCNTR [8.9.125→152]) minus 1 (at most upto 7)

Description
Each element of the array specifies the trace source for the scope track. A trace source is compound of
a sample type and a logical channel number. For the logical channel number see Logical Suffixes
[8.2.4→100]. The sample type determines, if voltage (U), current (I), or power (P) is used. It is not
permitted to set an invalid or non-existing logical channel as a track source. To set the idle mode the
logical channel value zero can be engaged.

8.9.130 WIRE, :WIRing

Physical wiring
Short command WIRE <NRi>
SCPI command :WIRing <NRi>
SCPI path :SENSe:SCOPe:WIRing <NRi>
Display ID Wiring Unit n/a Return value <NRi>
Suffix g [*RST default value] 0

[Link] 153/206
 User Manual Instrument Family LMG600

Allowed values
Following values can be assigned or returned:
0 or ’DIRect’: Direct wiring
1 or ’ARON’: Aron wiring
2 or ’STARstar’: U and I are both wired as star
3 or ’DELTastar’: U is wired as delta and I is wired as star

Description
Specifies the physical wiring of a group’s measuring channels. See Groups [5.1→55] for details.

8.9.131 CYCLMOD, :MODe

Device cycle mode

Short command CYCLMOD <NRi>
SCPI command :MODe <NRi>
SCPI path :SENSe:SWEep:MODe <NRi>
Display ID Cyclemode Unit n/a Return value <NRi>
Suffix n/a [*RST default value] 0

Allowed values
Following values can be assigned or returned:
0 or ’CYCLetime’: Fixed interval, specified by CYCL [8.9.132→154]
1 or ’EXTern’: External signal
2 or ’HARM1’: Harmonics of group 1
3 or ’HARM2’: Harmonics of group 2
4 or ’HARM3’: Harmonics of group 3
5 or ’HARM4’: Harmonics of group 4
6 or ’HARM5’: Harmonics of group 5
7 or ’HARM6’: Harmonics of group 6
8 or ’HARM7’: Harmonics of group 7

Description
Specifies when values are computed.

8.9.132 CYCL, :TIME

Cycle time
Short command CYCL <Time>
SCPI command :TIME <Time>
SCPI path :SENSe:SWEep:TIME <Time>
Display ID Cycle Unit s Return value <Time>
Suffix n/a [*RST default value] 0.5

Allowed values
0.03..60

Description
Specifies the device cycle time. This setting only takes effect if the corresponding cycle mode is
selected (see CYCLMOD [8.9.131→154]).

154/206 [Link]
 8 Remote control

8.9.133 UDLY, :DELay

U channel delay correction

Short command UDLY <Time>
SCPI command :DELay <Time>
SCPI path :SENSe:VOLTage:DELay <Time>
Display ID U Delay Unit s Return value <Time>
Suffix p [*RST default value] 0

Allowed values
-5.5e-6..5.5e-6

Description
Configures a (positive or negative!) correction time to compensate for external delays in the signal
path, e.g. due to a sensor. Note that delay compensation for compatible ZES sensors is done
automatically by the device (using data stored in the sensor’s nonvolatile memory). Gain correction
is configured via USCA [8.9.143→158].

8.9.134 IDNU, :IDENtify

Human-readable U sensor identification

Short command IDNU? /qonly/
SCPI command :IDENtify? /qonly/
SCPI path :SENSe:VOLTage:IDENtify? /qonly/
Display ID n/a Unit n/a Return value <string program
data>
Suffix p [*RST default value] n/a

Description
If no sensor is attached to the channel the string is empty. Otherwise its value consists of 3 comma-
separated fields identifying the sensor:
• Manufacturer
• Model
• Serial Number

8.9.135 UJACK, :JACK

U channel jack
Short command UJACK <NRi>
SCPI command :JACK <NRi>
SCPI path :SENSe:VOLTage:JACK <NRi>
Display ID U Jack Unit n/a Return value <NRi>
Suffix p [*RST default value] 0

Allowed values
Following values can be assigned or returned:
0 or ’USTar’: U* jack
1 or ’USENsor’: U sensor jack

Description
Selects a U channel jack. UJLS [8.9.136→156] provides a list of all currently available jacks or more
precisely, their numeric IDs.

[Link] 155/206
 User Manual Instrument Family LMG600

8.9.136 UJLS, :LJACk

U channel jack list

Short command UJLS? /qonly/ [<list>]
SCPI command :LJACk? /qonly/ [<list>]
SCPI path :SENSe:VOLTage:LJACk? /qonly/ [<list>]
Display ID n/a Unit n/a Return value List of <NRi>
Suffix p [*RST default value] n/a

List
The size of this list is not constant and depends on the actual context.

Description
Specifies the currently available U channel jacks or more preciselym their numeric IDs. See the
documentation for UJACK [8.9.135→155] to decode the values; use UJACK with one of the values to select
the appropriate jack.

8.9.137 UAUTO, :AUTo

U channel auto range

Short command UAUTO <Boolean>
SCPI command :AUTo <Boolean>
SCPI path :SENSe:VOLTage:RANGe:AUTo <Boolean>
Display ID U Auto Range Unit n/a Return value <Boolean>
Suffix p [*RST default value] 1

Description
In manual mode the configured range, if valid, is taken as given and stays fixed until changed by a
configuration command, for instance explicitly by URNG [8.9.142→158] or implicitly by UJACK [8.9.135→155].
With auto range enabled, the instrument monitors the range usage and if necessary automatically
selects an appropriate smaller or larger range in order to best measure the signal applied to the
selected jack, with the same set of ranges available as in manual mode (see URNLS [8.9.138→156]).

8.9.138 URNLS, :LNOMinal

List of nominal U channel ranges

Short command URNLS? /qonly/ [<list>]
SCPI command :LNOMinal? /qonly/ [<list>]
SCPI path :SENSe:VOLTage:RANGe:LNOMinal? /qonly/ [<list>]
Display ID n/a Unit n/a Return value List of <NRf>
Suffix p [*RST default value] n/a

List
The size of this list is not constant and depends on the actual context.

Description
Specifies the currently available U channel measuring ranges or more precisely, their nominal values.
In general, this list changes when a different jack is selected (via UJACK [8.9.135→155]) or a sensor is
connected to the channel, etc. Use URNG [8.9.142→158] with one of the values to select the appropriate
range.

156/206 [Link]
 8 Remote control

8.9.139 URSLS, :LSCaled

List of scaled U channel ranges

Short command URSLS? /qonly/ [<list>]
SCPI command :LSCaled? /qonly/ [<list>]
SCPI path :SENSe:VOLTage:RANGe:LSCaled? /qonly/ [<list>]
Display ID n/a Unit n/a Return value List of <NRf>
Suffix p [*RST default value] n/a

List
The size of this list is not constant and depends on the actual context.

Description
Specifies the currently available U channel measuring ranges including custom (USCA [8.9.143→158]) and
possibly sensor scaling. In general, this list changes when USCA changes, a different jack is selected
(UJACK [8.9.135→155]) or a sensor is connected to the channel, etc. Be aware that when using one of
these scaled values to select a range via URNG [8.9.142→158], a match with a nominal range value takes
precedence. To unambiguously select a range, use its nominal value (see URNLS [8.9.138→156]).

8.9.140 URNULS, :LUNominal

List of units of nominal U channel ranges

Short command URNULS? /qonly/ [<list>]
SCPI command :LUNominal? /qonly/ [<list>]
SCPI path :SENSe:VOLTage:RANGe:LUNominal? /qonly/ [<list>]
Display ID n/a Unit n/a Return value List of <string
program data>
Suffix p [*RST default value] n/a

List
The size of this list is not constant and depends on the actual context.

Description
Specifies the unit of each currently available U channel nominal measuring range (as given by
URNLS [8.9.138→156]):

• ”V” (Volt)
In general, this list changes whenever URNLS changes.

8.9.141 URSULS, :LUSCaled

List of units of scaled U channel ranges

Short command URSULS? /qonly/ [<list>]
SCPI command :LUSCaled? /qonly/ [<list>]
SCPI path :SENSe:VOLTage:RANGe:LUSCaled? /qonly/ [<list>]
Display ID n/a Unit n/a Return value List of <string
program data>
Suffix p [*RST default value] n/a

List
The size of this list is not constant and depends on the actual context.

Description
Specifies the unit of each currently available U channel scaled measuring range (as given by
URSLS [8.9.139→157]):

• ”V” (Volt)
In general, this list changes whenever URSLS changes.

[Link] 157/206
 User Manual Instrument Family LMG600

8.9.142 URNG, [:UPPer]

U channel measuring range

Short command URNG <NRf>
SCPI command [:UPPer] <NRf>
SCPI path :SENSe:VOLTage:RANGe[:UPPer] <NRf>
Display ID U Range Unit V Return value <NRf>
Suffix p [*RST default value] n/a

Description
Specifies the selected U channel measuring range. A query always returns the nominal range value.
When setting the range, either the nominal or the scaled value may be used, where the scaled
value includes custom (USCA [8.9.143→158]) and possibly sensor scaling. If the given (nominal or scaled)
value matches the nominal value of an available range, that one is selected; otherwise, if the given
value matches the scaled value (that is including USCA, among others) of an available range, that
one is selected. A matching nominal value thus takes precedence over a matching scaled value.
URNLS [8.9.138→156] provides a list of currently available U channel ranges or more precisely, their nominal
values. The user manual includes detailed technical data for each range.

8.9.143 USCA, :SCALe

U channel scaling
Short command USCA <NRf>
SCPI command :SCALe <NRf>
SCPI path :SENSe:VOLTage:SCALe <NRf>
Display ID U Scale Unit n/a Return value <NRf>
Suffix p [*RST default value] 1

Allowed values
-1e6..1e6

Description
Specifies a custom U channel scaling factor. Delay correction is configured via UDLY [8.9.133→155].

A scaling value of zero is not permitted.

8.9.144 ZSUP, :ZPReject

Zero suppression
Short command ZSUP <Boolean>
SCPI command :ZPReject <Boolean>
SCPI path :SENSe:ZPReject <Boolean>
Display ID Zero Unit n/a Return value <Boolean>
Suppression
Suffix n/a [*RST default value] 1

Description
Controls the zero suppression for all P channels, except for harmonics values.

8.9.145 INVMASK, :IMASk

Short command INVMASK <NRi>

SCPI command :IMASk <NRi>
SCPI path :STATus:IMASk <NRi>
Display ID n/a Unit n/a Return value <NRi>
Suffix n/a [*RST default value] n/a

158/206 [Link]
 8 Remote control

Allowed values
The bits in the bitfield, starting with bit 0, have following meaning:

0: Normal Group 1
1: Normal Group 2
2: Normal Group 3
3: Normal Group 4
4: Normal Group 5
5: Normal Group 6
6: Normal Group 7
7: Harmonics Group 1
8: Harmonics Group 2
9: Harmonics Group 3
10: Harmonics Group 4
11: Harmonics Group 5
12: Harmonics Group 6
13: Harmonics Group 7
14: Energy Group 1
15: Energy Group 2
16: Energy Group 3
17: Energy Group 4
18: Energy Group 5
19: Energy Group 6
20: Energy Group 7
21: Halfwave Group 1
22: Halfwave Group 2
23: Halfwave Group 3
24: Halfwave Group 4
25: Halfwave Group 5
26: Halfwave Group 6
27: Halfwave Group 7
28: Flicker Group 1
29: Flicker Group 2
30: Flicker Group 3
31: Flicker Group 4
32: Flicker Group 5
33: Flicker Group 6
34: Flicker Group 7
35: PSI Card 1
36: PSI Card 2
37: IF - Scope 1
38: IF - Scope 2
39: IF - Trigger View 9
40: Transient 10
41: GUI - Scope 21
42: GUI - Scope 22
43: GUI - Trigger View 29

Description

This mask is ANDed with the INVALID mask. If the result is non zero, the read buffer (DEC) is
skipped in INIM and continous output.

[Link] 159/206
 User Manual Instrument Family LMG600

8.9.146 IST, :INDividual

Individual Status Query

Short command IST? /qonly/
SCPI command :INDividual? /qonly/
SCPI path :STATus:INDividual? /qonly/
Display ID n/a Unit n/a Return value <Boolean>
Suffix n/a [*RST default value] n/a

Description
This returns the status of the ’ist’ local message in the device. This command is identical to
*IST [8.9.6→112]

8.9.147 SOPT, :PTRansition

Operation Status Positive Transition Register

Short command SOPT
SCPI command :PTRansition
SCPI path :STATus:OPERation:PTRansition
Display ID n/a Unit n/a Return value <NRi>
Suffix n/a [*RST default value] n/a

Description
Sets or reads the operation status positive transition register. If a bit in the SOC register changes
from 0 to 1 and the corresponding bit in the SOPT register is 1, then the corresponding bit in the
SOE register is set to 1.

8.9.148 SPPE, [:ENABle]

parallel Poll Register Enable

Short command SPPE <NRi>
SCPI command [:ENABle] <NRi>
SCPI path :STATus:PPOLl[:ENABle] <NRi>
Display ID n/a Unit n/a Return value <NRi>
Suffix n/a [*RST default value] n/a

Description
Set or read the parallel poll enable register. This command is identical to *PRE [8.9.8→113]

8.9.149 PRES, :PRESet

Short command PRES/nquery/

SCPI command :PRESet/nquery/
SCPI path :STATus:PRESet/nquery/
Display ID n/a Unit n/a Return value n/a
Suffix n/a [*RST default value] n/a

Description
Resets all enable and transition registers to default values.

160/206 [Link]
 8 Remote control

8.9.150 QUESTMASK, :QMASk

Short command QUESTMASK <NRi>

SCPI command :QMASk <NRi>
SCPI path :STATus:QMASk <NRi>
Display ID n/a Unit n/a Return value <NRi>
Suffix n/a [*RST default value] n/a

Allowed values
The bits in the bitfield, starting with bit 0, have following meaning:

0: Normal Group 1
1: Normal Group 2
2: Normal Group 3
3: Normal Group 4
4: Normal Group 5
5: Normal Group 6
6: Normal Group 7
7: Harmonics Group 1
8: Harmonics Group 2
9: Harmonics Group 3
10: Harmonics Group 4
11: Harmonics Group 5
12: Harmonics Group 6
13: Harmonics Group 7
14: Energy Group 1
15: Energy Group 2
16: Energy Group 3
17: Energy Group 4
18: Energy Group 5
19: Energy Group 6
20: Energy Group 7
21: Halfwave Group 1
22: Halfwave Group 2
23: Halfwave Group 3
24: Halfwave Group 4
25: Halfwave Group 5
26: Halfwave Group 6
27: Halfwave Group 7
28: Flicker Group 1
29: Flicker Group 2
30: Flicker Group 3
31: Flicker Group 4
32: Flicker Group 5
33: Flicker Group 6
34: Flicker Group 7
35: PSI Card 1
36: PSI Card 2
37: IF - Scope 1
38: IF - Scope 2
39: IF - Trigger View 9
40: Transient 10
41: GUI - Scope 21
42: GUI - Scope 22
43: GUI - Trigger View 29

[Link] 161/206
 User Manual Instrument Family LMG600

Description
This mask is ANDed with the QUEST mask. If the result is non zero, the read buffer (DEC) is
skipped in INIM and continous output.

8.9.151 SQNT, :NTRansition

Questionable status negitive transition register

Short command SQNT <NRi>
SCPI command :NTRansition <NRi>
SCPI path :STATus:QUEStionable:NTRansition <NRi>
Display ID n/a Unit n/a Return value <NRi>
Suffix n/a [*RST default value] n/a

Description
Sets or reads the questionable status negative transition register. If a bit in the SQC register changes
from 1 to 0 and the corresponding bit in the SQNT register is 1, then the corresponding bit in the
SQE register is set to 1.

8.9.152 SQPT, :PTRansition

Questionable status positive transition register

Short command SQPT <NRi>
SCPI command :PTRansition <NRi>
SCPI path :STATus:QUEStionable:PTRansition <NRi>
Display ID n/a Unit n/a Return value <NRi>
Suffix n/a [*RST default value] n/a

Description
Sets or reads the questionable status positive transition register. If a bit in the SQC register changes
from 0 to 1 and the corresponding bit in the SQPT register is 1, then the corresponding bit in the
SQE register is set to 1.

8.9.153 STB, [:REGister]

Status byte register

Short command STB? /qonly/
SCPI command [:REGister]? /qonly/
SCPI path :STATus[:REGister]? /qonly/
Display ID n/a Unit n/a Return value <NRi>
Suffix n/a [*RST default value] n/a

Allowed values
The bits in the bitfield, starting with bit 0, have following meaning:

1: Extended Status Byte

2: Error Queue not Empty
3: Questionable Status Register
4: Output Queue not Empty
5: Event Status Register
6: Status Byte Enable
7: Operation Status Register

Description
Sets or queries the Status byte register. This command is identical to *STB [8.9.11→114]

162/206 [Link]
 8 Remote control

8.9.154 SRE, [:ENABle]

Service request enable register

Short command SRE <NRi>
SCPI command [:ENABle] <NRi>
SCPI path :STATus:SERVice[:ENABle] <NRi>
Display ID n/a Unit n/a Return value <NRi>
Suffix n/a [*RST default value] n/a

Description
Sets or queries the service request enable register. This command is identical to *SRE [8.9.10→113]

8.9.155 SEQC, :EQCondition

Error queue condition register

Short command SEQC? /qonly/
SCPI command :EQCondition? /qonly/
SCPI path :STATus:SERVice:EQCondition? /qonly/
Display ID n/a Unit n/a Return value <NRi>
Suffix n/a [*RST default value] n/a

Allowed values
The bits in the bitfield, starting with bit 0, have following meaning:

1: The default error queue

2: Error produced in this shell
3: Errors produced in other shells
4: Device Errors
5: Errors produced by apps
6: Errors produced by scripts

Description
Indicates which error queues are not empty.

8.9.156 SEQD, :EQDefault

Error queue default register

Short command SEQD <NRi>
SCPI command :EQDefault <NRi>
SCPI path :STATus:SERVice:EQDefault <NRi>
Display ID n/a Unit n/a Return value <NRi>
Suffix n/a [*RST default value] n/a

Description
Indicates errors of which error queues are copied to the default queue.

8.9.157 SEQE, :EQENable

Error queue enable register

Short command SEQE <NRi>
SCPI command :EQENable <NRi>
SCPI path :STATus:SERVice:EQENable <NRi>
Display ID n/a Unit n/a Return value <NRi>
Suffix n/a [*RST default value] n/a

[Link] 163/206
 User Manual Instrument Family LMG600

Description
Sets or reads the error queue enable register. The bits set, enables the corresponding error queue to
be reported in the STB register.

8.9.158 SREH, :HENable

Service request enable register high byte

Short command SREH <NRi>
SCPI command :HENable <NRi>
SCPI path :STATus:SERVice:HENable <NRi>
Display ID n/a Unit n/a Return value <NRi>
Suffix n/a [*RST default value] n/a

Description
Sets or reads the high byte of the SRE register.

8.9.159 SYSDATE, :DATE

System Date
Short command SYSDATE <Date>
SCPI command :DATE <Date>
SCPI path :SYSTem:DATE <Date>
Display ID System Date Unit n/a Return value <Date>
Suffix n/a [*RST default value] n/a

Description
Reads or sets the system date.

8.9.160 IDN, :DIDentify

Human-readable instrument identification

Short command IDN? /qonly/
SCPI command :DIDentify? /qonly/
SCPI path :SYSTem:DIDentify? /qonly/
Display ID n/a Unit n/a Return value <string program
data>
Suffix n/a [*RST default value] n/a

Description
IDN provides the same information as *IDN [8.9.5→112] but as a correctly quoted SCPI string.

8.9.161 ERRALL, :ALL

Queries all error queues

Short command ERRALL? /qonly/ [<list>]
SCPI command :ALL? /qonly/ [<list>]
SCPI path :SYSTem:ERRor:ALL? /qonly/ [<list>]
Display ID n/a Unit n/a Return value List of
<NRi>,<string
program data>
Suffix n/a [*RST default value] n/a

List
The size of this list is not constant and depends on the actual context.

164/206 [Link]
 8 Remote control

Description
Shows all errors of the error queue and clears this queue. A list with the valid SCPI error codes you
can find in SCPI error messages [8.10→174]

8.9.162 ERRCNT, :COUNt

Queries the error count

Short command ERRCNT? /qonly/
SCPI command :COUNt? /qonly/
SCPI path :SYSTem:ERRor:COUNt? /qonly/
Display ID n/a Unit n/a Return value <NRi>
Suffix n/a [*RST default value] n/a

Description
Reads the number of errors in the error queue.

8.9.163 ERR, [:NEXT]

Fetch the next error from the errorqueue

Short command ERR? /qonly/
SCPI command [:NEXT]? /qonly/
SCPI path :SYSTem:ERRor[:NEXT]? /qonly/
Display ID n/a Unit n/a Return value <NRi>,<string
program data>
Suffix n/a [*RST default value] n/a

Description
Reads the next error from the error queue and removes it from the queue. A list with the valid SCPI
error codes you can find in SCPI error messages [8.10→174]

8.9.164 HEAD, :HEADers

List all SCPI command headers

Short command HEAD? /qonly/ [<list>]
SCPI command :HEADers? /qonly/ [<list>]
SCPI path :SYSTem:HELP:HEADers? /qonly/ [<list>]
Display ID n/a Unit n/a Return value List of <string
program data>
Suffix n/a [*RST default value] n/a

List
The size of this list is not constant and depends on the actual context.

Description
Shows a list of all implemented SCPI commands.

8.9.165 SHEAD, :SHEaders

List all Short command headers

Short command SHEAD? /qonly/ <list>,[<Boolean>]
SCPI command :SHEaders? /qonly/ <list>,[<Boolean>]
SCPI path :SYSTem:HELP:SHEaders? /qonly/ <list>,[<Boolean>]
Display ID n/a Unit n/a Return value List of <string
program data>
Suffix n/a [*RST default value] n/a

[Link] 165/206
 User Manual Instrument Family LMG600

List
The size of this list is not constant and depends on the actual context.

Description
Shows a list of all implemented Short commands.

8.9.166 COMBD, :BAUD

Baud rate
Short command COMBD <NRi>
SCPI command :BAUD <NRi>
SCPI path :SYSTem:INTerface:COM:BAUD <NRi>
Display ID Baud rate Unit n/a Return value <NRi>
Suffix n/a [*RST default value] n/a

Allowed values
Following values can be assigned or returned:
1200 or ’B1200’: 1200 bit/s
2400 or ’B2400’: 2400 bit/s
4800 or ’B4800’: 4800 bit/s
9600 or ’B9600’: 9600 bit/s
19200 or ’B19200’: 19200 bit/s
38400 or ’B38400’: 38400 bit/s
57600 or ’B57600’: 57600 bit/s
115200 or ’B115200’: 115200 bit/s
230400 or ’B230400’: 230400 bit/s

Description
Set the baud rate of RS232 (COM) interface. A successfull changing will be confirmed by the device
with a break sent to the computer. After that the controlling programme must change the baud rate
at the PC and continue. Note: use this command on a single command line.

8.9.167 COMECHO, :ECHo

Echo mode
Short command COMECHO <Boolean>
SCPI command :ECHo <Boolean>
SCPI path :SYSTem:INTerface:COM:ECHo <Boolean>
Display ID Echo mode Unit n/a Return value <Boolean>
Suffix n/a [*RST default value] n/a

Description
De-/Activate character echoing.

8.9.168 COMHFC, :HFControl

Hardware flow control

Short command COMHFC <Boolean>
SCPI command :HFControl <Boolean>
SCPI path :SYSTem:INTerface:COM:HFControl <Boolean>
Display ID Hardware flow Unit n/a Return value <Boolean>
control
Suffix n/a [*RST default value] n/a

Description
De-/Activate Hardware Flow Control (RTS-CTS-Handshake)

166/206 [Link]
 8 Remote control

8.9.169 IPADDR, :ADDRess

IP Address
Short command IPADDR <string program data>
SCPI command :ADDRess <string program data>
SCPI path :SYSTem:INTerface:LAN:ADDRess <string program data>
Display ID IP Address Unit n/a Return value <string program
data>
Suffix n/a [*RST default value] n/a

Description
Specifies the device’s static IP address if DHCP (IPDHCP [8.9.171→167]) is disabled. Otherwise this setting
is ignored.

8.9.170 IPBCAST, :BROadcast

IP broadcast address
Short command IPBCAST <string program data>
SCPI command :BROadcast <string program data>
SCPI path :SYSTem:INTerface:LAN:BROadcast <string program data>
Display ID Broadcast Unit n/a Return value <string program
Address data>
Suffix n/a [*RST default value] n/a

Description
Specifies the IP broadcast address if DHCP (IPDHCP [8.9.171→167]) is disabled. Otherwise this setting is
ignored.

8.9.171 IPDHCP, :DHCProtocol

IP DHCP
Short command IPDHCP <Boolean>
SCPI command :DHCProtocol <Boolean>
SCPI path :SYSTem:INTerface:LAN:DHCProtocol <Boolean>
Display ID DHCP Unit n/a Return value <Boolean>
Suffix n/a [*RST default value] n/a

Description
Specifies whether DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) or a static configuration (see
IPADDR [8.9.169→167]) shall be used to determine the device’s IP network settings.

8.9.172 IPDNSA, :DNSA

IP domain name server 1

Short command IPDNSA <string program data>
SCPI command :DNSA <string program data>
SCPI path :SYSTem:INTerface:LAN:DNSA <string program data>
Display ID Domain Server 1 Unit n/a Return value <string program
data>
Suffix n/a [*RST default value] n/a

Description
Specifies the domain server 1 if DHCP (IPDHCP [8.9.171→167]) is disabled. Otherwise this setting is
ignored.

[Link] 167/206
 User Manual Instrument Family LMG600

8.9.173 IPDNSB, :DNSB

IP domain name server 2

Short command IPDNSB <string program data>
SCPI command :DNSB <string program data>
SCPI path :SYSTem:INTerface:LAN:DNSB <string program data>
Display ID Domain Server 2 Unit n/a Return value <string program
data>
Suffix n/a [*RST default value] n/a

Description
Specifies the domain server 2 if DHCP (IPDHCP [8.9.171→167]) is disabled. Otherwise this setting is
ignored.

8.9.174 IPGATE, :GATeway

IP gateway address
Short command IPGATE <string program data>
SCPI command :GATeway <string program data>
SCPI path :SYSTem:INTerface:LAN:GATeway <string program data>
Display ID Gateway Unit n/a Return value <string program
data>
Suffix n/a [*RST default value] n/a

Description
Specifies the IP address of the default gateway if DHCP (IPDHCP [8.9.171→167]) is disabled. Otherwise
this setting is ignored.

8.9.175 IPMAC, :MACad

MAC address
Short command IPMAC? /qonly/
SCPI command :MACad? /qonly/
SCPI path :SYSTem:INTerface:LAN:MACad? /qonly/
Display ID MAC Address Unit n/a Return value <string program
data>
Suffix n/a [*RST default value] n/a

Description
Provides the MAC address of the LAN interface.

8.9.176 IPMASK, :NETMask

IP netmask
Short command IPMASK <string program data>
SCPI command :NETMask <string program data>
SCPI path :SYSTem:INTerface:LAN:NETMask <string program data>
Display ID Netmask Unit n/a Return value <string program
data>
Suffix n/a [*RST default value] n/a

Description
Specifies the IP network mask if DHCP (IPDHCP [8.9.171→167]) is disabled. Otherwise this setting is
ignored.

168/206 [Link]
 8 Remote control

8.9.177 LANG, :LANGuage

Changes the interface language

Short command LANG/nquery/ <NRi>
SCPI command :LANGuage/nquery/ <NRi>
SCPI path :SYSTem:LANGuage/nquery/ <NRi>
Display ID n/a Unit n/a Return value n/a
Suffix n/a [*RST default value] n/a

Allowed values
Following values can be assigned or returned:
0 or ’SCPI’: The IEEE standard SCPI language. This is the default on startup.
1 or ’SHORt’: The Short language uses the same syntax as SCPI, but shorter commands

Description
Changes the interface language. Available languages are SCPI, Short and Etzel.

8.9.178 TZONELS, :LTIMezone

List of available time zones

Short command TZONELS? /qonly/ [<list>]
SCPI command :LTIMezone? /qonly/ [<list>]
SCPI path :SYSTem:LTIMezone? /qonly/ [<list>]
Display ID n/a Unit n/a Return value List of <string
program data>
Suffix n/a [*RST default value] n/a

List
The size of this list is not constant and depends on the actual context.

Description
Lists the available time zones. To select a time zone, set TZONE [8.9.179→169] to one of these values.

8.9.179 TZONE, :TIMezone

Time zone
Short command TZONE <string program data>
SCPI command :TIMezone <string program data>
SCPI path :SYSTem:TIMezone <string program data>
Display ID n/a Unit n/a Return value <string program
data>
Suffix n/a [*RST default value] n/a

Description
Specifies the time zone. The identifiers of all available time zone are listed in TZONELS [8.9.178→169].

8.9.180 ACTN, [:DEFine]

Defines a Cont-On action

Short command ACTN/nquery/ <string program data>
SCPI command [:DEFine]/nquery/ <string program data>
SCPI path :TRIGger:ACTion[:DEFine]/nquery/ <string program data>
Display ID n/a Unit n/a Return value n/a
Suffix n/a [*RST default value] n/a

[Link] 169/206
 User Manual Instrument Family LMG600

Description
Defines a Cont-On action in SCPI/Short Syntax. The command is followed by a semicolon and a
semicolon separated list of commands, which are considered to be the action to to execute.

8.9.181 IINC, :ICURrent

Short command IINC/nquery/

SCPI command :ICURrent/nquery/
SCPI path :TRIGger:ICURrent/nquery/
Display ID n/a Unit n/a Return value n/a
Suffix n/a [*RST default value] n/a

Description
This command resets the inrush current IINR [8.9.22→117].

8.9.182 TRANSIENTABORT, :TABORT

Short command TRANSIENTABORT/nquery/

SCPI command :TABORT/nquery/
SCPI path :TRIGger:INTerval[:ENERgy]:TABORT/nquery/
Display ID n/a Unit n/a Return value n/a
Suffix n/a [*RST default value] n/a

Description
This Command aborts the recording of the samples for the transient scope.

8.9.183 TRANSIENTSTART, :TSTART

Short command TRANSIENTSTART/nquery/

SCPI command :TSTART/nquery/
SCPI path :TRIGger:INTerval[:ENERgy]:TSTART/nquery/
Display ID n/a Unit n/a Return value n/a
Suffix n/a [*RST default value] n/a

Description
This Command starts the recording of the samples for the transient scope.

8.9.184 SYNCBW, :BANDwidth

Synchronization signal bandwidth

Short command SYNCBW <NRi>
SCPI command :BANDwidth <NRi>
SCPI path :TRIGger[:SEQuence]:BANDwidth <NRi>
Display ID n/a Unit n/a Return value <NRi>
Suffix g [*RST default value] 0

Allowed values
Following values can be assigned or returned:
0 or ’NARRow’: Use configurable software filters to find sync signal
1 or ’WIDe’: Use configurable software comparator to find sync signal
2 or ’FULL’: Use simple hardware comparator to find sync signal

170/206 [Link]
 8 Remote control

Description
When a U or I channel is selected as a group’s SYNC [8.9.191→173] source, this setting specifies the
sample/signal path to use for synchronization. The actual signal measured by that channel is
then (after dedicated preprocessing as appropriate) also used for synchronization. The possible
signal/sample paths differ in their available bandwidth and the fixed and/or optional preprocessing.

• The Narrow Bandwidth synchronization derives from the measured narrow bandwidth
signal. Preprocessing includes amplitude demodulation (TDEM [8.9.185→171]) and/or filtering
(TLPCOF [8.9.189→172], THPCOF [8.9.186→171]). In addition, the sync level (TLEV [8.9.188→172]) and
hysteresis (THYS [8.9.187→172]) can be configured.

• The Wide Bandwidth synchronization derives from the measured wide bandwidth signal. The
sync level (TLEV [8.9.188→172]) and hysteresis (THYS [8.9.187→172]) can be configured.

• The Full Bandwidth synchronization is provided by an HF comparator which directly generates

the sync from the unfiltered input signal applied to the instrument’s input jacks.

See Synchronization [5.9→70] for further explanations; Figure 5.8 [→63] illustrates the various
(synchronization) signal/sample paths of a U/I channel.

8.9.185 TDEM, :DEModulator

Demodulation
Short command TDEM <Boolean>
SCPI command :DEModulator <Boolean>
SCPI path :TRIGger[:SEQuence]:DEModulator <Boolean>
Display ID n/a Unit n/a Return value <Boolean>
Suffix g [*RST default value] 0

Description
Controls the optional demodulation in the narrow bandwidth sync path. Note that this setting only
takes effect when a U or I channel is selected as the group’s sync source (via SYNC [8.9.191→173]) and
the narrow bandwidth path is selected (via SYNCBW [8.9.184→170]). See Synchronization [5.9→70] for
further explanations; Bandwidth [5.6→62] illustrates the various (synchronization) signal/sample
paths of a U/I channel.

8.9.186 THPCOF, [:COFRequency]

High-pass sync filter cutoff frequency

Short command THPCOF <NRf>
SCPI command [:COFRequency] <NRf>
SCPI path :TRIGger[:SEQuence]:HPASs[:COFRequency] <NRf>
Display ID Trigger High Unit Hz Return value <NRf>
Pass Cut Off
Suffix g [*RST default value] 1

Allowed values
0.1..15000

Description
This command sets the cutoff frequency for the hig-hpass filter of the sync signal. The lowpass and
highpass filter of the sync signal work together as a bandpass. The lower cutoff frequency of this
bandpass can be set by THPCOF [8.9.186→171] abd the upper by TLPCOF [8.9.189→172].

[Link] 171/206
 User Manual Instrument Family LMG600

8.9.187 THYS, :HYSTeresis

Trigger hysteresis
Short command THYS <NRf>
SCPI command :HYSTeresis <NRf>
SCPI path :TRIGger[:SEQuence]:HYSTeresis <NRf>
Display ID Trigger Unit % Return value <NRf>
Hysteresis
Suffix g [*RST default value] 2

Allowed values
0.0..100.0

Description
Sets the hysteresis of the extended trigger.

8.9.188 TLEV, :LEVel

Trigger level
Short command TLEV <NRf>
SCPI command :LEVel <NRf>
SCPI path :TRIGger[:SEQuence]:LEVel <NRf>
Display ID Trigger Level Unit % Return value <NRf>
Suffix g [*RST default value] 0

Allowed values
-100.0..100.0

Description
Reads and sets the level of the extended triggers.

8.9.189 TLPCOF, [:COFRequency]

Low-pass sync filter cutoff frequency

Short command TLPCOF <NRf>
SCPI command [:COFRequency] <NRf>
SCPI path :TRIGger[:SEQuence]:LPASs[:COFRequency] <NRf>
Display ID Trigger Low Unit Hz Return value <NRf>
Pass Cut Off
Suffix g [*RST default value] 2000

Allowed values
0.1..15000

Description
This command sets the cutoff frequency for the lowpass filter of the sync signal. The lowpass and
highpass filter of the sync signal work together as a bandpass. The lower cutoff frequency of this
bandpass can be set by THPCOF [8.9.186→171] abd the upper by TLPCOF [8.9.189→172].

8.9.190 SYNCLS, :LSource

List of available synchronization sources

Short command SYNCLS? /qonly/ [<list>]
SCPI command :LSource? /qonly/ [<list>]
SCPI path :TRIGger[:SEQuence]:LSource? /qonly/ [<list>]
Display ID n/a Unit n/a Return value List of <NRi>
Suffix g [*RST default value] n/a

172/206 [Link]
 8 Remote control

List
The size of this list is not constant and depends on the actual context.

Description
List of all currently valid (that is selectable via SYNC [8.9.191→173]) synchronization sources.

8.9.191 SYNC, :SOURce

Synchronization source
Short command SYNC <NRi>
SCPI command :SOURce <NRi>
SCPI path :TRIGger[:SEQuence]:SOURce <NRi>
Display ID Synchronization Unit n/a Return value <NRi>
Source
Suffix g [*RST default value] 2

Allowed values
Following values can be assigned or returned:
0 or ’LINE’: Instrument’s mains power supply frequency
1 or ’EXTS’: Sync Frequency pin of Synchronization connector (see Synchronization
Connector [3.3→26])
2 or ’U1’: U channel 1
3 or ’U2’: U channel 2
4 or ’U3’: U channel 3
5 or ’U4’: U channel 4
6 or ’U5’: U channel 5
7 or ’U6’: U channel 6
8 or ’U7’: U channel 7
9 or ’I1’: I channel 1
10 or ’I2’: I channel 2
11 or ’I3’: I channel 3
12 or ’I4’: I channel 4
13 or ’I5’: I channel 5
14 or ’I6’: I channel 6
15 or ’I7’: I channel 7
16 or ’G1’: Group 1
17 or ’G2’: Group 2
18 or ’G3’: Group 3
19 or ’G4’: Group 4
20 or ’G5’: Group 5
21 or ’G6’: Group 6
22 or ’G7’: Group 7

Description
Selects the synchronization source for a group. An overview of the synchronization subsystem with
further pointers to related sections can be found in Synchronization [5.9→70]. The valid choices
are either one of the following:

• Any U/I channel in the same group. U/I channels of other groups are not permitted (at least
not directly, see next item).

• Any other group that does not synchronize (directly or indirectly) on the current group. The
actual source is determined by the SYNC setting for the selected group, that is it depends on and
follows any changes to that setting! Note that the selected source group may itself synchronize
on another group, and so forth, until a genuine signal source is found.

• Synchronize on the frequency of the instrument’s mains power supply.

[Link] 173/206
 User Manual Instrument Family LMG600

• Synchronize on an ”external” signal applied to the sync frequency pin of the synchronization
connector (see Synchronization Connector [3.3→26]). Note that the pin can also be
configured as an output, in which case the signal is actually an internal one.

8.10 SCPI error messages

-101 Invalid character

Indicates, that an invalid character was sent, propably a ’(’ or ’)’ is missing in a <list>

-103 Invalid separator

Valid separators are only ’,’, ’;’, ’:’ and <EOS>

-110 Command header error

Indicates, that the command does not exist or is misspelled

-200 Execution error

A generic execution error has occured.

-220 Parameter error

An illegal parameter value was encountered.

-221 Settings conflict

Setting could not be executed due to the current device state.

-222 Data out of range

The interpreted value was outside the legal range as defined by the device.

-224 Illegal parameter value

An illegal parameter value was encountered. Expected an exact value from a list of possibles.

-283 Illegal variable name

Variable does not exist.

-310 System error

A system error occured. This generally indicates some unexpected low-level hardware or
software failure that prevents the instrument from working as intended. The device-dependent
part of the error response should provide additional hints as to the underlying cause. Please
contact support for further assistance.

174/206 [Link]
 8 Remote control

8.11 Further error messages

2 tuple index is too large

An element of a tuple is addressed by a format specifier, and the given number is too large to be
represented.
Example 
1 ␣ ( 1 , ␣ 2) ␣{␣”%4294967296$d”␣}
 
A tuple index that is too large to be represented in the executing machine.

14 invalid char ’%1’ in unit symbol

A unit symbol denoting a unit was expected but not found.
Example 
1 ␣1␣ [G] ␣//␣ i n v a l i d ␣1␣ [ [G] ] ␣//␣ v a l i d , ␣custom␣ u n i t
 
The character ’G’ is required to be a predefined unit. To denote a custom unit, bracket it within
[..] again.

15 missing the closing ’]’ for unit symbol

The closing bracket of a backeted unit was expected but not found. This is a sanity check that is
applied on already analyzed code and should normally not fail.

16 missing the closing ’]’ for unit

The closing bracket for a sequence of unit symbols was expected but not found. This is a sanity
check applied on already analyzed code and should normally not fail.

17 already seen slash in unit

The current unit has multiple slashes but only one slash is allowed.
Example 
1 ␣1␣ [m/m/m] ␣//␣ i n v a l i d
 
The first line of this example contains a line that will trigger this error message.

18 unit doesn’t start with a letter or a ’[’

A unit must start with either a letter or an opening bracket which may specify a bracketed unit
symbol or a sequence of multiple symbols. This is a sanity check on already analyzed code that
normally should not occur.

19 name conflicts with built-in variable or function ’%1’ (type ’%2’)

A declaration specifies the name of a built-in variable or function which is not allowed.
Example 
1 ␣ i n t ␣day␣=␣0
 
The built-in function ’day’ is incorrectly declared as a new variable.

20 user declared name ’%1’ conflicts with interface variable name

A declaration specifies the name of an interface variable. Such use would hide potentially
important interface variables and therefor is not allowed.

21 function declarations cannot occur as part of other statements

A function declaration appeared as part of a larger statement or appeared in a block or indented
region (compound statement) which is not allowed.
Example 
1 ␣{␣ void ␣ f ( ) ␣{␣}␣}␣␣ void ␣ f ( ) ␣{␣}␣
 
The function ’f’ was defined within a block in the first and in the second example. In the second
example, the definition was indented, creating an implicit block.

[Link] 175/206
 User Manual Instrument Family LMG600

22 parent statement appears here

Points to the parent statement that a function is illegally nested in.

23 parent (compound statement) appears here

Points to the block that a function is illegally nested in.

24 can’t convert expression type ’%1’ to return type ’%2’

The expression specified by a return statement is not compatible with the return type of its
function.
Example 
1 ␣ func ␣ f ( ) ␣{␣ r e t u r n ␣42␣}␣
 
The ’func’ type can only be initialized with functions and not by an ’int’.

25 unresolved label reference to ’%1’

A goto statement was encountered that jumps to an undeclared label.
Example 
1 ␣ void ␣ f ( ) ␣{␣␣␣␣ goto ␣ ext ␣␣␣␣ e x i t : ␣” should ␣jump␣ here ”␣}␣
 
The label ’ext’ was not declared in function.

26 ambiguous label reference to ’%1’

A goto statement used an identifier without a namespace and multiple matching labels were
found.
Example 
1 ␣ void ␣ f ( ) ␣{␣␣␣␣a : bar : ␣␣␣␣b : bar : ␣␣␣␣␣ goto ␣ bar ␣}␣
 
The base identifier ’bar’ occured multiple times.

27 parameter ’%1’ must have a default argument

A default argument was specified for a function parameter, and some or all of the remaining
parameters don’t have default arguments.
Example 
1 ␣ void ␣ f ( i ␣=␣ 0 , ␣ j ) ␣{␣}
 
In this example, ’i’ has a default argument, but ’j’ does not.

28 the builtin function ’%1’ doesn’t accept %2 arguments.

A builtin function was used that doesn’t accept the given number of arguments.

29 variable declaration must have initializer

An initializer can only be omitted for parameter- and foreach iteration variables.
Example 
1 ␣ i n t ␣ i ␣//␣ missing ␣ i n i t i a l i z e r
 
The given variable declaration is not valid

30 variable or parameter has nested auto type

The type specifier ’auto’ is not allowed to be specified as the type of array or tuple elements.
Example 
1 ␣ ( ( auto , ␣ i n t ) ) ␣v␣=␣ ( 1 , ␣ 2) ␣ auto ␣v␣=␣ ( 1 , ␣ 2) ␣//␣ c o r r e c t
 
The ’auto’ specifier was incorrectly used in this example.

176/206 [Link]
 8 Remote control

31 variable or parameter has void type

A variable or parameter cannot have the type ’void’.
Example 
1 ␣ void ␣v␣=␣x␣ auto ␣v␣=␣x␣//␣ v a l i d
 
The ’void’ type for ’v’ is not valid. Use ’auto’ if the type of ’x’ is unknown.

32 can’t convert expression type ’%1’ to variable type ’%2’

Cannot convert the type of the initializing expression to the declared variable type.
Example 
1 ␣ ( ( in t , ␣ func ) ) ␣v␣=␣0
 
This example requires default initialization for a ’func’ value, which is not possible.

33 can’t convert default argument type ’%1’ to parameter type ’%2’

Cannot convert the type of the default argument expression to the declared parameter type.
Example 
1 ␣ void ␣ f ( ( in t , ␣ func ) ␣a␣=␣ 0) ␣{␣}
 
This example would require default initialization for a ’func’ value, which is not possible.

34 duplicate parameter name ’%1’

The same parameter name was specified multiple times for the same function.

35 static variables can only be declared in functions

The variable classifier ’static’ was used outside of a function declaration.
Example 
1 ␣ s t a t i c ␣ i n t ␣v␣=␣0
 
This example declares ’v’ outside of a function. There is no meaning defined for that declaration.

36 static variable’s name conflicts with another declaration

The name of ’static’ variables cannot be the same as the name of any other locally declared
name.
Example 
1 ␣ void ␣ f ( v ) ␣{␣ s t a t i c ␣ i n t ␣v␣=␣0␣}
 
This example reuses the name of a function parameter for the name of a static variable.

37 conflicts with local name declared here

Points to the local declaration that conflicts with a new static declaration.

38 local name conflicts with another declaration

A locally declared name conflicts with the name of a static variable.
Example 
1 ␣ void ␣ f ( ) ␣{␣ s t a t i c ␣ i n t ␣v␣=␣ 0 , ␣enum␣v␣{␣w␣=␣0␣}␣}
 
This example reuses the name of a static variable as the name of an enumeration.

39 conflicts with static variable declared here

Points to the static declaration that a new local name conflicts with.

[Link] 177/206
 User Manual Instrument Family LMG600

40 storage class ’%1’ cannot be used for local variables

The given storage class was used for an in-function variable. You must declare the variable
outside the function.
Example 
1 ␣ void ␣ f ( ) ␣{␣ out ␣ i n t ␣ i ␣=␣0␣}
 
This example uses the storage class ’out’ within a function.

41 the given type is not valid for a variable of this storage class
Variables with storage class ’env’ and ’out’ can only have type ’int’, ’string’, ’float’, ’date’ or be
one-dimensional arrays of these.

42 array type ’%1’ has a non-constant or invalid size and cannot be used with this variable’s
storage class
Any array variable that is exported by out, share has to have a constant size.

43 the given visibility ’private’ is not valid for a variable of this storage class
Variables with storage class ’env, ’share’ and ’out’ cannot be declared ’private’. Only script or
shell internal variables may be declared that way.

44 the visibility specifiers ’private’ and ’public’ are both specified

A variable is either script internal (’private’) or is exported to outside of a script or the shell
(’public’).

45 more than one storage class was given to variable ’%1’

The given variable was specified with multiple storage classes.

46 the visibility ’public’ cannot be used for a local variable

Variables declared inside a function cannot be declared with ’public’ visibility.

47 initializer for enumerator ’%1’ has non-int type ’%2’

The type of the initializing expression of an enumerator has a type different from ’int’ which is
not allowed.
Example 
1 ␣enum␣E␣{␣A␣=␣”0” ␣}
 
The value specified for ’A’ is a string. No implicit conversions are performed to convert it to ’int’.

48 namespaces are not allowed on enumerator ’%1’

The given enumerator has a namespace in its identifier. But enumerators must be plain base
identifiers.
Example 
1 ␣enum␣E␣{␣My: Enumerator␣}
 
This example shows an illegal use of namespaces when declaring enumerator ”My:Enumerator”.

49 enumerator ’%1’ conflicts with previous enumerator

Two enumerators of the same enumeration cannot have the same name.
Example 
1 ␣enum␣E␣{␣A, ␣A␣}
 
The enumerator name ’A’ was specified twice. Use a different name for each enumerator of ’E’.

50 previous enumerator name here

Points to the previous enumerator name that was illegally used for another enumerator.

178/206 [Link]
 8 Remote control

51 variable channel expression must be prefixed by a dollar

The channel expression given contains underscores or colons, thus referring to a variable. Such a
channel expression must be prefixed by one or more a dollar characters.

52 $N, $# and $@ may only be used inside function declarations

A special name was used outside of functions but is only meaningful inside functions.

53 can’t use dollar indirection on a func value

The dollar character was applied to a value of type ’func’.

54 invalid use of a pattern

A pattern string was used where no pattern is allowed

55 limit types aren’t numeric

The limit or the step values are of a non-numeric type.
Example 
1 ␣ var ␣ [ ” 1 ” ␣ . . ␣ 2 ]
 
In this example, the start of the range has a non-numeric type.

56 index expression type ’%1’ is not of type int

The given subscript values don’t have the type ’int’ and can therefor not be interpreted as
subscripts.
Example 
1 ␣ var [ ” 1 ” ]
 
In this example, the index has a string type. Remove the quotes to address the second element.

57 expected an array or string for the index operator, but got a ’%1’
The left operand of a bracket-index operation is expected to be an array or string but the value
has neither type.
Example 
1 ␣ 2 0 0 9 : 1 : 1 d␣ [V]
 
In this example, a value of type ’data’ was supplied for the index operand. The bracketed
expression is a unit only for int and float constants.

58 invalid operand type ’%1’ for unary operator ’%2’

The given unary operator was applied to an operand value for which it is not defined.
Example 
1 ␣~␣” value ”
 
In this example, a string value was passed as the operand of the bitwise complement operator,
which only accepts integers.

59 modifiable operand required for unary operator ’%1’

The given unary operator may modify its operand and requires it to be modifiable.
Example 
1 ␣1␣++
 
This example tries to increment the ’1’.

[Link] 179/206
 User Manual Instrument Family LMG600

60 can’t boolean-convert operand type ’%1’ for unary operator ’%2’

The given operator cannot evaluate the operand as a boolean value.
Example 
1 ␣ ! day
 
This example tries to logically negate the built-in function ’day’.

61 cannot cast from ’%1’ to ’%2’

The target type specified cannot interpret the given source value under the given target type.
Example 
1 ␣ ( func ) ␣0
 
This example tries to cast an ’int’ to a ’func’, for which no meaning is defined.

62 format can only be applied when casting to ’date’

A format string can only be used when casting to a ’date’ type.
Example 
1 ␣ ( s t r i n g : ␣”%d”) ␣42
 
This example tries to specify a format for a conversion to string, which is not valid.

63 invalid operand types ’%1’ and ’%2’ for binary operator ’%3’
The given binary operator was applied to two operand values for which it is not defined.
Example 
1 ␣”1” ␣*␣ ”2”
 
In this example, two string values are multiplied, which is not valid. One or both of the operands
must be numeric.

64 can’t boolean-convert condition of type ’%1’

A value was used in a context that requires it to be evaluated as a boolean, but the value
couldn’t be interpreted as a boolean.
Example 
1 ␣ void ␣ f ( ) ␣{␣ i f ( $0 ) ␣{␣” should ␣ not ␣work”␣}␣}
 
In this example, a ’func’ value was used as the condition of the ’if’ statement, which cannot be
converted to a boolean.

65 assignment requires a modifiable left operand

An assignment can only be done to bit-references, string-references or variables, but the operand
given is something else.
Example 
1 ␣ f ( ) ␣=␣0
 
In this example, the result value of a function call was tried to be changed.

66 can’t convert intermediary result of ’%1 %2 %3’ to left operand type ’%4’ in assignment
A compound assignment of the form ’a OP= b’ could not convert the type of ’A OP B’ back to
the type of ’a’.
Example 
1 ␣a␣+=␣b
 
If the types of ’a’ and ’b’ are known at compile time, and the result of ’a + b’ is not convertible
to the type of ’a’, this will raise that error.

180/206 [Link]
 8 Remote control

67 can’t convert right operand type ’%1’ to left operand type ’%2’ in assignment
An assignment could not convert the value to the type of the modified operand.
Example 
1 ␣a␣=␣0
 
If the type of ’a’ is known at compile time, and ’int’ is not convertible to the type of ’a’, this will
raise that error.

68 to assign to a public (non-shell) variable, ’:=’ instead of ’=’ must be used

An assignment to a public variable did use ’=’ but is not allowed to, for safety reasons.

69 to assign to a private (shell) variable, ’=’ instead of ’:=’ must be used

An assignment to a private (shell specific) variable did use ’:=’ but is not allowed to, for safety
reasons.

70 can’t iterate over a void expression

The expression in a for-each loop is of type ’void’, which is not allowed.
Example 
1 ␣ f o r ( i ␣ i n ␣ ( void ) x ) ␣{␣␣␣␣ . . . ␣}
 
In this example, a ’void’ value is supplied as the sequence to iterate over.

71 foreach variable cannot have an initializer

The variable declared as the foreach iteration variable cannot have an initializer. For regularly
entered code, this error cannot appear.

72 goto and labels can only be used inside functions

A goto or a label was found outside of a function declaration.
Example 
1 ␣ goto ␣ e x i t , ␣ e x i t : ␣” stopped ”
 
In this example, a goto statement and a label was used outside of a function.

73 label ’%1’ was already declared

A label was redeclared which is not legal.
Example 
1 ␣ void ␣ f ( ) ␣{␣␣␣␣ goto ␣ e x i t ␣␣␣␣ e x i t : ␣” stopped ”␣␣␣␣ e x i t : ␣” r e d e c l a r e d ”␣}
 
In this example, two labels with the same name were supplied.

74 previous declaration was here

Points to the previous label declaration whose identifier was illegally reused for another label.

75 jumping into a for-each loop body is forbidden

A goto statement that jumps into the body of a foreach loop is not permitted.
Example 
1 ␣ void ␣ f ( ) ␣{␣␣␣␣ goto ␣body␣␣␣␣ f o r ( i ␣ i n ␣ ( 1 , ␣ 2 , ␣ 3) ) ␣␣␣␣␣␣␣body : ␣ i ␣␣␣␣␣␣␣ goto ␣ e x i t ␣␣␣␣ e x i t : ␣ r e t u r n ␣}
 
In this example, the jump to ’body’ crosses the loop header, which is not allowed. The jump to
’exit’ is legal.

76 cases can only be used in a switch

A case label can only be used within a switch statement but appeared outside.
Example 
1 ␣ switch ( v ) ␣␣␣␣ c a s e ␣ 0 : ␣ r e t u r n ␣ c a s e ␣ 1 : ␣ r e t u r n ␣
 
In this example, the case label for ’1’ appears not within a switch statement.

[Link] 181/206
 User Manual Instrument Family LMG600

77 operand of icase has non-string type ’%1’

An icase label expression must have type ’string’.
Example 
1 ␣ switch ( v ) ␣␣␣␣ i c a s e ␣ 0 : ␣ r e t u r n
 
In this example, the operand of ’icase’ has type ’int’. Use ’case’ instead of ’icase’ for such a value.
No implicit conversion to string is considered

78 the ’default’ label can only be used in a switch

A default label can only be used within a switch statement but appeared outside.
Example 
1 ␣ switch ( v ) ␣␣␣␣ i c a s e ␣ 0 : ␣ r e t u r n ␣ d e f a u l t : ␣ r e t u r n
 
In this example, the ’default’ label does not appear within a ’switch’ statement.

79 there already was a default label for this switch

A default label was specified multiple times for the same switch statement.

80 duplicate case value

A constant integer value was specified as a case label multiple times for the same switch
statement which is not permitted.

81 no loop or switch that can be broken out

A break statement appeared outside of a switch, while, for or foreach loop.
Example 
1 ␣ void ␣ f ( ) ␣{␣ i f ( v ) ␣ break ␣}
 
This ’break’ statement doesn’t appear within a loop. To return from function ’f’, use the ’return’
statement.

82 too high break level ’%1’. There are only %2 enclosing loops and switches
The break level exceeds the number of enclosing switch, while, for and foreach loops.
Example 
1 ␣ while ( 1 ) ␣␣␣␣ i f ( v ) ␣ break ␣2
 
This example wants to break out of the second-most enclosing loop, but there is only one
enclosing loop.

83 no loop that can be continued

A continue statement appeared outside of a while, for or foreach loop.

84 too high continue level ’%1’. There are only %2 enclosing loops
The continue level exceeds the number of enclosing while, for and foreach loops.

85 ’return’ cannot be used outside functions

A return statement was specified outside of any function.

86 return without a value cannot be used in function ’%1’ with return type ’%2’
A return statement without a value can only be used in functions with return type of ’auto’ and
’void’.

87 the event expression contains an invalid operation or operand

The event expression for when, whenever or wait can only contain certain operands.

88 the event operator ’&|’ cannot appear outside when, whenever or wait.
The operator was used within a normal expression. Only within the three event statements, it
has a special meaning.

182/206 [Link]
 8 Remote control

90 the given dec name is not a simple base identifier.

A dec name shall be a simple identifier without namespaces.

91 redirection specification is invalid for this on-event statement

The redirection was eithe missing or the script-kind was incompatible with the given redirection.

92 action missing for script statement

This error is given for code like ’cont name’. An action, like ’on’, ’off’, or a redirection should be
given.

93 an error occured while waiting for measurand buffer ’%1’

This error could have several causes. It should normally not occur.
This is an internal error. Please inform ZES about it.
94 a script can only contain one toplevel statement
This error occurs if a script contains invalid statements in it.
This is an internal error. Please inform ZES about it.
95 missing a processmode command line option
This error occurs if a compiler input contains no script header and no hint as to how process
that file.
This is an internal error. Please inform ZES about it.
96 missing or invalid name given for script statement
This error occurs for example in ”cont @>1”.

97 when doing a script/cont/log %1, no dec can be specified

This error occurs if a dec name was given to a ’sync’ or ’off’ action of a script statement.

98 this script statement needs code to execute

This error occurs when defining a new script without providing code or values to evaluate in the
script.

99 this script statement does not accept an action specification

This error occurs when providing code for a script statement that does not accept actions.

100 array type ’%1’ has void element type

The type specifier of an array element cannot be ’void’ because ’void’ has no data meaning.

101 void type used in tuple ’%1’

The type specifier of a tuple element cannot be ’void’ because ’void’ has no data meaning.

102 codegen for ’%1’ isn’t supported yet

The software does not support the specified feature yet.

103 statement node ’%1’ isn’t supported yet

The software does not support the specified feature yet.

104 expression node ’%1’ isn’t supported yet

The software does not support the specified feature yet.

105 declaration node ’%1’ isn’t supported yet

The software does not support the specified feature yet.

106 internal error: trying to build a tmo_t timestamp failed.

This is an internal error that should never occur.

107 expected pragma directive

A directive (”ts”, ”error”, ”warning”) was expected after ’#pragma ’, but wasn’t found.

[Link] 183/206
 User Manual Instrument Family LMG600

108 unknown pragma directive

An unsupported pragma directive appeared after ’#pragma ’.

109 pragma directive ill-formed

A ’#pragma ’ directive wasn’t in the expected form.

110 trailing garbage in pragma directive

There were unexpected trailing characters after a ’#pragma ’ directive.

111 pragma directive can’t be assigned

An equal-sign was used in a directive that doesn’t accept an assignment.

112 pragma directive isn’t a command

An argument was given to a pragma directive that expecrted an equal sign.

113 invalid value for assignment

The form of the assigned value isn’t accepted by the executed directive.

114 tabstop-width can only be changed outside indent blocks

The ’#pragma ts’ directive can only be used outside indent blocks, as it changes the
indent-width of tabstops.
Example 
1 ␣ i f ( v ) ␣␣␣␣x␣␣␣␣#pragma␣ t s ␣=␣4␣
 
This example changes the tab-width to 4 spaces, but the change is invalid as it is done while
being in an indented block.

115 %s
This is an error risen by an etzel script by the use of the ’#pragma error’ directive.
Example 
1 ␣#pragma␣ e r r o r ␣” This␣ s c r i p t ␣ s h a l l ␣ not ␣be␣ used ”
 
This will output the desired error message.

116 %s
This is a warning risen by an etzel script by the use of the ’#pragma warning’ directive.
Example 
1 ␣#pragma␣warning␣” This␣ s c r i p t ␣ s h a l l ␣ not ␣be␣ used ”
 
This will output the desired warning message.

117 maximal amount of block indents reached

There were too many nested indent blocks (more than 255). The code could not be processed
any further.
Example 
1 ␣ i f ( a ) ␣␣␣␣b␣␣␣␣ i f ( c ) ␣␣␣␣␣␣␣b␣␣␣␣␣␣␣ . . . ␣
 
If this goes on like shown, it will at one point raise the given error message.

118 no matching indent found at column %d

The column indentation at the end of an indent block did not match the column indentation at
the start of the block.
Example 
1 ␣ i f ( a ) ␣␣␣␣b␣␣␣c␣
 
In this example, ’c’ appeared on a different indentation than both ’b’ and ’if’, so that it’s not
clear to what block ’c’ belongs to.

184/206 [Link]
 8 Remote control

119 next lowest indent is at column %d

Points to the nearest legal previous indent level that a block can be dedented to.

120 unterminated /@ ... @/!

There was a nesting comment that wasn’t terminated correctly.

121 unterminated /* ... */!

There was a non-nesting comment that wasn’t terminated correctly.

122 invalid utf8 string-literal

A string literal in the source code does not conform to any valid UTF-8 sequence, which could
mean that the source code is partially corrupted.

123 unterminated string literal

A newline was encountered before the closing ’ or ” was given.

124 incomplete escape sequence

A string contained an escape sequence starting with a backslash, but didn’t specify the kind of
escape.

125 unknown escape sequence

The escape sequence given after a backslash isn’t valid.

126 no closing bracket for unit specification

A bracket to terminate a bracketed unit was expected but not found.

127 invalid character ’%c’ in unit specification

An invalid character was encountered while processing a unit specification.

128 month must be between 1 and 12, but ’%d’ was given
A month specified in a date constant for an absolute date, like ”[Link]”, was outside the
allowed range (in this case, it was zero).

129 year or month is missing for date constant

An absolute date was specified using the ’D’ character after the days, but the year or month
was missing. It’s not clear what month or year shall be assumed.

130 gmt offset must be a 4 digit number specifying a concatenated hour and minute offset.
A GMT offset was provided for a date constant that was too long, too short or the value was
out of range.

131 a time literal cannot specify a gmt offset

A GMT offset was specified in a date literal for a time, but is not allowed on it. If an addition
is intended, the addition operator must be separated by a whitespace from the time literal.

132 overflow occured in integer constant ’%s’

The lexical representation of the integer was too long to be represented as a machine integer.

133 overflow occured in floating point constant ’%s’

The value is either too small or too large to be represented as a 64-bit floating-point number

134 illegal character ’%c’

A character whose meaning could not be determined appeared in the source code.

135 %s
A general syntax error occured while parsing the code.

[Link] 185/206
 User Manual Instrument Family LMG600

136 index ’%1’ is out of bounds (valid index range is %2..%3)

An array, tuple, string or bit-index value given was out of bounds for the value indexed into.

137 array size is non-integral or out of range

An array size must be non-negative (it may be zero), not greater than 2^31 bits and must be of
type ’int’.

138 %1 is not supported yet

The software doesn’t support the given feature yet.

139 invalid expansion of a default argument into multiple parameters

This happens when a default argument for a parameter expands to multiple parameter
positions.
Example 
1 ␣ i n t ␣a [ 2 ] ␣=␣0␣ void ␣ f ( ( in t , ␣ i n t ) ␣a␣=␣a [ . . ] ) ␣{␣}␣//␣ i n v a l i d ␣ void ␣ f ( ( i n t , ␣ i n t ) ␣a␣=␣ ( a [ . . ] ) ) ␣{␣}␣//␣ v a l
 
The first function definition will raise the error. You can wrap parentheses around the default
argument to pass it as a tuple instead of two arguments.

140 cannot undef the given entity

This happens when the referenced entity is not registered in a symbol table to be removed
from.
Example 
1 ␣ void ␣ f ( i n t ␣a ) ␣{␣ i n t ␣x␣=␣1␣ undef ␣$$x␣}
 
In this example, a positional parameter reference was tried to be undeclared. Positions are not
declared, thus they cannot be undeclared.

141 cannot undef entity ’%1’

Refer to the description of the previous diagnostic.

142 invalid regular expression for ’lsvar’ builtin function

If an invalid regular expression was specified as argument of ’lsvar’, this error is given.

143 the builtin function ’%1’ cannot be called dynamically

If the given builtin function is called through a string indirection like ’$1()’, this error is given.
Such builtin functions can only be used statically, like ’typeof’ and ’isdef’.

144 an error occured when reading a public variable

When the read of a variable from the interface fails, this error is output.

145 an error occured when reading public variable ’%1’

When the reading the given public variable ’%1’, an error occured.

146 an error occured when writing to a public variable

When an error occurs while trying to write to a variable, this error is given. Possibly, the
variable’s value can only be queried.

147 an error occured while committing the new configuration or acknowledging the completion.
This error is risen when at the end of a line or during an explicit opc, wai or ack, gtl, len, cls or
preset statement or query, an error occurs while applying the new configuration.

148 the channel value ’%1’ could be not regognized

This happens when an invalid channel-suffix was used with an interface variable.

186/206 [Link]
 8 Remote control

149 no stream redirection available for acknowledging a config commit

This error is given when there is no current redirection into a stream number when doing an
opcq, waiq or ack.

150 unsupported conversion specifier ’%1’ for type ’%2’

The given conversion specifier is not supported for a value of the given type.

151 unsupported conversion specifier

The given conversion specifier is unsupported.

152 unexpected end of format specifier

The end of a format specifier was reached, but no conversion specifier was found.

153 unmatched ’(’ for date specifier

An unmatched opening parenthesis for a date format specifier was encountered.

154 invalid date format ’%1’ (’%2’)

A date format specified as a format string wasn’t well-formed.

155 error opening file ’%1’ for redirection

The given file could not be opened as a target for redirection.

156 non-string variable ’%1’ cannot be redirected to

The given variable cannot be used as a target for redirection.

157 cannot redirect binary data into a string

This error message is given if printing in binary mode while a string redirection is active.
Change the mode by setting fmt:mode to fmt:ascii and try printing again.

158 static variable conflicts with local variable ’%1’

A declaration of a static variable conflicts with the already present (implicit) declaration of a
non-static local variable.

160 initializer for enumerator must be of type ’int’

The initializer for an enumerator must be of type ’int’. Even a convertible value is not
permitted.

161 cannot overdeclare or undeclare an enumerator

An enumerator cannot be overdeclared or undeclared. Its enumeration needs to be overdeclared
or undeclared instead.

162 enumerator name ’%1’ (in namespace ’%2’) conflicts with previously declared name
An enumerator name cannot overdeclare a previously declared name. Undeclare the previous
name explicitly, and then repeat the declaration of its enumeration.

164 variable is already used as an iterator

A variable used as an iteration variable in a nesting foreach loop cannot be used as an iteration
variable in a nested foreach loop.

165 iterator variables cannot be overdeclared or undeclared

An iteration variable cannot be overdeclared or undeclared until the corresponding loop exits.

166 only variables can be used as iterators

A name that was specified as an iteration variable was looked up to a non-variable, which is not
permitted.

[Link] 187/206
 User Manual Instrument Family LMG600

167 references can’t be used as iterator variables

A reference parameter cannot be used as an iteration variable of a foreach loop.

168 invalid operand(s) to operator ’%1’

An invalid operand to the given binary or unary operator was given.

169 invalid operand to unary operator ’%1’ (’%2’)

An invalid operand to the given unary operator was given.

170 invalid operands to binary operator ’%1’ (’%2’ and ’%3’)

An invalid operand to the given binary operator was given.

171 tuple element has type void

A value of type ’void’ was put into a tuple, which is not allowed.

172 functions can’t be assigned to

An attempt was made to assign a value to a function.

173 enumerations can’t be assigned to

An attempt was made to treat an enumeration declaration as a modifiable variable.

174 enumerators can’t be assigned to

An attempt was made to modify the value of an enumerator.

175 assignment from ’%1’ to variable type ’%2’ failed

The assignment from the given value failed, because its type was not compatible with the
target variable.

176 too few arguments for call to ’%1’ (expected %2, passed %3)
A function was called with too few arguments, and the function had no or not enough default
arguments available.

177 exceeded recursion limit for call to ’%1’

Too many recursively nested function calls have been made.

178 range limit ’%1’ has non-numeric type

The given range limit value has a non-numeric type (neither of type ’int’, nor of type ’float’)

179 index range limit ’%1’ has non-int type

The given range limit value has a non-int type and is used as an index

180 range step is zero

The step size of a range is zero, which is not permitted.

181 indirection resulted in invalid identifier ’%1’

If an indirection was performed using a string variable, the string value is interpreted as an
identifier. If the value does not result in a valid identifier, this error is risen.

182 element index ’%1’ has non-int type

An array or tuple index value was missing or was not of type ’int’. This error message is also
emitted where a tuple element of non-int type was used.

183 multiple, no indices or invalid range given for a string variable

Writing to a string variable, only one index or index range (without a step and only forward)
can be given.

188/206 [Link]
 8 Remote control

184 selecting an element for passing by-reference arguments requires one index of type ’int’
This error occurs when a non-int index value was used. References can only be passed when
using simple int indices. No tuple indices are allowed.

185 a by-ref parameter requires exactly one element to be bound

This error occurs when passing an argument by reference but the argument expands not to a
single variable. References can only be passed when using simple int indices. This error can
also occur when applying indexing on a tuple of variables.
Example 
1 ␣ void ␣ f ( i n t ␣a [ ] ) ␣{␣}␣ i n t ␣a [ 2 ] [ 2 ] ␣=␣0␣ f ( a [ 0 , ␣ 1 ] ) ␣ f ( ( a [ 0 ] , ␣a [ 1 ] )@( 0 ) )
 
Both calls in this example are invalid.

186 string elements can’t be bound to

Attempted to pass a string element as a reference variable to a function.

187 bit references can’t be bound to

Attempted to pass a bit reference as a reference variable to a function.

188 can only bind references to variables

Attemtped to pass an entity that isn’t a variable to a reference parameter of a function.

189 functions can’t be selected upon

Attempted to perform an element or bit selection upon a function.

190 can’t read from an enumeration

Attempted to read a value from an enumeration declaration.

191 enumerations don’t have a type; can’t apply typeof

When typeof was applied to an enumeration name, this error is printed.

192 the result of a bit-selection cannot be used as an operand of binary ’#’, ’[]’ or ’@’.
Applying any of the operators that can yield modifiable values upon the result of a bit-selection
is not allowed.
Example 
1 ␣ ( a#i )#j ␣
 
In the shown example, the ’#’ operator was applied to another ’#’ operator.

193 can’t write to builtin-variable ’%1’

Certain builtin variables, like PI, cannot be written to. This error is risen if there is an attempt
to do that.

194 builtin-variable ’%1’ stores an invalid value ’%2’

The given builtin variable can only store certain values, and its value is not among those.

195 can’t convert initializer ’%1’ to type ’%2’

The initializer of a variable couldn’t be converted to the variable’s type.

196 can’t convert value ’%1’ to return type ’%2’

The expression of a return statement couldn’t be converted to the functions’ return type.

197 conversion from ’%1’ to ’%2’ failed

In a context that required the conversion of the given value to the given type, the conversion
did not succeed.

[Link] 189/206
 User Manual Instrument Family LMG600

198 can’t convert ’%1’ to parameter type ’%2’

The type of a function argument couldn’t be converted to the type of the corresponding
parameter.

199 can’t convert ’%1’ to array element-type ’%2’

An error occured while trying to convert an array initializer element to the array element type

200 can’t initialize a non-array using braces

This error occurs if the { ... } syntax is used to initialize an array variable or to cast to a
non-array type.

201 inner arrays must have a size when initialized by an initializer list
If a two dimensional array is initialized, all except the most outer dimension must have explicit
sizes specified.

202 can’t boolean-convert operand(s) of ’%1’

In a context that requires the conversion of one or more operands of the given operator to a
boolean value, the conversion failed.

203 can’t bind variable storing the value ’%1’ to reference parameter of type ’%2’
An argument for a parameter that accepts its argument by-reference was incompatible with the
parameter’s type.
Example 
1 ␣ void ␣ f ( i n t ␣a [ 2 ] ) ␣{␣}␣ i n t ␣a [ 3 ] ␣=␣0␣ f ( a )
 
The call passes an array of 3 elements to a parameter array having 2 elements. To not depend
on the size of the argument array, don’t specify a size in the parameter array type.

204 undeclared symbol ’%1’

The given name could not be found in the current scope.

205 symbol ’%1’ found in multiple namespaces (%2)

The given unqualified identifier was found in multiple namespaces.

206 positional parameter ’$%1’ is out of bounds (valid index range is %2..%3)
A reference to the positional parameter at the given position is not valid because it’s out of
bounds.

207 invalid lookup result used for indirection with unary operator ’$’
An invalid lookup result was used with ’$’-style indirection (like a function, or enumeration
name).

208 can’t over- or undeclare builtin entity ’%1’

This error is risen if a builtin variable or function is tried to be erased or overdeclared.

209 failure to create the script

A script given by an on-event statement cannot be created.

210 failure to create the script ’%1’

A script given by an on-event statement cannot be created.

211 invalid value ’%1’ used for name in the on-event statement
The name given for a on-event statement must be a valid identifier.

212 error while starting/stopping, or removing all ’%1’ on-events.

The action that was tried on the given script types failed to execute.

190/206 [Link]
 8 Remote control

213 error while starting/stopping,removing or changing the default redirection of the script with
name ’%1’.
The action that was tried on the given script name failed to execute.

214 A ’require’ statement can only be used for scripts.

A ’require’ statement was used with a script-kind which isn’t of type ’script’.

215 A ’list’ statement failed for unknown reasons.

If receiving the present scripts fails, this error is risen.
This is an internal error. Please inform ZES about it.
216 A ’require’ statement failed.
A require Statement, that is intended to specify the scripts that the current script depends on,
failed to execute correctly.

217 A policy value was given as a non-string, non-int, non-float, non-array and non-tuple value.
The policy interface only accepts a small subset of etzel values. Those that don’t make sense as
policy values are forbidden. Examples are function pointers or ’void’ values.

218 A ’policy’ statement failed.

A policy statement, which is intended to set certain properties of a script, failed to execute
correctly.

219 initializer value ’%v’ for enumerator ’%s’ has non-int type
The type of the initializing expression of an enumerator has a type different from ’int’ which is
not allowed.

220 can’t call non-function

A function call tried to call something that’s not a function.

221 Error while loading the runtime support-module: ’%1’.

The runtime support module needed to execute etzel code wasn’t found or was in error.
This is an internal error. Please inform ZES about it.
222 Error while receiving the code of the on-event statement!
On-event statements (cont on, script on, app on and conf on) are compiled separately. When
receiving their code to be compiled results in an error, this message is given.
This is an internal error. Please inform ZES about it.
223 An error occurred while generating the executable code of an etzel script (detailed error:
%1).
This error occurs if writing an executable etzel code image fails. This may indicate severe
resource problems.
This is an internal error. Please inform ZES about it.
224 An error occurred while opening the output file: ’%1’
This error occurs if during the generation of executable code for a script fails.
This is an internal error. Please inform ZES about it.
225 An error occurred while initializing the shell. (detailed error: ’%1’)
This error occurs if initialization of the etzel shell fails.
This is an internal error. Please inform ZES about it.

8.12 Remote examples

In the following section one can find examples how a typical communication can look like.

[Link] 191/206
 User Manual Instrument Family LMG600

8.12.1 Reading sample values of an event

The following example sets up, that the smallband voltage of channel 1 in group 1 as well as the
corresponding current should be recorded with maximum record rate and no pretrigger:
 
1 s y s t : lang ␣ s h o r t ␣␣␣␣␣␣#␣ switch ␣ to ␣ s h o r t ␣ language ␣ i f ␣ not ␣ a l r e a d y ␣done
2 s c t r a c 1 0 ␣ 0 ,” U1111”␣␣␣#␣ scope ␣ 10 , ␣ t r a c k ␣0␣ i s ␣u1111
3 s c t r a c 1 0 ␣ 1 ,” I1111 ”␣␣␣#␣ scope ␣ 10 , ␣ t r a c k ␣1␣ i s ␣ i1111
4 s c s r 1 0 ␣1200000␣␣␣␣␣␣␣#␣ scope ␣ 10 , ␣ r e c o r d ␣ r a t e ␣ 1 . 2MS/ s
5 s c p t r t 1 0 ␣0␣␣␣␣␣␣␣␣␣␣␣#␣ scope ␣ 10 , ␣ p r e t r i g g e r ␣0
6 #wait ␣ f o r ␣ event
7 t r a n s i e n t s t a r t ␣␣␣␣␣␣␣#␣ s t a r t ␣ r e c o r d i n g
8 s p s t a t 1 0 ?␣␣␣␣␣␣␣␣␣␣␣␣#␣ p o l l ␣ u n t i l ␣answer␣>=␣5
9
10 copy␣␣␣␣␣␣␣␣␣␣␣␣␣␣␣␣␣#␣Copy␣ data ␣ to ␣ output ␣ b u f f e r
11 spval10 ?␣ 0 , ( 0 : 4 9 ) ␣␣␣␣#␣Read␣ scope ␣ 10 , ␣ t r a c k ␣ 0 , ␣ samples ␣0␣ to ␣49
12 spval10 ?␣ 1 , ( 0 : 4 9 ) ␣␣␣␣#␣Read␣ scope ␣ 10 , ␣ t r a c k ␣ 1 , ␣ samples ␣0␣ to ␣49
 
Instead of 50 values per each track also the maximum possible value per track can be requested.

192/206 [Link]
 Index

Index

:CFACtor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Symbols :DC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
* commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 :FFACtor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
+Inf. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 :INRush . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
- - - - - - . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 :MAXPk. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117
-Inf. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 :MINPk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
# . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 :PPEak . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
ᚆ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 :RECTify . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
ᚊ. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17 [:TRMS] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
DualPath processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 :FETCh[:SCALar]:FREQuency
}ISensor /}I jacks :HARMonics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
measurement ranges . . . . . . . . . . . 32, 36, 39 [:CYCLe] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
}I*/}I jacks :FETCh[:SCALar]:HARMonics:
measurement ranges . . . . . . . . . . . 32, 36, 39 CURRent
}USensor /}U jacks :AMPLitude. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120
measurement ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 :BIMaginary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
}U*/}U jacks :BREal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120
measurement ranges . . . . . . . . . . . 31, 36, 39 :PHASe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
^^^^^^ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 :RMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
<Boolean> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102, 103 :THDistort . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
<Date> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102, 103 :FETCh[:SCALar]:HARMonics:
<NRf> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102, 103 POWer
<NRi> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102, 103 :ACTive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
<Time> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102, 103 :APParent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
<string program data> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102, 103 :REACtive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
<list> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 :FETCh[:SCALar]:HARMonics:
Δ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 POWer:PERiod
⅄ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 :DISTortion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
* :LENGth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
*ACK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 :NUM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123
*CLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 :PNUMber . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
*ESE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 :FETCh[:SCALar]:HARMonics:
*ESR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 POWer:SUM
*IDN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 :ACTive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
*IST. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112 :APParent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
*OPC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 :REACtive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
*PRE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 :TOTReactive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
*RST. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113 :FETCh[:SCALar]:HARMonics[:
*SRE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 VOLTage]
*STB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 :AMPLitude. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .126
*TRG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 :BIMaginary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
*TST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 :BREal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .127
*WAI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 :PHASe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
*ZLANG. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115 :RMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
*ZSRST. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115 :THDistort . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
: :FETCh[:SCALar]:POWer
:DISPlay :APParent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
:BRIGhtness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 :FPACtor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
:FETCh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 :ICAPacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
:FETCh[:SCALar]:CURRent :PHASe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
:AC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 :REACtive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130

[Link] 193/206
 User Manual Instrument Family LMG600

[:ACTive] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 [:TRMS] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119

:FETCh[:SCALar]:RESistance :READ[:SCALar]:FREQuency
:ASResist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 :HARMonics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
:IMPedance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 [:CYCLe] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
:RSIMpedance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 :READ[:SCALar]:HARMonics:
:FETCh[:SCALar]:SCOPe CURRent
:CLENgth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 :AMPLitude. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120
:NTRacks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131 :BIMaginary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
:SRATe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 :BREal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120
:STATus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 :PHASe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
:TLENgth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 :RMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
:TPOSition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 :THDistort . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
:VALues . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 :READ[:SCALar]:HARMonics:
:FETCh[:SCALar]:SCOPe:PTRigger POWer
:SAMPles. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132 :ACTive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
[:TIMe] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 :APParent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
:FETCh[:SCALar]:SLOTs:CONFig :REACtive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
:TIMestamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 :READ[:SCALar]:HARMonics:
:FETCh[:SCALar]:SLOTs: POWer:PERiod
HARMonics :DISTortion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
:DURation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 :LENGth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
:TIMestamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 :NUM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123
:FETCh[:SCALar]:SLOTs:NORMal :PNUMber . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
:DURation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 :READ[:SCALar]:HARMonics:
:TIMestamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 POWer:SUM
:FETCh[:SCALar]:SLOTs:SCOPe :ACTive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
:DURation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 :APParent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
:TIMestamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 :REACtive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
:FETCh[:SCALar][:VOLTage] :TOTReactive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
:AC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 :READ[:SCALar]:HARMonics[:
:CFACtor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 VOLTage]
:DC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 :AMPLitude. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .126
:FFACtor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 :BIMaginary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
:MAXPk. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .138 :BREal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .127
:MINPk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 :PHASe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
:PPEak . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 :RMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
:RECTify . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 :THDistort . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
[:TRMS] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 :READ[:SCALar]:POWer
:FORMat :APParent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
:DATa. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .139 :FPACtor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
:GTL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 :ICAPacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
:INITiate :PHASe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
:CONTinuous . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 :REACtive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
:COPY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .140 [:ACTive] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
:IMMediate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 :READ[:SCALar]:RESistance
:INPut :ASResist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
:COUPling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 :IMPedance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
:READ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 :RSIMpedance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
:READ[:SCALar]:CURRent :READ[:SCALar]:SCOPe
:AC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 :CLENgth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
:CFACtor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 :NTRacks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131
:DC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 :SRATe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
:FFACtor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 :STATus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
:INRush . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 :TLENgth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
:MAXPk. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117 :TPOSition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
:MINPk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 :VALues . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
:PPEak . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 :READ[:SCALar]:SCOPe:PTRigger
:RECTify . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 :SAMPles. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132

194/206 [Link]
 Index

[:TIMe] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 :SENSe:FILTer:NARROWband:

:READ[:SCALar]:SLOTs:CONFig LPASs
:TIMestamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 :FSTate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
:READ[:SCALar]:SLOTs: :TYPe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
HARMonics [:COFRequency] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
:DURation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 :SENSe:FILTer:WIDeband
:TIMestamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 :AUTo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
:READ[:SCALar]:SLOTs:NORMal :SENSe:FILTer:WIDeband:LPASs
:DURation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 :FSTate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
:TIMestamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 :SENSe:GROuping
:READ[:SCALar]:SLOTs:SCOPe [:LIST] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
:DURation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 :SENSe:HARMonics
:TIMestamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 :AALiasing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
:READ[:SCALar][:VOLTage] :INTerharm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
:AC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 :SENSe:POWer[:CHANnel]
:CFACtor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 :TYPe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
:DC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 :SENSe:SCOPe
:FFACtor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 :NTRacks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152
:MAXPk. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .138 :SRATe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
:MINPk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 :TRACk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
:PPEak . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 :WIRing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
:RECTify . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 :SENSe:SCOPe:PTRigger
[:TRMS] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 :SAMPles. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152
[:TIMe] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
:SENSe
:SENSe:SWEep
:LPRocessing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .151
:MODe. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .154
:ZPReject . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
:TIME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
:SENSe:AVERage
:SENSe:VOLTage
:COUNt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
:DELay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
:SENSe:CURRent
:IDENtify . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
:DELay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
:JACK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
:IDENtify . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
:LJACk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
:JACK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
:SCALe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
:LJACk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
:SENSe:VOLTage:RANGe
:SCALe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 :AUTo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
:SENSe:CURRent:RANGe :LNOMinal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
:AUTo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 :LSCaled. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .157
:LNOMinal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 :LUNominal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
:LSCaled. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .143 :LUSCaled. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .157
:LUNominal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 [:UPPer] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
:LUSCaled. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .144 :STATus
[:UPPer] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 :IMASk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
:SENSe:FILTer :INDividual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
:AUTo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 :PRESet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
:PROCessing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 :QMASk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
:SENSe:FILTer:HPASs [:REGister] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
:FSTate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 :STATus:OPERation
[:COFRequency] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 :PTRansition. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .160
:SENSe:FILTer:LPASs :STATus:PPOLl
:FSTate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 [:ENABle] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
:TYPe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 :STATus:QUEStionable
[:COFRequency] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 :NTRansition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
:SENSe:FILTer:NARROWband :PTRansition. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .162
:AUTo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 :STATus:SERVice
:SENSe:FILTer:NARROWband: :EQCondition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
HPASs :EQDefault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
:FSTate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 :EQENable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
[:COFRequency] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 :HENable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164

[Link] 195/206
 User Manual Instrument Family LMG600

[:ENABle] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163 [ACTIONS] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46, 92

:SYSTem actions menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
:DATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164 <Active List> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
:DIDentify. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .164 ACTN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
:LANGuage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169 <Add> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
:LTIMezone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169 <Add folder>. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93, 94
:TIMezone. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169 <Adjust Now> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
:SYSTem:ERRor adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
:ALL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164 touchscreen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
:COUNt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 <Advanced> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
[:NEXT] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 air filter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51
:SYSTem:HELP air inputs/outputs
:HEADers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 clearance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
:SHEaders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 aliasing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64
:SYSTem:INTerface:COM altitude . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
:BAUD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166 analog inputs
:ECHo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166 bandwidth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
:HFControl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166 fast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
:SYSTem:INTerface:LAN full scale value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
:ADDRess . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 input impedance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
:BROadcast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 input resistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
:DHCProtocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 overload capability . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40, 41
:DNSA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 pins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
:DNSB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168 resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
:GATeway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168 slow. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40
:MACad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168 uncertainty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
:NETMask . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168 analog outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
:TRIGger full scale value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
:ICURrent. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .170 output impedance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
:TRIGger:ACTion output load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
[:DEFine] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169 overload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
:TRIGger:INTerval[:ENERgy] pins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
:TABORT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170 resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
:TSTART . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170 uncertainty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
:TRIGger[:SEQuence] anti aliasing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
:BANDwidth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170 [APPS]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46, 80
:DEModulator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171 aron circuit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57, 61
:HYSTeresis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172 <Arrange>. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85
:LEVel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172 <Arrange:> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
:LSource . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172 arrows keys. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46
:SOURce . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173 ASCII . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:HPASs assistance
[:COFRequency] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171 technical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:LPASs asterisk commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
[:COFRequency] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172 <Auto Filter> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89, 90
0.0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 <Auto Range> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
0.00000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 auxiliary supply
1φ 2W . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 processing signal interface
1φ 3W . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 speed/torque/frequency inputs.44
2φ 3W . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 AVER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
3φ 3W . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57, 58 <Average> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
3φ 4W . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58

B
A [BACK] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46, 78, 89, 90
access of the measurement values . . . . . 14 bandwidth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13, 28, 32, 36, 62
accuracy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29, 34, 38 narrow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
*ACK. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111 processing signal interface
<Action> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 analog inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40

196/206 [Link]
 Index

wide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Error queue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111

<Bandwidth>. . . . . . . . . .82, 84, 85, 90, 93 Event register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
base plug-in module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 clearance to air inputs and outputs . . . 25
basic concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 closed switch
basic instrument . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 processing signal interface
battery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50 switching outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
<Baud> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 *CLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
BIAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 CMRR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31, 35, 39
BIIM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 COMBD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166
bin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65, 66 COMECHO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
BIPH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 COMHFC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
BIRE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 command names
BPAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 SCPI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
BQAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 short. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98
<Brightness> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 commands
BSAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 * . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
BUAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 asterisk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
bug report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 star . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
BUIM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 <Comment> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
BUPH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 common-mode rejection ratio . 31, 35, 39
BURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
condensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
conditions
C
environmental . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
C-values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65, 82
<Configure Values>. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93
calculated values
uncertainty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
calculation of harmonics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 measurement circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
calculations power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
parallel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 protective conductor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 connector
[CANCEL] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46, 78 female . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
capacity against earth male . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
L60-CH-A1 I* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 synchronization. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
L60-CH-A1 Isensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 CONT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
L60-CH-A1 U* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 CONT ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
L60-CH-A1 Usensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 timing behavior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
L60-CH-B1 I* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 conversion
L60-CH-B1 Isensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 star to delta . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
L60-CH-B1 U* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 cooling inputs/outputs
L60-CH-C1 I* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 clearance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
L60-CH-C1 Isensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 <Copy> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93, 94
L60-CH-C1 U* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 COPY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
caution <Create> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 <Create & Start> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
<Change Setup> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 <Create report> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
changes CTYP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
preview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78 [CURRENT] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78–81, 83, 85
<Channel>. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90 current channel
[CHANNEL]. . . . . . . . . . . .46, 77, 79, 86, 90 L60-CH-A1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
channel menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 L60-CH-B1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
channel plug-in modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 L60-CH-C1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
channels <Cursor A> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
sum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 <Cursor B> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
circuit cursor keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
delta . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 <Cursors> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
star . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 [CUSTOM] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 CYCL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Clear <Cycle>. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86

[Link] 197/206
 User Manual Instrument Family LMG600

CYCLMOD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154 EN 61000-3-x . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66

EN 61000-4-7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66, 68
EN 61000-4-7 Ed. 2.0 . . . . . . . . . . 29, 34, 38
D EN 61000-4-x . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 EN 61010 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17–19, 49
danger EN 61010-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
electric shock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 EN 61326-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
high temperatures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 <Enabled> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 [ENERGY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 [ENTER] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46, 53, 78, 86
<Date> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 entering values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
<Date>. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102, 103 environmental conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
[DEFAULT] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78, 80–82 equipment ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
degree ERR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
pollution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 ERRALL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
degree of ingress protection . . . . . . . . . . . 25 ERRCNT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
<Delay I>. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92 error messages
<Delay U>. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92 further . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
delta circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 SCPI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
delta conversion. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60 Error queue
<Demodulation> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 Clear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
DHCP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 *ESE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111
<DHCP> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 *ESR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
dialogs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 EUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
differential signals Event register
processing signal interface Clear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
speed/torque/frequency inputs.44 [EXECUTE] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46, 92
dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 <Execute Now> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
<Directory> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 <Export> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
DISB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 <Export key> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
<Display> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
display of values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 F
distance to air inputs and outputs . . . . 25 fast analog inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
dual bandwidth mode. . . . . . . . . .28, 32, 36 fault
dual processing function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
signal filter setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 FAUTO. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .145
duration FCYC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
DURHARM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 female connector. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
DURNORM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 :FETCh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
DURSP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .136 FHARM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119
DVI interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 <File>. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93
files tab
storage menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
E filter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64
earth terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
<Echo> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 <Filter> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89, 90
<Edit> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 fixed function keys. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
elements Fixed function keys. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76
base plug-in module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 <Flow Control (RTS/CTS))> . . . . . . . . 87
channel plug-in modules . . . . . . . . . . . 48 [FREEZE] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46, 94
front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 frequency inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
rear panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 frequency range
EMC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 processing signal interface
EN 60320-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25 speed/torque/frequency inputs.44
EN 61000-3-12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 Fresnel diagram. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83, 86
EN 61000-3-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25, 65, 68 FRMT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
EN 61000-3-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25 front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45

198/206 [Link]
 Index

full scale value HPFILT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146

processing signal interface HTL signals
analog inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 processing signal interface
analog outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 speed/torque/frequency inputs.44
function fault. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52 HUHD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128
functional block diagrams. . . . . . . . . . . . . .62 humidity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
further <Hysteresis> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
fuse
mains supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 I
fuses. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51 [I/O]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81
IAC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
IAUTO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
G ICF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
gaps IDC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
measurement without. . . . . . . . . . . . . .71 IDLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
<Gateway> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 IDN. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .164
general . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 *IDN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
general GUI handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 IDNI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
general tab IDNU. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155
instr. menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 IEC 17025 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
<Goto Local> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 IEC 60127-2 sheet 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
graph IEC 60320-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
trend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 IEC 61000-3-12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
[GRAPH] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80, 83 IEC 61000-3-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65, 68
graph menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 IEC 61000-3-x. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66
graphical user interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 IEC 61000-4-7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66, 68
<Group>. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86 IEC 61000-4-7 Ed. 2.0 . . . . . . . . . 29, 34, 38
GROUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 IEC 61000-4-x. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66
[GROUP] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46, 77, 86, 88 IEC 61010 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17–19
group menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 IEC 61010-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
<Grouping> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 IFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 IHRMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
GTL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 IINC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
GUI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75, 97 IINR. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117
general handling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75 IJACK. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142
IJLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
IMAX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
H IMIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
H-values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65, 83 <Import key> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
HAAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151 INCA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
<Harmonic> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 <Index> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
harmonics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 Inf. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
spectrum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 information
<Harmonics>. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83, 89 symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
harmonics calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 ingress protection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
harmonics spectrum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 INIM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107, 140
HEAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 input
[HELP]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46 ASCII . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
<High-pass> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 input format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
HIHD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .121 input impedance
hints L60-CH-A1 I* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 L60-CH-A1 Isensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
HNUM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 L60-CH-A1 U* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
<HP Freq> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89, 90 L60-CH-A1 Usensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
<HP State> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89, 90 L60-CH-B1 I* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
HPCOF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 L60-CH-B1 Isensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
HPERLEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 L60-CH-B1 U* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
HPERNUM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124 L60-CH-C1 I* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39

[Link] 199/206
 User Manual Instrument Family LMG600

L60-CH-C1 Isensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 IRSULS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144

L60-CH-C1 U* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 ISCA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
processing signal interface ISO 17025 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
analog inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 IST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
input resistance *IST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
processing signal interface ITRMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
analog inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
speed/torque/frequency inputs.44
input signal J
processing signal interface <Jack> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
switching inputs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43 jacks
synchronization. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27 }ISensor /}I
inputs measurement ranges . . . . 32, 36, 39
analog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 }I*/}I
fast analog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 measurement ranges . . . . 32, 36, 39
frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 }USensor /}U
speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 measurement ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
switching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 }U*/}U
torque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 measurement ranges . . . . 31, 36, 39
inst. menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22, 45
K
installing instrument . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
[INSTR.] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46, 53, 86
arrows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
instr. menu
Execute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
general tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87
fixed function keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
measurement tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Freeze . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
interface
Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
DVI. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27
select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
parallel configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
soft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
soft keys. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
standby . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
user . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 tabs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
VGA. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27 touch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Interface <Key> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
LAN. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109 <Keyboard> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
RS232 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
interface languages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
interface settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87 L
interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 L6-OPT-DVI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
INTERHARM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151 L6-OPT-HRM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
interharmonics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 L6-OPT-PSI. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40
introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 L6-OPT-SDC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
INVMASK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 L60-CH-A1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27, 31, 32
<IP Address> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 L60-CH-B1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32, 36
IPADDR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 L60-CH-C1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36, 39
IPBCAST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 L60-X-ADSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
IPDHCP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 LAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
IPDNSA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 LANG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
IPDNSB. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .168 language
IPGATE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .168 interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97
IPMAC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .168 <Level> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
IPMASK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168 <Licenses>. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86
IPP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
IREC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 list
IRNG. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .144 syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
IRNLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 <list> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
IRNULS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 log tab
IRSLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 storage menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93

200/206 [Link]
 Index

logical suffix. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100 power. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81

<Low-pass>. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90 setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
<LP Freq> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89, 90 standard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
<LP State>. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89, 90 voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
<LP Type>. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89, 90 [MISC.] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81, 86
LPCOF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 misc. menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
LPFILT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .146 <Modify> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
LPTYP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147

N
M NaN. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79, 100, 103
<m> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 narrow bandwidth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
main supply fuse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 <Netmask> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
mains supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 new features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13
mains supply voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 NFAUTO. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147
maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 NHPCOF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
<Maintenance Mode> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 NHPFILT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
male connector. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17 NLPCOF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
manual NLPFILT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148
organization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 NLPTYP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
PDF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 not a number. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79
<Map To Execute Key> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 <NRf> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102, 103
measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 <Boolean> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102, 103
without gaps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 <NRi> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102, 103
measurement accuracy. . . . . . . . .29, 34, 38
measurement channel
L60-CH-A1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27, 31, 32 O
L60-CH-B1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32, 36 <Odd Only> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
L60-CH-C1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36, 39 <Once> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
measurement circuit *OPC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 opened switch
measurement duration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 processing signal interface
measurement error . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29, 34, 38 switching outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
measurement menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
measurement ranges. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90 option
}ISensor /}I jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . 32, 36, 39 L6-OPT-DVI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
}I*/}I jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32, 36, 39 L6-OPT-HRM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
}USensor /}U jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 L6-OPT-PSI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
}U*/}U jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31, 36, 39 L6-OPT-SDC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
measurement tab L60-X-ADSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
instr. menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
measurement uncertainty . 29, 34, 38, 72 organization
measuring different types of values manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
simultaneously . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 oscilloscope. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71, 84
menu output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
actions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92 ASCII . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 binary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
graph . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 output impedance
group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 processing signal interface
inst.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86 analog outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
instr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86, 87 output load
misc.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86 processing signal interface
sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 analog outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92–94 output signal
menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 synchronization. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27
current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 outputs
default. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81 analog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
energy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 switching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 overload

[Link] 201/206
 User Manual Instrument Family LMG600

processing signal interface <Preview> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78

analog outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 preview mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
speed/torque/frequency inputs.44 PROC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
switching inputs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43 processing
switching outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 dual. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62
overload capability <Processing> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
L60-CH-A1 I* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 processing signal interface
L60-CH-A1 Isensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 analog inputs
L60-CH-A1 U* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 bandwidth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
L60-CH-A1 Usensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 full scale value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
L60-CH-B1 I* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 input impedance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
L60-CH-B1 Isensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 input resistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
L60-CH-B1 U* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 overload capability . . . . . . . . . . 40, 41
L60-CH-C1 I* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 pins. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40
L60-CH-C1 Isensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
L60-CH-C1 U* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 uncertainty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
processing signal interface analog outputs
analog inputs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40, 41 full scale value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
overvoltage output impedance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
category . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 output load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
temporary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 overload. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42
transient . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 pins. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41
resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
uncertainty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
P speed/torque/frequency inputs
P . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 auxiliary supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
parallel calculations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 differential signals. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44
parallel configuration frequency range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 HTL signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
parallel measurement of narrow and wide input resistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
bandwidth values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 overload. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44
<Paste>. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93, 94 pins. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44
<Pause> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 RS422 signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
PC software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 TTL signals. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44
PDF manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 uncertainty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
PF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 switching inputs
PHARM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 input signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
<Phase> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 overload. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43
<Phase/Link> . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81, 84, 85, 93 pins. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43
PHI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 switching outputs
pins closed switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
processing signal interface opened switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
analog inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 overload. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42
analog outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 pins. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42
speed/torque/frequency inputs.44 reverse polarity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
switching inputs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43 processing signal interface L6-OPT-PSI
switching outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 40
plot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83, 85 PROCLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
pollution degree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 properties
[POWER] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80, 81 sticky . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
power measurement channel protective conductor
L60-CH-A1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
L60-CH-B1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 protective conductor terminal . . . . . . . . . 17
L60-CH-C1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 protective earth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
power supply
connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
power switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 Q
*PRE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 Q . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
PRES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 QHARM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125

202/206 [Link]
 Index

QTOT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 SCTRAC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153

QUESTMASK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161 select key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
<Select U/I> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
<Selected Interface>. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87
R <Selected Table> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
<Range>. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85, 91 <Sensor> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
<Range of rows> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 sensor menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 SEQC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
ratings SEQD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .163
equipment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22 SEQE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
:READ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 settings
rear panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87
reference instruments signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
requirements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50 sync . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
references. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18 touchscreen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
remote commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 <Settings> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
remote examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191 setup menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
<Remove>. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93, 94 SHARM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
<Remove Mapping> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 SHEAD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165
<Rename> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93, 94 short command names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
report <Signal> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
bug . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
<Signal Coupling> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
requirements for reference instruments
Signal filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28, 33, 37
50
signal filter setting dual processing . . . 90
resolution
signal filter setting single processing. .89
processing signal interface
signal settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
analog inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
simultaneous measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
analog outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
single processing
reverse polarity
signal filter setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
processing signal interface
slow analog inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
switching outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
<Snap to value> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
RS232 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
<soft key> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
RS422 signals
soft keys. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17, 46, 76
processing signal interface
software
speed/torque/frequency. . . . . . . . .44
PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
RSER. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130
*RST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 software update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
SOPT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
<Source> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
S SPCLEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 spectrum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17, 25 speed inputs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43
safety hints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 speed/torque/frequency inputs
sample rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28, 32, 36 auxiliary supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
sample values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 differential signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
<Scale I> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86, 92 frequency range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
<Scale U> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86, 92 HTL signals. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44
SCNTR. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152 input resistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
scope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71, 83, 84 overload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
SCPI. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100 pins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174 RS422 signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
SCPI command names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 TTL signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
SCPL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 uncertainty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
SCPTRS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 <Split>. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85
SCPTRT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 <Split on rows> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
<Scroll>. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84 split phase system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
scroll wheel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46 SPNTR. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131
SCSR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 SPPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160

[Link] 203/206
 User Manual Instrument Family LMG600

SPPTRS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 ⅄ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
SPPTRT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 delta circuit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
SPSR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 female connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
SPSTAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 male connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
SPTLEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 narrow bandwidth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
SPTPOS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 star circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
SPVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 wide bandwidth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
SQNT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 <Symbol> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17, 85, 93
SQPT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
SRE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .163 SYNC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
*SRE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 sync settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
SREH. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .164 SYNCBW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
standard menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 synchronization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
standby . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 input signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
[STANDBY]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47, 49 output signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
standby key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 synchronization connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
star circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 SYNCLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
star commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 syntax
star conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 list. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102
<Start/Continue> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 syntax interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
status bar. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .77 SYSDATE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .164
status report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
status report tab
T
storage menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
<t/div> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
STB. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .162
tab
*STB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 files
sticky properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 storage menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
[STORAGE] . . . . . . . . . . . . 14, 46, 52, 92, 95 general
storage menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 instr. menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
files tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 log
log tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93 storage menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
status report tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 measurement
storage temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 instr. menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
<string program data> . . . . . . . . . 102, 103 status report
suffix storage menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
2 channel group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 tab keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
3 channel group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 tabs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
logical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 TDEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
n channel group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 technical assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
suffixes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Sum channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 temperatur
supply. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25 storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
mains voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
switching inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 temporary overvoltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
input signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 terminal
overload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 protective conductor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
pins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 THPCOF. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171
switching on/off. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49 THYS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
switching outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 <Time> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102, 103
closed switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42 <Time Zone>. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87
opened switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 timing
overload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
pins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 TLEV. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .172
reverse polarity. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42 TLPCOF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
symbol tolerance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29, 34, 38
ᚆ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 torque inputs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43
ᚊ. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17 [TOUCH] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47, 76
Δ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 touch element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

204/206 [Link]
 Index

touch key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 UTRMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139

touchscreen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88
Touchscreen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
touchscreen adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 V
<Track>. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84–86 values
<Transform> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79
transient overvoltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 entering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
TRANSIENTABORT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170 invalid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
TRANSIENTSTART . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170 sample. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71
trend graph . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 too big . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
*TRG. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114 <Values>. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82
trouble . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 vector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83, 86
TSCFG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 VGA interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
TSHARM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 <View> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
TSNORM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 voltage
TSSP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 mains supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
*TST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 overvoltage category . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
TTL signals temporary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
processing signal interface transient . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
speed/torque/frequency inputs.44 [VOLTAGE] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79–83, 85
two phase system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 voltage channel
<Type> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85, 93 L60-CH-A1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
typical task . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 L60-CH-B1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
TZONE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169 L60-CH-C1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
TZONELS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169

W
U *WAI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
UAC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 weight. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
UAUTO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156 WFAUTO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
UCF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 wheel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78
UDC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 scroll . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
UDLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 wide bandwidth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
UFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 WIRE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
UHRMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 wiring
UJACK. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155 current sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
UJLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156 dual channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
UMAX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 single channel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56
UMIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 triple channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
uncertainty voltage sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 <Wiring> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
processing signal interface WLPFILT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
analog inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
analog outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
speed/torque/frequency inputs.44 X
unpacking instrument . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 XSER. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131
update
software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
UPP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 Y
UREC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 <Y-Offset> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
URNG. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .158 <y/div> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
URNLS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .156
URNULS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .157
URSLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 Z
URSULS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 Z . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
USB connectors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46 <Zero rejection> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
USCA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 zeroconf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
used symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 *ZLANG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
user interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75 <Zoom> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85

[Link] 205/206
 User Manual Instrument Family LMG600

*ZSRST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
ZSUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158

206/206 [Link]